]> git.ipfire.org Git - thirdparty/gcc.git/blob - gcc/doc/tm.texi.in
Update copyright years.
[thirdparty/gcc.git] / gcc / doc / tm.texi.in
1 @c Copyright (C) 1988-2024 Free Software Foundation, Inc.
2 @c This is part of the GCC manual.
3 @c For copying conditions, see the file gcc.texi.
4
5 @node Target Macros
6 @chapter Target Description Macros and Functions
7 @cindex machine description macros
8 @cindex target description macros
9 @cindex macros, target description
10 @cindex @file{tm.h} macros
11
12 In addition to the file @file{@var{machine}.md}, a machine description
13 includes a C header file conventionally given the name
14 @file{@var{machine}.h} and a C source file named @file{@var{machine}.c}.
15 The header file defines numerous macros that convey the information
16 about the target machine that does not fit into the scheme of the
17 @file{.md} file. The file @file{tm.h} should be a link to
18 @file{@var{machine}.h}. The header file @file{config.h} includes
19 @file{tm.h} and most compiler source files include @file{config.h}. The
20 source file defines a variable @code{targetm}, which is a structure
21 containing pointers to functions and data relating to the target
22 machine. @file{@var{machine}.c} should also contain their definitions,
23 if they are not defined elsewhere in GCC, and other functions called
24 through the macros defined in the @file{.h} file.
25
26 @menu
27 * Target Structure:: The @code{targetm} variable.
28 * Driver:: Controlling how the driver runs the compilation passes.
29 * Run-time Target:: Defining @samp{-m} options like @option{-m68000} and @option{-m68020}.
30 * Per-Function Data:: Defining data structures for per-function information.
31 * Storage Layout:: Defining sizes and alignments of data.
32 * Type Layout:: Defining sizes and properties of basic user data types.
33 * Registers:: Naming and describing the hardware registers.
34 * Register Classes:: Defining the classes of hardware registers.
35 * Stack and Calling:: Defining which way the stack grows and by how much.
36 * Varargs:: Defining the varargs macros.
37 * Trampolines:: Code set up at run time to enter a nested function.
38 * Library Calls:: Controlling how library routines are implicitly called.
39 * Addressing Modes:: Defining addressing modes valid for memory operands.
40 * Anchored Addresses:: Defining how @option{-fsection-anchors} should work.
41 * Condition Code:: Defining how insns update the condition code.
42 * Costs:: Defining relative costs of different operations.
43 * Scheduling:: Adjusting the behavior of the instruction scheduler.
44 * Sections:: Dividing storage into text, data, and other sections.
45 * PIC:: Macros for position independent code.
46 * Assembler Format:: Defining how to write insns and pseudo-ops to output.
47 * Debugging Info:: Defining the format of debugging output.
48 * Floating Point:: Handling floating point for cross-compilers.
49 * Mode Switching:: Insertion of mode-switching instructions.
50 * Target Attributes:: Defining target-specific uses of @code{__attribute__}.
51 * Emulated TLS:: Emulated TLS support.
52 * MIPS Coprocessors:: MIPS coprocessor support and how to customize it.
53 * PCH Target:: Validity checking for precompiled headers.
54 * C++ ABI:: Controlling C++ ABI changes.
55 * D Language and ABI:: Controlling D ABI changes.
56 * Rust Language and ABI:: Controlling Rust ABI changes.
57 * Named Address Spaces:: Adding support for named address spaces
58 * Misc:: Everything else.
59 @end menu
60
61 @node Target Structure
62 @section The Global @code{targetm} Variable
63 @cindex target hooks
64 @cindex target functions
65
66 @deftypevar {struct gcc_target} targetm
67 The target @file{.c} file must define the global @code{targetm} variable
68 which contains pointers to functions and data relating to the target
69 machine. The variable is declared in @file{target.h};
70 @file{target-def.h} defines the macro @code{TARGET_INITIALIZER} which is
71 used to initialize the variable, and macros for the default initializers
72 for elements of the structure. The @file{.c} file should override those
73 macros for which the default definition is inappropriate. For example:
74 @smallexample
75 #include "target.h"
76 #include "target-def.h"
77
78 /* @r{Initialize the GCC target structure.} */
79
80 #undef TARGET_COMP_TYPE_ATTRIBUTES
81 #define TARGET_COMP_TYPE_ATTRIBUTES @var{machine}_comp_type_attributes
82
83 struct gcc_target targetm = TARGET_INITIALIZER;
84 @end smallexample
85 @end deftypevar
86
87 Where a macro should be defined in the @file{.c} file in this manner to
88 form part of the @code{targetm} structure, it is documented below as a
89 ``Target Hook'' with a prototype. Many macros will change in future
90 from being defined in the @file{.h} file to being part of the
91 @code{targetm} structure.
92
93 Similarly, there is a @code{targetcm} variable for hooks that are
94 specific to front ends for C-family languages, documented as ``C
95 Target Hook''. This is declared in @file{c-family/c-target.h}, the
96 initializer @code{TARGETCM_INITIALIZER} in
97 @file{c-family/c-target-def.h}. If targets initialize @code{targetcm}
98 themselves, they should set @code{target_has_targetcm=yes} in
99 @file{config.gcc}; otherwise a default definition is used.
100
101 Similarly, there is a @code{targetm_common} variable for hooks that
102 are shared between the compiler driver and the compilers proper,
103 documented as ``Common Target Hook''. This is declared in
104 @file{common/common-target.h}, the initializer
105 @code{TARGETM_COMMON_INITIALIZER} in
106 @file{common/common-target-def.h}. If targets initialize
107 @code{targetm_common} themselves, they should set
108 @code{target_has_targetm_common=yes} in @file{config.gcc}; otherwise a
109 default definition is used.
110
111 Similarly, there is a @code{targetdm} variable for hooks that are
112 specific to the D language front end, documented as ``D Target Hook''.
113 This is declared in @file{d/d-target.h}, the initializer
114 @code{TARGETDM_INITIALIZER} in @file{d/d-target-def.h}. If targets
115 initialize @code{targetdm} themselves, they should set
116 @code{target_has_targetdm=yes} in @file{config.gcc}; otherwise a default
117 definition is used.
118
119 Similarly, there is a @code{targetrustm} variable for hooks that are
120 specific to the Rust language front end, documented as ``Rust Target
121 Hook''. This is declared in @file{rust/rust-target.h}, the initializer
122 @code{TARGETRUSTM_INITIALIZER} in @file{rust/rust-target-def.h}.
123 If targets initialize @code{targetrustm} themselves, they should set
124 @code{target_has_targetrustm=yes} in @file{config.gcc}; otherwise a
125 default definition is used.
126
127 @node Driver
128 @section Controlling the Compilation Driver, @file{gcc}
129 @cindex driver
130 @cindex controlling the compilation driver
131
132 @c prevent bad page break with this line
133 You can control the compilation driver.
134
135 @defmac DRIVER_SELF_SPECS
136 A list of specs for the driver itself. It should be a suitable
137 initializer for an array of strings, with no surrounding braces.
138
139 The driver applies these specs to its own command line between loading
140 default @file{specs} files (but not command-line specified ones) and
141 choosing the multilib directory or running any subcommands. It
142 applies them in the order given, so each spec can depend on the
143 options added by earlier ones. It is also possible to remove options
144 using @samp{%<@var{option}} in the usual way.
145
146 This macro can be useful when a port has several interdependent target
147 options. It provides a way of standardizing the command line so
148 that the other specs are easier to write.
149
150 Do not define this macro if it does not need to do anything.
151 @end defmac
152
153 @defmac OPTION_DEFAULT_SPECS
154 A list of specs used to support configure-time default options (i.e.@:
155 @option{--with} options) in the driver. It should be a suitable initializer
156 for an array of structures, each containing two strings, without the
157 outermost pair of surrounding braces.
158
159 The first item in the pair is the name of the default. This must match
160 the code in @file{config.gcc} for the target. The second item is a spec
161 to apply if a default with this name was specified. The string
162 @samp{%(VALUE)} in the spec will be replaced by the value of the default
163 everywhere it occurs.
164
165 The driver will apply these specs to its own command line between loading
166 default @file{specs} files and processing @code{DRIVER_SELF_SPECS}, using
167 the same mechanism as @code{DRIVER_SELF_SPECS}.
168
169 Do not define this macro if it does not need to do anything.
170 @end defmac
171
172 @defmac CPP_SPEC
173 A C string constant that tells the GCC driver program options to
174 pass to CPP@. It can also specify how to translate options you
175 give to GCC into options for GCC to pass to the CPP@.
176
177 Do not define this macro if it does not need to do anything.
178 @end defmac
179
180 @defmac CPLUSPLUS_CPP_SPEC
181 This macro is just like @code{CPP_SPEC}, but is used for C++, rather
182 than C@. If you do not define this macro, then the value of
183 @code{CPP_SPEC} (if any) will be used instead.
184 @end defmac
185
186 @defmac CC1_SPEC
187 A C string constant that tells the GCC driver program options to
188 pass to @code{cc1}, @code{cc1plus}, @code{f771}, and the other language
189 front ends.
190 It can also specify how to translate options you give to GCC into options
191 for GCC to pass to front ends.
192
193 Do not define this macro if it does not need to do anything.
194 @end defmac
195
196 @defmac CC1PLUS_SPEC
197 A C string constant that tells the GCC driver program options to
198 pass to @code{cc1plus}. It can also specify how to translate options you
199 give to GCC into options for GCC to pass to the @code{cc1plus}.
200
201 Do not define this macro if it does not need to do anything.
202 Note that everything defined in CC1_SPEC is already passed to
203 @code{cc1plus} so there is no need to duplicate the contents of
204 CC1_SPEC in CC1PLUS_SPEC@.
205 @end defmac
206
207 @defmac ASM_SPEC
208 A C string constant that tells the GCC driver program options to
209 pass to the assembler. It can also specify how to translate options
210 you give to GCC into options for GCC to pass to the assembler.
211 See the file @file{sun3.h} for an example of this.
212
213 Do not define this macro if it does not need to do anything.
214 @end defmac
215
216 @defmac ASM_FINAL_SPEC
217 A C string constant that tells the GCC driver program how to
218 run any programs which cleanup after the normal assembler.
219 Normally, this is not needed. See the file @file{mips.h} for
220 an example of this.
221
222 Do not define this macro if it does not need to do anything.
223 @end defmac
224
225 @defmac AS_NEEDS_DASH_FOR_PIPED_INPUT
226 Define this macro, with no value, if the driver should give the assembler
227 an argument consisting of a single dash, @option{-}, to instruct it to
228 read from its standard input (which will be a pipe connected to the
229 output of the compiler proper). This argument is given after any
230 @option{-o} option specifying the name of the output file.
231
232 If you do not define this macro, the assembler is assumed to read its
233 standard input if given no non-option arguments. If your assembler
234 cannot read standard input at all, use a @samp{%@{pipe:%e@}} construct;
235 see @file{mips.h} for instance.
236 @end defmac
237
238 @defmac LINK_SPEC
239 A C string constant that tells the GCC driver program options to
240 pass to the linker. It can also specify how to translate options you
241 give to GCC into options for GCC to pass to the linker.
242
243 Do not define this macro if it does not need to do anything.
244 @end defmac
245
246 @defmac LIB_SPEC
247 Another C string constant used much like @code{LINK_SPEC}. The difference
248 between the two is that @code{LIB_SPEC} is used at the end of the
249 command given to the linker.
250
251 If this macro is not defined, a default is provided that
252 loads the standard C library from the usual place. See @file{gcc.cc}.
253 @end defmac
254
255 @defmac LIBGCC_SPEC
256 Another C string constant that tells the GCC driver program
257 how and when to place a reference to @file{libgcc.a} into the
258 linker command line. This constant is placed both before and after
259 the value of @code{LIB_SPEC}.
260
261 If this macro is not defined, the GCC driver provides a default that
262 passes the string @option{-lgcc} to the linker.
263 @end defmac
264
265 @defmac REAL_LIBGCC_SPEC
266 By default, if @code{ENABLE_SHARED_LIBGCC} is defined, the
267 @code{LIBGCC_SPEC} is not directly used by the driver program but is
268 instead modified to refer to different versions of @file{libgcc.a}
269 depending on the values of the command line flags @option{-static},
270 @option{-shared}, @option{-static-libgcc}, and @option{-shared-libgcc}. On
271 targets where these modifications are inappropriate, define
272 @code{REAL_LIBGCC_SPEC} instead. @code{REAL_LIBGCC_SPEC} tells the
273 driver how to place a reference to @file{libgcc} on the link command
274 line, but, unlike @code{LIBGCC_SPEC}, it is used unmodified.
275 @end defmac
276
277 @defmac USE_LD_AS_NEEDED
278 A macro that controls the modifications to @code{LIBGCC_SPEC}
279 mentioned in @code{REAL_LIBGCC_SPEC}. If nonzero, a spec will be
280 generated that uses @option{--as-needed} or equivalent options and the
281 shared @file{libgcc} in place of the
282 static exception handler library, when linking without any of
283 @code{-static}, @code{-static-libgcc}, or @code{-shared-libgcc}.
284 @end defmac
285
286 @defmac LINK_EH_SPEC
287 If defined, this C string constant is added to @code{LINK_SPEC}.
288 When @code{USE_LD_AS_NEEDED} is zero or undefined, it also affects
289 the modifications to @code{LIBGCC_SPEC} mentioned in
290 @code{REAL_LIBGCC_SPEC}.
291 @end defmac
292
293 @defmac STARTFILE_SPEC
294 Another C string constant used much like @code{LINK_SPEC}. The
295 difference between the two is that @code{STARTFILE_SPEC} is used at
296 the very beginning of the command given to the linker.
297
298 If this macro is not defined, a default is provided that loads the
299 standard C startup file from the usual place. See @file{gcc.cc}.
300 @end defmac
301
302 @defmac ENDFILE_SPEC
303 Another C string constant used much like @code{LINK_SPEC}. The
304 difference between the two is that @code{ENDFILE_SPEC} is used at
305 the very end of the command given to the linker.
306
307 Do not define this macro if it does not need to do anything.
308 @end defmac
309
310 @defmac THREAD_MODEL_SPEC
311 GCC @code{-v} will print the thread model GCC was configured to use.
312 However, this doesn't work on platforms that are multilibbed on thread
313 models, such as AIX 4.3. On such platforms, define
314 @code{THREAD_MODEL_SPEC} such that it evaluates to a string without
315 blanks that names one of the recognized thread models. @code{%*}, the
316 default value of this macro, will expand to the value of
317 @code{thread_file} set in @file{config.gcc}.
318 @end defmac
319
320 @defmac SYSROOT_SUFFIX_SPEC
321 Define this macro to add a suffix to the target sysroot when GCC is
322 configured with a sysroot. This will cause GCC to search for usr/lib,
323 et al, within sysroot+suffix.
324 @end defmac
325
326 @defmac SYSROOT_HEADERS_SUFFIX_SPEC
327 Define this macro to add a headers_suffix to the target sysroot when
328 GCC is configured with a sysroot. This will cause GCC to pass the
329 updated sysroot+headers_suffix to CPP, causing it to search for
330 usr/include, et al, within sysroot+headers_suffix.
331 @end defmac
332
333 @defmac EXTRA_SPECS
334 Define this macro to provide additional specifications to put in the
335 @file{specs} file that can be used in various specifications like
336 @code{CC1_SPEC}.
337
338 The definition should be an initializer for an array of structures,
339 containing a string constant, that defines the specification name, and a
340 string constant that provides the specification.
341
342 Do not define this macro if it does not need to do anything.
343
344 @code{EXTRA_SPECS} is useful when an architecture contains several
345 related targets, which have various @code{@dots{}_SPECS} which are similar
346 to each other, and the maintainer would like one central place to keep
347 these definitions.
348
349 For example, the PowerPC System V.4 targets use @code{EXTRA_SPECS} to
350 define either @code{_CALL_SYSV} when the System V calling sequence is
351 used or @code{_CALL_AIX} when the older AIX-based calling sequence is
352 used.
353
354 The @file{config/rs6000/rs6000.h} target file defines:
355
356 @smallexample
357 #define EXTRA_SPECS \
358 @{ "cpp_sysv_default", CPP_SYSV_DEFAULT @},
359
360 #define CPP_SYS_DEFAULT ""
361 @end smallexample
362
363 The @file{config/rs6000/sysv.h} target file defines:
364 @smallexample
365 #undef CPP_SPEC
366 #define CPP_SPEC \
367 "%@{posix: -D_POSIX_SOURCE @} \
368 %@{mcall-sysv: -D_CALL_SYSV @} \
369 %@{!mcall-sysv: %(cpp_sysv_default) @} \
370 %@{msoft-float: -D_SOFT_FLOAT@} %@{mcpu=403: -D_SOFT_FLOAT@}"
371
372 #undef CPP_SYSV_DEFAULT
373 #define CPP_SYSV_DEFAULT "-D_CALL_SYSV"
374 @end smallexample
375
376 while the @file{config/rs6000/eabiaix.h} target file defines
377 @code{CPP_SYSV_DEFAULT} as:
378
379 @smallexample
380 #undef CPP_SYSV_DEFAULT
381 #define CPP_SYSV_DEFAULT "-D_CALL_AIX"
382 @end smallexample
383 @end defmac
384
385 @defmac LINK_LIBGCC_SPECIAL_1
386 Define this macro if the driver program should find the library
387 @file{libgcc.a}. If you do not define this macro, the driver program will pass
388 the argument @option{-lgcc} to tell the linker to do the search.
389 @end defmac
390
391 @defmac LINK_GCC_C_SEQUENCE_SPEC
392 The sequence in which libgcc and libc are specified to the linker.
393 By default this is @code{%G %L %G}.
394 @end defmac
395
396 @defmac POST_LINK_SPEC
397 Define this macro to add additional steps to be executed after linker.
398 The default value of this macro is empty string.
399 @end defmac
400
401 @defmac LINK_COMMAND_SPEC
402 A C string constant giving the complete command line need to execute the
403 linker. When you do this, you will need to update your port each time a
404 change is made to the link command line within @file{gcc.cc}. Therefore,
405 define this macro only if you need to completely redefine the command
406 line for invoking the linker and there is no other way to accomplish
407 the effect you need. Overriding this macro may be avoidable by overriding
408 @code{LINK_GCC_C_SEQUENCE_SPEC} instead.
409 @end defmac
410
411 @hook TARGET_ALWAYS_STRIP_DOTDOT
412
413 @defmac MULTILIB_DEFAULTS
414 Define this macro as a C expression for the initializer of an array of
415 string to tell the driver program which options are defaults for this
416 target and thus do not need to be handled specially when using
417 @code{MULTILIB_OPTIONS}.
418
419 Do not define this macro if @code{MULTILIB_OPTIONS} is not defined in
420 the target makefile fragment or if none of the options listed in
421 @code{MULTILIB_OPTIONS} are set by default.
422 @xref{Target Fragment}.
423 @end defmac
424
425 @defmac RELATIVE_PREFIX_NOT_LINKDIR
426 Define this macro to tell @command{gcc} that it should only translate
427 a @option{-B} prefix into a @option{-L} linker option if the prefix
428 indicates an absolute file name.
429 @end defmac
430
431 @defmac MD_EXEC_PREFIX
432 If defined, this macro is an additional prefix to try after
433 @code{STANDARD_EXEC_PREFIX}. @code{MD_EXEC_PREFIX} is not searched
434 when the compiler is built as a cross
435 compiler. If you define @code{MD_EXEC_PREFIX}, then be sure to add it
436 to the list of directories used to find the assembler in @file{configure.ac}.
437 @end defmac
438
439 @defmac STANDARD_STARTFILE_PREFIX
440 Define this macro as a C string constant if you wish to override the
441 standard choice of @code{libdir} as the default prefix to
442 try when searching for startup files such as @file{crt0.o}.
443 @code{STANDARD_STARTFILE_PREFIX} is not searched when the compiler
444 is built as a cross compiler.
445 @end defmac
446
447 @defmac STANDARD_STARTFILE_PREFIX_1
448 Define this macro as a C string constant if you wish to override the
449 standard choice of @code{/lib} as a prefix to try after the default prefix
450 when searching for startup files such as @file{crt0.o}.
451 @code{STANDARD_STARTFILE_PREFIX_1} is not searched when the compiler
452 is built as a cross compiler.
453 @end defmac
454
455 @defmac STANDARD_STARTFILE_PREFIX_2
456 Define this macro as a C string constant if you wish to override the
457 standard choice of @code{/lib} as yet another prefix to try after the
458 default prefix when searching for startup files such as @file{crt0.o}.
459 @code{STANDARD_STARTFILE_PREFIX_2} is not searched when the compiler
460 is built as a cross compiler.
461 @end defmac
462
463 @defmac MD_STARTFILE_PREFIX
464 If defined, this macro supplies an additional prefix to try after the
465 standard prefixes. @code{MD_EXEC_PREFIX} is not searched when the
466 compiler is built as a cross compiler.
467 @end defmac
468
469 @defmac MD_STARTFILE_PREFIX_1
470 If defined, this macro supplies yet another prefix to try after the
471 standard prefixes. It is not searched when the compiler is built as a
472 cross compiler.
473 @end defmac
474
475 @defmac INIT_ENVIRONMENT
476 Define this macro as a C string constant if you wish to set environment
477 variables for programs called by the driver, such as the assembler and
478 loader. The driver passes the value of this macro to @code{putenv} to
479 initialize the necessary environment variables.
480 @end defmac
481
482 @defmac LOCAL_INCLUDE_DIR
483 Define this macro as a C string constant if you wish to override the
484 standard choice of @file{/usr/local/include} as the default prefix to
485 try when searching for local header files. @code{LOCAL_INCLUDE_DIR}
486 comes before @code{NATIVE_SYSTEM_HEADER_DIR} (set in
487 @file{config.gcc}, normally @file{/usr/include}) in the search order.
488
489 Cross compilers do not search either @file{/usr/local/include} or its
490 replacement.
491 @end defmac
492
493 @defmac NATIVE_SYSTEM_HEADER_COMPONENT
494 The ``component'' corresponding to @code{NATIVE_SYSTEM_HEADER_DIR}.
495 See @code{INCLUDE_DEFAULTS}, below, for the description of components.
496 If you do not define this macro, no component is used.
497 @end defmac
498
499 @defmac INCLUDE_DEFAULTS
500 Define this macro if you wish to override the entire default search path
501 for include files. For a native compiler, the default search path
502 usually consists of @code{GCC_INCLUDE_DIR}, @code{LOCAL_INCLUDE_DIR},
503 @code{GPLUSPLUS_INCLUDE_DIR}, and
504 @code{NATIVE_SYSTEM_HEADER_DIR}. In addition, @code{GPLUSPLUS_INCLUDE_DIR}
505 and @code{GCC_INCLUDE_DIR} are defined automatically by @file{Makefile},
506 and specify private search areas for GCC@. The directory
507 @code{GPLUSPLUS_INCLUDE_DIR} is used only for C++ programs.
508
509 The definition should be an initializer for an array of structures.
510 Each array element should have four elements: the directory name (a
511 string constant), the component name (also a string constant), a flag
512 for C++-only directories,
513 and a flag showing that the includes in the directory don't need to be
514 wrapped in @code{extern @samp{C}} when compiling C++. Mark the end of
515 the array with a null element.
516
517 The component name denotes what GNU package the include file is part of,
518 if any, in all uppercase letters. For example, it might be @samp{GCC}
519 or @samp{BINUTILS}. If the package is part of a vendor-supplied
520 operating system, code the component name as @samp{0}.
521
522 For example, here is the definition used for VAX/VMS:
523
524 @smallexample
525 #define INCLUDE_DEFAULTS \
526 @{ \
527 @{ "GNU_GXX_INCLUDE:", "G++", 1, 1@}, \
528 @{ "GNU_CC_INCLUDE:", "GCC", 0, 0@}, \
529 @{ "SYS$SYSROOT:[SYSLIB.]", 0, 0, 0@}, \
530 @{ ".", 0, 0, 0@}, \
531 @{ 0, 0, 0, 0@} \
532 @}
533 @end smallexample
534 @end defmac
535
536 Here is the order of prefixes tried for exec files:
537
538 @enumerate
539 @item
540 Any prefixes specified by the user with @option{-B}.
541
542 @item
543 The environment variable @code{GCC_EXEC_PREFIX} or, if @code{GCC_EXEC_PREFIX}
544 is not set and the compiler has not been installed in the configure-time
545 @var{prefix}, the location in which the compiler has actually been installed.
546
547 @item
548 The directories specified by the environment variable @code{COMPILER_PATH}.
549
550 @item
551 The macro @code{STANDARD_EXEC_PREFIX}, if the compiler has been installed
552 in the configured-time @var{prefix}.
553
554 @item
555 The location @file{/usr/libexec/gcc/}, but only if this is a native compiler.
556
557 @item
558 The location @file{/usr/lib/gcc/}, but only if this is a native compiler.
559
560 @item
561 The macro @code{MD_EXEC_PREFIX}, if defined, but only if this is a native
562 compiler.
563 @end enumerate
564
565 Here is the order of prefixes tried for startfiles:
566
567 @enumerate
568 @item
569 Any prefixes specified by the user with @option{-B}.
570
571 @item
572 The environment variable @code{GCC_EXEC_PREFIX} or its automatically determined
573 value based on the installed toolchain location.
574
575 @item
576 The directories specified by the environment variable @code{LIBRARY_PATH}
577 (or port-specific name; native only, cross compilers do not use this).
578
579 @item
580 The macro @code{STANDARD_EXEC_PREFIX}, but only if the toolchain is installed
581 in the configured @var{prefix} or this is a native compiler.
582
583 @item
584 The location @file{/usr/lib/gcc/}, but only if this is a native compiler.
585
586 @item
587 The macro @code{MD_EXEC_PREFIX}, if defined, but only if this is a native
588 compiler.
589
590 @item
591 The macro @code{MD_STARTFILE_PREFIX}, if defined, but only if this is a
592 native compiler, or we have a target system root.
593
594 @item
595 The macro @code{MD_STARTFILE_PREFIX_1}, if defined, but only if this is a
596 native compiler, or we have a target system root.
597
598 @item
599 The macro @code{STANDARD_STARTFILE_PREFIX}, with any sysroot modifications.
600 If this path is relative it will be prefixed by @code{GCC_EXEC_PREFIX} and
601 the machine suffix or @code{STANDARD_EXEC_PREFIX} and the machine suffix.
602
603 @item
604 The macro @code{STANDARD_STARTFILE_PREFIX_1}, but only if this is a native
605 compiler, or we have a target system root. The default for this macro is
606 @file{/lib/}.
607
608 @item
609 The macro @code{STANDARD_STARTFILE_PREFIX_2}, but only if this is a native
610 compiler, or we have a target system root. The default for this macro is
611 @file{/usr/lib/}.
612 @end enumerate
613
614 @node Run-time Target
615 @section Run-time Target Specification
616 @cindex run-time target specification
617 @cindex predefined macros
618 @cindex target specifications
619
620 @c prevent bad page break with this line
621 Here are run-time target specifications.
622
623 @defmac TARGET_CPU_CPP_BUILTINS ()
624 This function-like macro expands to a block of code that defines
625 built-in preprocessor macros and assertions for the target CPU, using
626 the functions @code{builtin_define}, @code{builtin_define_std} and
627 @code{builtin_assert}. When the front end
628 calls this macro it provides a trailing semicolon, and since it has
629 finished command line option processing your code can use those
630 results freely.
631
632 @code{builtin_assert} takes a string in the form you pass to the
633 command-line option @option{-A}, such as @code{cpu=mips}, and creates
634 the assertion. @code{builtin_define} takes a string in the form
635 accepted by option @option{-D} and unconditionally defines the macro.
636
637 @code{builtin_define_std} takes a string representing the name of an
638 object-like macro. If it doesn't lie in the user's namespace,
639 @code{builtin_define_std} defines it unconditionally. Otherwise, it
640 defines a version with two leading underscores, and another version
641 with two leading and trailing underscores, and defines the original
642 only if an ISO standard was not requested on the command line. For
643 example, passing @code{unix} defines @code{__unix}, @code{__unix__}
644 and possibly @code{unix}; passing @code{_mips} defines @code{__mips},
645 @code{__mips__} and possibly @code{_mips}, and passing @code{_ABI64}
646 defines only @code{_ABI64}.
647
648 You can also test for the C dialect being compiled. The variable
649 @code{c_language} is set to one of @code{clk_c}, @code{clk_cplusplus}
650 or @code{clk_objective_c}. Note that if we are preprocessing
651 assembler, this variable will be @code{clk_c} but the function-like
652 macro @code{preprocessing_asm_p()} will return true, so you might want
653 to check for that first. If you need to check for strict ANSI, the
654 variable @code{flag_iso} can be used. The function-like macro
655 @code{preprocessing_trad_p()} can be used to check for traditional
656 preprocessing.
657 @end defmac
658
659 @defmac TARGET_OS_CPP_BUILTINS ()
660 Similarly to @code{TARGET_CPU_CPP_BUILTINS} but this macro is optional
661 and is used for the target operating system instead.
662 @end defmac
663
664 @defmac TARGET_OBJFMT_CPP_BUILTINS ()
665 Similarly to @code{TARGET_CPU_CPP_BUILTINS} but this macro is optional
666 and is used for the target object format. @file{elfos.h} uses this
667 macro to define @code{__ELF__}, so you probably do not need to define
668 it yourself.
669 @end defmac
670
671 @deftypevar {extern int} target_flags
672 This variable is declared in @file{options.h}, which is included before
673 any target-specific headers.
674 @end deftypevar
675
676 @hook TARGET_DEFAULT_TARGET_FLAGS
677 This variable specifies the initial value of @code{target_flags}.
678 Its default setting is 0.
679 @end deftypevr
680
681 @cindex optional hardware or system features
682 @cindex features, optional, in system conventions
683
684 @hook TARGET_HANDLE_OPTION
685 This hook is called whenever the user specifies one of the
686 target-specific options described by the @file{.opt} definition files
687 (@pxref{Options}). It has the opportunity to do some option-specific
688 processing and should return true if the option is valid. The default
689 definition does nothing but return true.
690
691 @var{decoded} specifies the option and its arguments. @var{opts} and
692 @var{opts_set} are the @code{gcc_options} structures to be used for
693 storing option state, and @var{loc} is the location at which the
694 option was passed (@code{UNKNOWN_LOCATION} except for options passed
695 via attributes).
696 @end deftypefn
697
698 @hook TARGET_HANDLE_C_OPTION
699 This target hook is called whenever the user specifies one of the
700 target-specific C language family options described by the @file{.opt}
701 definition files(@pxref{Options}). It has the opportunity to do some
702 option-specific processing and should return true if the option is
703 valid. The arguments are like for @code{TARGET_HANDLE_OPTION}. The
704 default definition does nothing but return false.
705
706 In general, you should use @code{TARGET_HANDLE_OPTION} to handle
707 options. However, if processing an option requires routines that are
708 only available in the C (and related language) front ends, then you
709 should use @code{TARGET_HANDLE_C_OPTION} instead.
710 @end deftypefn
711
712 @hook TARGET_OBJC_CONSTRUCT_STRING_OBJECT
713
714 @hook TARGET_OBJC_DECLARE_UNRESOLVED_CLASS_REFERENCE
715
716 @hook TARGET_OBJC_DECLARE_CLASS_DEFINITION
717
718 @hook TARGET_STRING_OBJECT_REF_TYPE_P
719
720 @hook TARGET_CHECK_STRING_OBJECT_FORMAT_ARG
721
722 @hook TARGET_OVERRIDE_OPTIONS_AFTER_CHANGE
723
724 @defmac C_COMMON_OVERRIDE_OPTIONS
725 This is similar to the @code{TARGET_OPTION_OVERRIDE} hook
726 but is only used in the C
727 language frontends (C, Objective-C, C++, Objective-C++) and so can be
728 used to alter option flag variables which only exist in those
729 frontends.
730 @end defmac
731
732 @hook TARGET_OPTION_OPTIMIZATION_TABLE
733 Some machines may desire to change what optimizations are performed for
734 various optimization levels. This variable, if defined, describes
735 options to enable at particular sets of optimization levels. These
736 options are processed once
737 just after the optimization level is determined and before the remainder
738 of the command options have been parsed, so may be overridden by other
739 options passed explicitly.
740
741 This processing is run once at program startup and when the optimization
742 options are changed via @code{#pragma GCC optimize} or by using the
743 @code{optimize} attribute.
744 @end deftypevr
745
746 @hook TARGET_OPTION_INIT_STRUCT
747
748 @hook TARGET_COMPUTE_MULTILIB
749
750
751 @defmac SWITCHABLE_TARGET
752 Some targets need to switch between substantially different subtargets
753 during compilation. For example, the MIPS target has one subtarget for
754 the traditional MIPS architecture and another for MIPS16. Source code
755 can switch between these two subarchitectures using the @code{mips16}
756 and @code{nomips16} attributes.
757
758 Such subtargets can differ in things like the set of available
759 registers, the set of available instructions, the costs of various
760 operations, and so on. GCC caches a lot of this type of information
761 in global variables, and recomputing them for each subtarget takes a
762 significant amount of time. The compiler therefore provides a facility
763 for maintaining several versions of the global variables and quickly
764 switching between them; see @file{target-globals.h} for details.
765
766 Define this macro to 1 if your target needs this facility. The default
767 is 0.
768 @end defmac
769
770 @hook TARGET_FLOAT_EXCEPTIONS_ROUNDING_SUPPORTED_P
771
772 @node Per-Function Data
773 @section Defining data structures for per-function information.
774 @cindex per-function data
775 @cindex data structures
776
777 If the target needs to store information on a per-function basis, GCC
778 provides a macro and a couple of variables to allow this. Note, just
779 using statics to store the information is a bad idea, since GCC supports
780 nested functions, so you can be halfway through encoding one function
781 when another one comes along.
782
783 GCC defines a data structure called @code{struct function} which
784 contains all of the data specific to an individual function. This
785 structure contains a field called @code{machine} whose type is
786 @code{struct machine_function *}, which can be used by targets to point
787 to their own specific data.
788
789 If a target needs per-function specific data it should define the type
790 @code{struct machine_function} and also the macro @code{INIT_EXPANDERS}.
791 This macro should be used to initialize the function pointer
792 @code{init_machine_status}. This pointer is explained below.
793
794 One typical use of per-function, target specific data is to create an
795 RTX to hold the register containing the function's return address. This
796 RTX can then be used to implement the @code{__builtin_return_address}
797 function, for level 0.
798
799 Note---earlier implementations of GCC used a single data area to hold
800 all of the per-function information. Thus when processing of a nested
801 function began the old per-function data had to be pushed onto a
802 stack, and when the processing was finished, it had to be popped off the
803 stack. GCC used to provide function pointers called
804 @code{save_machine_status} and @code{restore_machine_status} to handle
805 the saving and restoring of the target specific information. Since the
806 single data area approach is no longer used, these pointers are no
807 longer supported.
808
809 @defmac INIT_EXPANDERS
810 Macro called to initialize any target specific information. This macro
811 is called once per function, before generation of any RTL has begun.
812 The intention of this macro is to allow the initialization of the
813 function pointer @code{init_machine_status}.
814 @end defmac
815
816 @deftypevar {void (*)(struct function *)} init_machine_status
817 If this function pointer is non-@code{NULL} it will be called once per
818 function, before function compilation starts, in order to allow the
819 target to perform any target specific initialization of the
820 @code{struct function} structure. It is intended that this would be
821 used to initialize the @code{machine} of that structure.
822
823 @code{struct machine_function} structures are expected to be freed by GC@.
824 Generally, any memory that they reference must be allocated by using
825 GC allocation, including the structure itself.
826 @end deftypevar
827
828 @node Storage Layout
829 @section Storage Layout
830 @cindex storage layout
831
832 Note that the definitions of the macros in this table which are sizes or
833 alignments measured in bits do not need to be constant. They can be C
834 expressions that refer to static variables, such as the @code{target_flags}.
835 @xref{Run-time Target}.
836
837 @defmac BITS_BIG_ENDIAN
838 Define this macro to have the value 1 if the most significant bit in a
839 byte has the lowest number; otherwise define it to have the value zero.
840 This means that bit-field instructions count from the most significant
841 bit. If the machine has no bit-field instructions, then this must still
842 be defined, but it doesn't matter which value it is defined to. This
843 macro need not be a constant.
844
845 This macro does not affect the way structure fields are packed into
846 bytes or words; that is controlled by @code{BYTES_BIG_ENDIAN}.
847 @end defmac
848
849 @defmac BYTES_BIG_ENDIAN
850 Define this macro to have the value 1 if the most significant byte in a
851 word has the lowest number. This macro need not be a constant.
852 @end defmac
853
854 @defmac WORDS_BIG_ENDIAN
855 Define this macro to have the value 1 if, in a multiword object, the
856 most significant word has the lowest number. This applies to both
857 memory locations and registers; see @code{REG_WORDS_BIG_ENDIAN} if the
858 order of words in memory is not the same as the order in registers. This
859 macro need not be a constant.
860 @end defmac
861
862 @defmac REG_WORDS_BIG_ENDIAN
863 On some machines, the order of words in a multiword object differs between
864 registers in memory. In such a situation, define this macro to describe
865 the order of words in a register. The macro @code{WORDS_BIG_ENDIAN} controls
866 the order of words in memory.
867 @end defmac
868
869 @defmac FLOAT_WORDS_BIG_ENDIAN
870 Define this macro to have the value 1 if @code{DFmode}, @code{XFmode} or
871 @code{TFmode} floating point numbers are stored in memory with the word
872 containing the sign bit at the lowest address; otherwise define it to
873 have the value 0. This macro need not be a constant.
874
875 You need not define this macro if the ordering is the same as for
876 multi-word integers.
877 @end defmac
878
879 @defmac BITS_PER_WORD
880 Number of bits in a word. If you do not define this macro, the default
881 is @code{BITS_PER_UNIT * UNITS_PER_WORD}.
882 @end defmac
883
884 @defmac MAX_BITS_PER_WORD
885 Maximum number of bits in a word. If this is undefined, the default is
886 @code{BITS_PER_WORD}. Otherwise, it is the constant value that is the
887 largest value that @code{BITS_PER_WORD} can have at run-time.
888 @end defmac
889
890 @defmac UNITS_PER_WORD
891 Number of storage units in a word; normally the size of a general-purpose
892 register, a power of two from 1 or 8.
893 @end defmac
894
895 @defmac MIN_UNITS_PER_WORD
896 Minimum number of units in a word. If this is undefined, the default is
897 @code{UNITS_PER_WORD}. Otherwise, it is the constant value that is the
898 smallest value that @code{UNITS_PER_WORD} can have at run-time.
899 @end defmac
900
901 @defmac POINTER_SIZE
902 Width of a pointer, in bits. You must specify a value no wider than the
903 width of @code{Pmode}. If it is not equal to the width of @code{Pmode},
904 you must define @code{POINTERS_EXTEND_UNSIGNED}. If you do not specify
905 a value the default is @code{BITS_PER_WORD}.
906 @end defmac
907
908 @defmac POINTERS_EXTEND_UNSIGNED
909 A C expression that determines how pointers should be extended from
910 @code{ptr_mode} to either @code{Pmode} or @code{word_mode}. It is
911 greater than zero if pointers should be zero-extended, zero if they
912 should be sign-extended, and negative if some other sort of conversion
913 is needed. In the last case, the extension is done by the target's
914 @code{ptr_extend} instruction.
915
916 You need not define this macro if the @code{ptr_mode}, @code{Pmode}
917 and @code{word_mode} are all the same width.
918 @end defmac
919
920 @defmac PROMOTE_MODE (@var{m}, @var{unsignedp}, @var{type})
921 A macro to update @var{m} and @var{unsignedp} when an object whose type
922 is @var{type} and which has the specified mode and signedness is to be
923 stored in a register. This macro is only called when @var{type} is a
924 scalar type.
925
926 On most RISC machines, which only have operations that operate on a full
927 register, define this macro to set @var{m} to @code{word_mode} if
928 @var{m} is an integer mode narrower than @code{BITS_PER_WORD}. In most
929 cases, only integer modes should be widened because wider-precision
930 floating-point operations are usually more expensive than their narrower
931 counterparts.
932
933 For most machines, the macro definition does not change @var{unsignedp}.
934 However, some machines, have instructions that preferentially handle
935 either signed or unsigned quantities of certain modes. For example, on
936 the DEC Alpha, 32-bit loads from memory and 32-bit add instructions
937 sign-extend the result to 64 bits. On such machines, set
938 @var{unsignedp} according to which kind of extension is more efficient.
939
940 Do not define this macro if it would never modify @var{m}.
941 @end defmac
942
943 @hook TARGET_C_EXCESS_PRECISION
944 Return a value, with the same meaning as the C99 macro
945 @code{FLT_EVAL_METHOD} that describes which excess precision should be
946 applied.
947
948 @hook TARGET_C_BITINT_TYPE_INFO
949
950 @hook TARGET_PROMOTE_FUNCTION_MODE
951
952 @defmac PARM_BOUNDARY
953 Normal alignment required for function parameters on the stack, in
954 bits. All stack parameters receive at least this much alignment
955 regardless of data type. On most machines, this is the same as the
956 size of an integer.
957 @end defmac
958
959 @defmac STACK_BOUNDARY
960 Define this macro to the minimum alignment enforced by hardware for the
961 stack pointer on this machine. The definition is a C expression for the
962 desired alignment (measured in bits). This value is used as a default
963 if @code{PREFERRED_STACK_BOUNDARY} is not defined. On most machines,
964 this should be the same as @code{PARM_BOUNDARY}.
965 @end defmac
966
967 @defmac PREFERRED_STACK_BOUNDARY
968 Define this macro if you wish to preserve a certain alignment for the
969 stack pointer, greater than what the hardware enforces. The definition
970 is a C expression for the desired alignment (measured in bits). This
971 macro must evaluate to a value equal to or larger than
972 @code{STACK_BOUNDARY}.
973 @end defmac
974
975 @defmac INCOMING_STACK_BOUNDARY
976 Define this macro if the incoming stack boundary may be different
977 from @code{PREFERRED_STACK_BOUNDARY}. This macro must evaluate
978 to a value equal to or larger than @code{STACK_BOUNDARY}.
979 @end defmac
980
981 @defmac FUNCTION_BOUNDARY
982 Alignment required for a function entry point, in bits.
983 @end defmac
984
985 @defmac BIGGEST_ALIGNMENT
986 Biggest alignment that any data type can require on this machine, in
987 bits. Note that this is not the biggest alignment that is supported,
988 just the biggest alignment that, when violated, may cause a fault.
989 @end defmac
990
991 @hook TARGET_ABSOLUTE_BIGGEST_ALIGNMENT
992
993 @defmac MALLOC_ABI_ALIGNMENT
994 Alignment, in bits, a C conformant malloc implementation has to
995 provide. If not defined, the default value is @code{BITS_PER_WORD}.
996 @end defmac
997
998 @defmac ATTRIBUTE_ALIGNED_VALUE
999 Alignment used by the @code{__attribute__ ((aligned))} construct. If
1000 not defined, the default value is @code{BIGGEST_ALIGNMENT}.
1001 @end defmac
1002
1003 @defmac MINIMUM_ATOMIC_ALIGNMENT
1004 If defined, the smallest alignment, in bits, that can be given to an
1005 object that can be referenced in one operation, without disturbing any
1006 nearby object. Normally, this is @code{BITS_PER_UNIT}, but may be larger
1007 on machines that don't have byte or half-word store operations.
1008 @end defmac
1009
1010 @defmac BIGGEST_FIELD_ALIGNMENT
1011 Biggest alignment that any structure or union field can require on this
1012 machine, in bits. If defined, this overrides @code{BIGGEST_ALIGNMENT} for
1013 structure and union fields only, unless the field alignment has been set
1014 by the @code{__attribute__ ((aligned (@var{n})))} construct.
1015 @end defmac
1016
1017 @defmac ADJUST_FIELD_ALIGN (@var{field}, @var{type}, @var{computed})
1018 An expression for the alignment of a structure field @var{field} of
1019 type @var{type} if the alignment computed in the usual way (including
1020 applying of @code{BIGGEST_ALIGNMENT} and @code{BIGGEST_FIELD_ALIGNMENT} to the
1021 alignment) is @var{computed}. It overrides alignment only if the
1022 field alignment has not been set by the
1023 @code{__attribute__ ((aligned (@var{n})))} construct. Note that @var{field}
1024 may be @code{NULL_TREE} in case we just query for the minimum alignment
1025 of a field of type @var{type} in structure context.
1026 @end defmac
1027
1028 @defmac MAX_STACK_ALIGNMENT
1029 Biggest stack alignment guaranteed by the backend. Use this macro
1030 to specify the maximum alignment of a variable on stack.
1031
1032 If not defined, the default value is @code{STACK_BOUNDARY}.
1033
1034 @c FIXME: The default should be @code{PREFERRED_STACK_BOUNDARY}.
1035 @c But the fix for PR 32893 indicates that we can only guarantee
1036 @c maximum stack alignment on stack up to @code{STACK_BOUNDARY}, not
1037 @c @code{PREFERRED_STACK_BOUNDARY}, if stack alignment isn't supported.
1038 @end defmac
1039
1040 @defmac MAX_OFILE_ALIGNMENT
1041 Biggest alignment supported by the object file format of this machine.
1042 Use this macro to limit the alignment which can be specified using the
1043 @code{__attribute__ ((aligned (@var{n})))} construct for functions and
1044 objects with static storage duration. The alignment of automatic
1045 objects may exceed the object file format maximum up to the maximum
1046 supported by GCC. If not defined, the default value is
1047 @code{BIGGEST_ALIGNMENT}.
1048
1049 On systems that use ELF, the default (in @file{config/elfos.h}) is
1050 the largest supported 32-bit ELF section alignment representable on
1051 a 32-bit host e.g.@: @samp{(((uint64_t) 1 << 28) * 8)}.
1052 On 32-bit ELF the largest supported section alignment in bits is
1053 @samp{(0x80000000 * 8)}, but this is not representable on 32-bit hosts.
1054 @end defmac
1055
1056 @hook TARGET_LOWER_LOCAL_DECL_ALIGNMENT
1057
1058 @hook TARGET_STATIC_RTX_ALIGNMENT
1059
1060 @defmac DATA_ALIGNMENT (@var{type}, @var{basic-align})
1061 If defined, a C expression to compute the alignment for a variable in
1062 the static store. @var{type} is the data type, and @var{basic-align} is
1063 the alignment that the object would ordinarily have. The value of this
1064 macro is used instead of that alignment to align the object.
1065
1066 If this macro is not defined, then @var{basic-align} is used.
1067
1068 @findex strcpy
1069 One use of this macro is to increase alignment of medium-size data to
1070 make it all fit in fewer cache lines. Another is to cause character
1071 arrays to be word-aligned so that @code{strcpy} calls that copy
1072 constants to character arrays can be done inline.
1073 @end defmac
1074
1075 @defmac DATA_ABI_ALIGNMENT (@var{type}, @var{basic-align})
1076 Similar to @code{DATA_ALIGNMENT}, but for the cases where the ABI mandates
1077 some alignment increase, instead of optimization only purposes. E.g.@
1078 AMD x86-64 psABI says that variables with array type larger than 15 bytes
1079 must be aligned to 16 byte boundaries.
1080
1081 If this macro is not defined, then @var{basic-align} is used.
1082 @end defmac
1083
1084 @hook TARGET_CONSTANT_ALIGNMENT
1085
1086 @defmac LOCAL_ALIGNMENT (@var{type}, @var{basic-align})
1087 If defined, a C expression to compute the alignment for a variable in
1088 the local store. @var{type} is the data type, and @var{basic-align} is
1089 the alignment that the object would ordinarily have. The value of this
1090 macro is used instead of that alignment to align the object.
1091
1092 If this macro is not defined, then @var{basic-align} is used.
1093
1094 One use of this macro is to increase alignment of medium-size data to
1095 make it all fit in fewer cache lines.
1096
1097 If the value of this macro has a type, it should be an unsigned type.
1098 @end defmac
1099
1100 @hook TARGET_VECTOR_ALIGNMENT
1101
1102 @defmac STACK_SLOT_ALIGNMENT (@var{type}, @var{mode}, @var{basic-align})
1103 If defined, a C expression to compute the alignment for stack slot.
1104 @var{type} is the data type, @var{mode} is the widest mode available,
1105 and @var{basic-align} is the alignment that the slot would ordinarily
1106 have. The value of this macro is used instead of that alignment to
1107 align the slot.
1108
1109 If this macro is not defined, then @var{basic-align} is used when
1110 @var{type} is @code{NULL}. Otherwise, @code{LOCAL_ALIGNMENT} will
1111 be used.
1112
1113 This macro is to set alignment of stack slot to the maximum alignment
1114 of all possible modes which the slot may have.
1115
1116 If the value of this macro has a type, it should be an unsigned type.
1117 @end defmac
1118
1119 @defmac LOCAL_DECL_ALIGNMENT (@var{decl})
1120 If defined, a C expression to compute the alignment for a local
1121 variable @var{decl}.
1122
1123 If this macro is not defined, then
1124 @code{LOCAL_ALIGNMENT (TREE_TYPE (@var{decl}), DECL_ALIGN (@var{decl}))}
1125 is used.
1126
1127 One use of this macro is to increase alignment of medium-size data to
1128 make it all fit in fewer cache lines.
1129
1130 If the value of this macro has a type, it should be an unsigned type.
1131 @end defmac
1132
1133 @defmac MINIMUM_ALIGNMENT (@var{exp}, @var{mode}, @var{align})
1134 If defined, a C expression to compute the minimum required alignment
1135 for dynamic stack realignment purposes for @var{exp} (a type or decl),
1136 @var{mode}, assuming normal alignment @var{align}.
1137
1138 If this macro is not defined, then @var{align} will be used.
1139 @end defmac
1140
1141 @defmac EMPTY_FIELD_BOUNDARY
1142 Alignment in bits to be given to a structure bit-field that follows an
1143 empty field such as @code{int : 0;}.
1144
1145 If @code{PCC_BITFIELD_TYPE_MATTERS} is true, it overrides this macro.
1146 @end defmac
1147
1148 @defmac STRUCTURE_SIZE_BOUNDARY
1149 Number of bits which any structure or union's size must be a multiple of.
1150 Each structure or union's size is rounded up to a multiple of this.
1151
1152 If you do not define this macro, the default is the same as
1153 @code{BITS_PER_UNIT}.
1154 @end defmac
1155
1156 @defmac STRICT_ALIGNMENT
1157 Define this macro to be the value 1 if instructions will fail to work
1158 if given data not on the nominal alignment. If instructions will merely
1159 go slower in that case, define this macro as 0.
1160 @end defmac
1161
1162 @defmac PCC_BITFIELD_TYPE_MATTERS
1163 Define this if you wish to imitate the way many other C compilers handle
1164 alignment of bit-fields and the structures that contain them.
1165
1166 The behavior is that the type written for a named bit-field (@code{int},
1167 @code{short}, or other integer type) imposes an alignment for the entire
1168 structure, as if the structure really did contain an ordinary field of
1169 that type. In addition, the bit-field is placed within the structure so
1170 that it would fit within such a field, not crossing a boundary for it.
1171
1172 Thus, on most machines, a named bit-field whose type is written as
1173 @code{int} would not cross a four-byte boundary, and would force
1174 four-byte alignment for the whole structure. (The alignment used may
1175 not be four bytes; it is controlled by the other alignment parameters.)
1176
1177 An unnamed bit-field will not affect the alignment of the containing
1178 structure.
1179
1180 If the macro is defined, its definition should be a C expression;
1181 a nonzero value for the expression enables this behavior.
1182
1183 Note that if this macro is not defined, or its value is zero, some
1184 bit-fields may cross more than one alignment boundary. The compiler can
1185 support such references if there are @samp{insv}, @samp{extv}, and
1186 @samp{extzv} insns that can directly reference memory.
1187
1188 The other known way of making bit-fields work is to define
1189 @code{STRUCTURE_SIZE_BOUNDARY} as large as @code{BIGGEST_ALIGNMENT}.
1190 Then every structure can be accessed with fullwords.
1191
1192 Unless the machine has bit-field instructions or you define
1193 @code{STRUCTURE_SIZE_BOUNDARY} that way, you must define
1194 @code{PCC_BITFIELD_TYPE_MATTERS} to have a nonzero value.
1195
1196 If your aim is to make GCC use the same conventions for laying out
1197 bit-fields as are used by another compiler, here is how to investigate
1198 what the other compiler does. Compile and run this program:
1199
1200 @smallexample
1201 struct foo1
1202 @{
1203 char x;
1204 char :0;
1205 char y;
1206 @};
1207
1208 struct foo2
1209 @{
1210 char x;
1211 int :0;
1212 char y;
1213 @};
1214
1215 main ()
1216 @{
1217 printf ("Size of foo1 is %d\n",
1218 sizeof (struct foo1));
1219 printf ("Size of foo2 is %d\n",
1220 sizeof (struct foo2));
1221 exit (0);
1222 @}
1223 @end smallexample
1224
1225 If this prints 2 and 5, then the compiler's behavior is what you would
1226 get from @code{PCC_BITFIELD_TYPE_MATTERS}.
1227 @end defmac
1228
1229 @defmac BITFIELD_NBYTES_LIMITED
1230 Like @code{PCC_BITFIELD_TYPE_MATTERS} except that its effect is limited
1231 to aligning a bit-field within the structure.
1232 @end defmac
1233
1234 @hook TARGET_ALIGN_ANON_BITFIELD
1235
1236 @hook TARGET_NARROW_VOLATILE_BITFIELD
1237
1238 @hook TARGET_MEMBER_TYPE_FORCES_BLK
1239
1240 @defmac ROUND_TYPE_ALIGN (@var{type}, @var{computed}, @var{specified})
1241 Define this macro as an expression for the alignment of a type (given
1242 by @var{type} as a tree node) if the alignment computed in the usual
1243 way is @var{computed} and the alignment explicitly specified was
1244 @var{specified}.
1245
1246 The default is to use @var{specified} if it is larger; otherwise, use
1247 the smaller of @var{computed} and @code{BIGGEST_ALIGNMENT}
1248 @end defmac
1249
1250 @defmac MAX_FIXED_MODE_SIZE
1251 An integer expression for the size in bits of the largest integer
1252 machine mode that should actually be used. All integer machine modes of
1253 this size or smaller can be used for structures and unions with the
1254 appropriate sizes. If this macro is undefined, @code{GET_MODE_BITSIZE
1255 (DImode)} is assumed.
1256 @end defmac
1257
1258 @defmac STACK_SAVEAREA_MODE (@var{save_level})
1259 If defined, an expression of type @code{machine_mode} that
1260 specifies the mode of the save area operand of a
1261 @code{save_stack_@var{level}} named pattern (@pxref{Standard Names}).
1262 @var{save_level} is one of @code{SAVE_BLOCK}, @code{SAVE_FUNCTION}, or
1263 @code{SAVE_NONLOCAL} and selects which of the three named patterns is
1264 having its mode specified.
1265
1266 You need not define this macro if it always returns @code{Pmode}. You
1267 would most commonly define this macro if the
1268 @code{save_stack_@var{level}} patterns need to support both a 32- and a
1269 64-bit mode.
1270 @end defmac
1271
1272 @defmac STACK_SIZE_MODE
1273 If defined, an expression of type @code{machine_mode} that
1274 specifies the mode of the size increment operand of an
1275 @code{allocate_stack} named pattern (@pxref{Standard Names}).
1276
1277 You need not define this macro if it always returns @code{word_mode}.
1278 You would most commonly define this macro if the @code{allocate_stack}
1279 pattern needs to support both a 32- and a 64-bit mode.
1280 @end defmac
1281
1282 @hook TARGET_LIBGCC_CMP_RETURN_MODE
1283
1284 @hook TARGET_LIBGCC_SHIFT_COUNT_MODE
1285
1286 @hook TARGET_UNWIND_WORD_MODE
1287
1288 @hook TARGET_MS_BITFIELD_LAYOUT_P
1289
1290 @hook TARGET_DECIMAL_FLOAT_SUPPORTED_P
1291
1292 @hook TARGET_FIXED_POINT_SUPPORTED_P
1293
1294 @hook TARGET_EXPAND_TO_RTL_HOOK
1295
1296 @hook TARGET_INSTANTIATE_DECLS
1297
1298 @hook TARGET_MANGLE_TYPE
1299
1300 @hook TARGET_EMIT_SUPPORT_TINFOS
1301
1302 @node Type Layout
1303 @section Layout of Source Language Data Types
1304
1305 These macros define the sizes and other characteristics of the standard
1306 basic data types used in programs being compiled. Unlike the macros in
1307 the previous section, these apply to specific features of C and related
1308 languages, rather than to fundamental aspects of storage layout.
1309
1310 @defmac INT_TYPE_SIZE
1311 A C expression for the size in bits of the type @code{int} on the
1312 target machine. If you don't define this, the default is one word.
1313 @end defmac
1314
1315 @defmac SHORT_TYPE_SIZE
1316 A C expression for the size in bits of the type @code{short} on the
1317 target machine. If you don't define this, the default is half a word.
1318 (If this would be less than one storage unit, it is rounded up to one
1319 unit.)
1320 @end defmac
1321
1322 @defmac LONG_TYPE_SIZE
1323 A C expression for the size in bits of the type @code{long} on the
1324 target machine. If you don't define this, the default is one word.
1325 @end defmac
1326
1327 @defmac ADA_LONG_TYPE_SIZE
1328 On some machines, the size used for the Ada equivalent of the type
1329 @code{long} by a native Ada compiler differs from that used by C@. In
1330 that situation, define this macro to be a C expression to be used for
1331 the size of that type. If you don't define this, the default is the
1332 value of @code{LONG_TYPE_SIZE}.
1333 @end defmac
1334
1335 @defmac LONG_LONG_TYPE_SIZE
1336 A C expression for the size in bits of the type @code{long long} on the
1337 target machine. If you don't define this, the default is two
1338 words. If you want to support GNU Ada on your machine, the value of this
1339 macro must be at least 64.
1340 @end defmac
1341
1342 @defmac CHAR_TYPE_SIZE
1343 A C expression for the size in bits of the type @code{char} on the
1344 target machine. If you don't define this, the default is
1345 @code{BITS_PER_UNIT}.
1346 @end defmac
1347
1348 @defmac BOOL_TYPE_SIZE
1349 A C expression for the size in bits of the C++ type @code{bool} and
1350 C99 type @code{_Bool} on the target machine. If you don't define
1351 this, and you probably shouldn't, the default is @code{CHAR_TYPE_SIZE}.
1352 @end defmac
1353
1354 @defmac FLOAT_TYPE_SIZE
1355 A C expression for the size in bits of the type @code{float} on the
1356 target machine. If you don't define this, the default is one word.
1357 @end defmac
1358
1359 @defmac DOUBLE_TYPE_SIZE
1360 A C expression for the size in bits of the type @code{double} on the
1361 target machine. If you don't define this, the default is two
1362 words.
1363 @end defmac
1364
1365 @defmac LONG_DOUBLE_TYPE_SIZE
1366 A C expression for the size in bits of the type @code{long double} on
1367 the target machine. If you don't define this, the default is two
1368 words.
1369 @end defmac
1370
1371 @defmac SHORT_FRACT_TYPE_SIZE
1372 A C expression for the size in bits of the type @code{short _Fract} on
1373 the target machine. If you don't define this, the default is
1374 @code{BITS_PER_UNIT}.
1375 @end defmac
1376
1377 @defmac FRACT_TYPE_SIZE
1378 A C expression for the size in bits of the type @code{_Fract} on
1379 the target machine. If you don't define this, the default is
1380 @code{BITS_PER_UNIT * 2}.
1381 @end defmac
1382
1383 @defmac LONG_FRACT_TYPE_SIZE
1384 A C expression for the size in bits of the type @code{long _Fract} on
1385 the target machine. If you don't define this, the default is
1386 @code{BITS_PER_UNIT * 4}.
1387 @end defmac
1388
1389 @defmac LONG_LONG_FRACT_TYPE_SIZE
1390 A C expression for the size in bits of the type @code{long long _Fract} on
1391 the target machine. If you don't define this, the default is
1392 @code{BITS_PER_UNIT * 8}.
1393 @end defmac
1394
1395 @defmac SHORT_ACCUM_TYPE_SIZE
1396 A C expression for the size in bits of the type @code{short _Accum} on
1397 the target machine. If you don't define this, the default is
1398 @code{BITS_PER_UNIT * 2}.
1399 @end defmac
1400
1401 @defmac ACCUM_TYPE_SIZE
1402 A C expression for the size in bits of the type @code{_Accum} on
1403 the target machine. If you don't define this, the default is
1404 @code{BITS_PER_UNIT * 4}.
1405 @end defmac
1406
1407 @defmac LONG_ACCUM_TYPE_SIZE
1408 A C expression for the size in bits of the type @code{long _Accum} on
1409 the target machine. If you don't define this, the default is
1410 @code{BITS_PER_UNIT * 8}.
1411 @end defmac
1412
1413 @defmac LONG_LONG_ACCUM_TYPE_SIZE
1414 A C expression for the size in bits of the type @code{long long _Accum} on
1415 the target machine. If you don't define this, the default is
1416 @code{BITS_PER_UNIT * 16}.
1417 @end defmac
1418
1419 @defmac LIBGCC2_GNU_PREFIX
1420 This macro corresponds to the @code{TARGET_LIBFUNC_GNU_PREFIX} target
1421 hook and should be defined if that hook is overriden to be true. It
1422 causes function names in libgcc to be changed to use a @code{__gnu_}
1423 prefix for their name rather than the default @code{__}. A port which
1424 uses this macro should also arrange to use @file{t-gnu-prefix} in
1425 the libgcc @file{config.host}.
1426 @end defmac
1427
1428 @defmac WIDEST_HARDWARE_FP_SIZE
1429 A C expression for the size in bits of the widest floating-point format
1430 supported by the hardware. If you define this macro, you must specify a
1431 value less than or equal to the value of @code{LONG_DOUBLE_TYPE_SIZE}.
1432 If you do not define this macro, the value of @code{LONG_DOUBLE_TYPE_SIZE}
1433 is the default.
1434 @end defmac
1435
1436 @defmac DEFAULT_SIGNED_CHAR
1437 An expression whose value is 1 or 0, according to whether the type
1438 @code{char} should be signed or unsigned by default. The user can
1439 always override this default with the options @option{-fsigned-char}
1440 and @option{-funsigned-char}.
1441 @end defmac
1442
1443 @hook TARGET_DEFAULT_SHORT_ENUMS
1444
1445 @defmac SIZE_TYPE
1446 A C expression for a string describing the name of the data type to use
1447 for size values. The typedef name @code{size_t} is defined using the
1448 contents of the string.
1449
1450 The string can contain more than one keyword. If so, separate them with
1451 spaces, and write first any length keyword, then @code{unsigned} if
1452 appropriate, and finally @code{int}. The string must exactly match one
1453 of the data type names defined in the function
1454 @code{c_common_nodes_and_builtins} in the file @file{c-family/c-common.cc}.
1455 You may not omit @code{int} or change the order---that would cause the
1456 compiler to crash on startup.
1457
1458 If you don't define this macro, the default is @code{"long unsigned
1459 int"}.
1460 @end defmac
1461
1462 @defmac SIZETYPE
1463 GCC defines internal types (@code{sizetype}, @code{ssizetype},
1464 @code{bitsizetype} and @code{sbitsizetype}) for expressions
1465 dealing with size. This macro is a C expression for a string describing
1466 the name of the data type from which the precision of @code{sizetype}
1467 is extracted.
1468
1469 The string has the same restrictions as @code{SIZE_TYPE} string.
1470
1471 If you don't define this macro, the default is @code{SIZE_TYPE}.
1472 @end defmac
1473
1474 @defmac PTRDIFF_TYPE
1475 A C expression for a string describing the name of the data type to use
1476 for the result of subtracting two pointers. The typedef name
1477 @code{ptrdiff_t} is defined using the contents of the string. See
1478 @code{SIZE_TYPE} above for more information.
1479
1480 If you don't define this macro, the default is @code{"long int"}.
1481 @end defmac
1482
1483 @defmac WCHAR_TYPE
1484 A C expression for a string describing the name of the data type to use
1485 for wide characters. The typedef name @code{wchar_t} is defined using
1486 the contents of the string. See @code{SIZE_TYPE} above for more
1487 information.
1488
1489 If you don't define this macro, the default is @code{"int"}.
1490 @end defmac
1491
1492 @defmac WCHAR_TYPE_SIZE
1493 A C expression for the size in bits of the data type for wide
1494 characters. This is used in @code{cpp}, which cannot make use of
1495 @code{WCHAR_TYPE}.
1496 @end defmac
1497
1498 @defmac WINT_TYPE
1499 A C expression for a string describing the name of the data type to
1500 use for wide characters passed to @code{printf} and returned from
1501 @code{getwc}. The typedef name @code{wint_t} is defined using the
1502 contents of the string. See @code{SIZE_TYPE} above for more
1503 information.
1504
1505 If you don't define this macro, the default is @code{"unsigned int"}.
1506 @end defmac
1507
1508 @defmac INTMAX_TYPE
1509 A C expression for a string describing the name of the data type that
1510 can represent any value of any standard or extended signed integer type.
1511 The typedef name @code{intmax_t} is defined using the contents of the
1512 string. See @code{SIZE_TYPE} above for more information.
1513
1514 If you don't define this macro, the default is the first of
1515 @code{"int"}, @code{"long int"}, or @code{"long long int"} that has as
1516 much precision as @code{long long int}.
1517 @end defmac
1518
1519 @defmac UINTMAX_TYPE
1520 A C expression for a string describing the name of the data type that
1521 can represent any value of any standard or extended unsigned integer
1522 type. The typedef name @code{uintmax_t} is defined using the contents
1523 of the string. See @code{SIZE_TYPE} above for more information.
1524
1525 If you don't define this macro, the default is the first of
1526 @code{"unsigned int"}, @code{"long unsigned int"}, or @code{"long long
1527 unsigned int"} that has as much precision as @code{long long unsigned
1528 int}.
1529 @end defmac
1530
1531 @defmac SIG_ATOMIC_TYPE
1532 @defmacx INT8_TYPE
1533 @defmacx INT16_TYPE
1534 @defmacx INT32_TYPE
1535 @defmacx INT64_TYPE
1536 @defmacx UINT8_TYPE
1537 @defmacx UINT16_TYPE
1538 @defmacx UINT32_TYPE
1539 @defmacx UINT64_TYPE
1540 @defmacx INT_LEAST8_TYPE
1541 @defmacx INT_LEAST16_TYPE
1542 @defmacx INT_LEAST32_TYPE
1543 @defmacx INT_LEAST64_TYPE
1544 @defmacx UINT_LEAST8_TYPE
1545 @defmacx UINT_LEAST16_TYPE
1546 @defmacx UINT_LEAST32_TYPE
1547 @defmacx UINT_LEAST64_TYPE
1548 @defmacx INT_FAST8_TYPE
1549 @defmacx INT_FAST16_TYPE
1550 @defmacx INT_FAST32_TYPE
1551 @defmacx INT_FAST64_TYPE
1552 @defmacx UINT_FAST8_TYPE
1553 @defmacx UINT_FAST16_TYPE
1554 @defmacx UINT_FAST32_TYPE
1555 @defmacx UINT_FAST64_TYPE
1556 @defmacx INTPTR_TYPE
1557 @defmacx UINTPTR_TYPE
1558 C expressions for the standard types @code{sig_atomic_t},
1559 @code{int8_t}, @code{int16_t}, @code{int32_t}, @code{int64_t},
1560 @code{uint8_t}, @code{uint16_t}, @code{uint32_t}, @code{uint64_t},
1561 @code{int_least8_t}, @code{int_least16_t}, @code{int_least32_t},
1562 @code{int_least64_t}, @code{uint_least8_t}, @code{uint_least16_t},
1563 @code{uint_least32_t}, @code{uint_least64_t}, @code{int_fast8_t},
1564 @code{int_fast16_t}, @code{int_fast32_t}, @code{int_fast64_t},
1565 @code{uint_fast8_t}, @code{uint_fast16_t}, @code{uint_fast32_t},
1566 @code{uint_fast64_t}, @code{intptr_t}, and @code{uintptr_t}. See
1567 @code{SIZE_TYPE} above for more information.
1568
1569 If any of these macros evaluates to a null pointer, the corresponding
1570 type is not supported; if GCC is configured to provide
1571 @code{<stdint.h>} in such a case, the header provided may not conform
1572 to C99, depending on the type in question. The defaults for all of
1573 these macros are null pointers.
1574 @end defmac
1575
1576 @defmac TARGET_PTRMEMFUNC_VBIT_LOCATION
1577 The C++ compiler represents a pointer-to-member-function with a struct
1578 that looks like:
1579
1580 @smallexample
1581 struct @{
1582 union @{
1583 void (*fn)();
1584 ptrdiff_t vtable_index;
1585 @};
1586 ptrdiff_t delta;
1587 @};
1588 @end smallexample
1589
1590 @noindent
1591 The C++ compiler must use one bit to indicate whether the function that
1592 will be called through a pointer-to-member-function is virtual.
1593 Normally, we assume that the low-order bit of a function pointer must
1594 always be zero. Then, by ensuring that the vtable_index is odd, we can
1595 distinguish which variant of the union is in use. But, on some
1596 platforms function pointers can be odd, and so this doesn't work. In
1597 that case, we use the low-order bit of the @code{delta} field, and shift
1598 the remainder of the @code{delta} field to the left.
1599
1600 GCC will automatically make the right selection about where to store
1601 this bit using the @code{FUNCTION_BOUNDARY} setting for your platform.
1602 However, some platforms such as ARM/Thumb have @code{FUNCTION_BOUNDARY}
1603 set such that functions always start at even addresses, but the lowest
1604 bit of pointers to functions indicate whether the function at that
1605 address is in ARM or Thumb mode. If this is the case of your
1606 architecture, you should define this macro to
1607 @code{ptrmemfunc_vbit_in_delta}.
1608
1609 In general, you should not have to define this macro. On architectures
1610 in which function addresses are always even, according to
1611 @code{FUNCTION_BOUNDARY}, GCC will automatically define this macro to
1612 @code{ptrmemfunc_vbit_in_pfn}.
1613 @end defmac
1614
1615 @defmac TARGET_VTABLE_USES_DESCRIPTORS
1616 Normally, the C++ compiler uses function pointers in vtables. This
1617 macro allows the target to change to use ``function descriptors''
1618 instead. Function descriptors are found on targets for whom a
1619 function pointer is actually a small data structure. Normally the
1620 data structure consists of the actual code address plus a data
1621 pointer to which the function's data is relative.
1622
1623 If vtables are used, the value of this macro should be the number
1624 of words that the function descriptor occupies.
1625 @end defmac
1626
1627 @defmac TARGET_VTABLE_ENTRY_ALIGN
1628 By default, the vtable entries are void pointers, the so the alignment
1629 is the same as pointer alignment. The value of this macro specifies
1630 the alignment of the vtable entry in bits. It should be defined only
1631 when special alignment is necessary. */
1632 @end defmac
1633
1634 @defmac TARGET_VTABLE_DATA_ENTRY_DISTANCE
1635 There are a few non-descriptor entries in the vtable at offsets below
1636 zero. If these entries must be padded (say, to preserve the alignment
1637 specified by @code{TARGET_VTABLE_ENTRY_ALIGN}), set this to the number
1638 of words in each data entry.
1639 @end defmac
1640
1641 @node Registers
1642 @section Register Usage
1643 @cindex register usage
1644
1645 This section explains how to describe what registers the target machine
1646 has, and how (in general) they can be used.
1647
1648 The description of which registers a specific instruction can use is
1649 done with register classes; see @ref{Register Classes}. For information
1650 on using registers to access a stack frame, see @ref{Frame Registers}.
1651 For passing values in registers, see @ref{Register Arguments}.
1652 For returning values in registers, see @ref{Scalar Return}.
1653
1654 @menu
1655 * Register Basics:: Number and kinds of registers.
1656 * Allocation Order:: Order in which registers are allocated.
1657 * Values in Registers:: What kinds of values each reg can hold.
1658 * Leaf Functions:: Renumbering registers for leaf functions.
1659 * Stack Registers:: Handling a register stack such as 80387.
1660 @end menu
1661
1662 @node Register Basics
1663 @subsection Basic Characteristics of Registers
1664
1665 @c prevent bad page break with this line
1666 Registers have various characteristics.
1667
1668 @defmac FIRST_PSEUDO_REGISTER
1669 Number of hardware registers known to the compiler. They receive
1670 numbers 0 through @code{FIRST_PSEUDO_REGISTER-1}; thus, the first
1671 pseudo register's number really is assigned the number
1672 @code{FIRST_PSEUDO_REGISTER}.
1673 @end defmac
1674
1675 @defmac FIXED_REGISTERS
1676 @cindex fixed register
1677 An initializer that says which registers are used for fixed purposes
1678 all throughout the compiled code and are therefore not available for
1679 general allocation. These would include the stack pointer, the frame
1680 pointer (except on machines where that can be used as a general
1681 register when no frame pointer is needed), the program counter on
1682 machines where that is considered one of the addressable registers,
1683 and any other numbered register with a standard use.
1684
1685 This information is expressed as a sequence of numbers, separated by
1686 commas and surrounded by braces. The @var{n}th number is 1 if
1687 register @var{n} is fixed, 0 otherwise.
1688
1689 The table initialized from this macro, and the table initialized by
1690 the following one, may be overridden at run time either automatically,
1691 by the actions of the macro @code{CONDITIONAL_REGISTER_USAGE}, or by
1692 the user with the command options @option{-ffixed-@var{reg}},
1693 @option{-fcall-used-@var{reg}} and @option{-fcall-saved-@var{reg}}.
1694 @end defmac
1695
1696 @defmac CALL_USED_REGISTERS
1697 @cindex call-used register
1698 @cindex call-clobbered register
1699 @cindex call-saved register
1700 Like @code{FIXED_REGISTERS} but has 1 for each register that is
1701 clobbered (in general) by function calls as well as for fixed
1702 registers. This macro therefore identifies the registers that are not
1703 available for general allocation of values that must live across
1704 function calls.
1705
1706 If a register has 0 in @code{CALL_USED_REGISTERS}, the compiler
1707 automatically saves it on function entry and restores it on function
1708 exit, if the register is used within the function.
1709
1710 Exactly one of @code{CALL_USED_REGISTERS} and @code{CALL_REALLY_USED_REGISTERS}
1711 must be defined. Modern ports should define @code{CALL_REALLY_USED_REGISTERS}.
1712 @end defmac
1713
1714 @defmac CALL_REALLY_USED_REGISTERS
1715 @cindex call-used register
1716 @cindex call-clobbered register
1717 @cindex call-saved register
1718 Like @code{CALL_USED_REGISTERS} except this macro doesn't require
1719 that the entire set of @code{FIXED_REGISTERS} be included.
1720 (@code{CALL_USED_REGISTERS} must be a superset of @code{FIXED_REGISTERS}).
1721
1722 Exactly one of @code{CALL_USED_REGISTERS} and @code{CALL_REALLY_USED_REGISTERS}
1723 must be defined. Modern ports should define @code{CALL_REALLY_USED_REGISTERS}.
1724 @end defmac
1725
1726 @cindex call-used register
1727 @cindex call-clobbered register
1728 @cindex call-saved register
1729 @hook TARGET_FNTYPE_ABI
1730
1731 @hook TARGET_INSN_CALLEE_ABI
1732
1733 @cindex call-used register
1734 @cindex call-clobbered register
1735 @cindex call-saved register
1736 @hook TARGET_HARD_REGNO_CALL_PART_CLOBBERED
1737
1738 @hook TARGET_GET_MULTILIB_ABI_NAME
1739
1740 @findex fixed_regs
1741 @findex call_used_regs
1742 @findex global_regs
1743 @findex reg_names
1744 @findex reg_class_contents
1745 @hook TARGET_CONDITIONAL_REGISTER_USAGE
1746
1747 @defmac INCOMING_REGNO (@var{out})
1748 Define this macro if the target machine has register windows. This C
1749 expression returns the register number as seen by the called function
1750 corresponding to the register number @var{out} as seen by the calling
1751 function. Return @var{out} if register number @var{out} is not an
1752 outbound register.
1753 @end defmac
1754
1755 @defmac OUTGOING_REGNO (@var{in})
1756 Define this macro if the target machine has register windows. This C
1757 expression returns the register number as seen by the calling function
1758 corresponding to the register number @var{in} as seen by the called
1759 function. Return @var{in} if register number @var{in} is not an inbound
1760 register.
1761 @end defmac
1762
1763 @defmac LOCAL_REGNO (@var{regno})
1764 Define this macro if the target machine has register windows. This C
1765 expression returns true if the register is call-saved but is in the
1766 register window. Unlike most call-saved registers, such registers
1767 need not be explicitly restored on function exit or during non-local
1768 gotos.
1769 @end defmac
1770
1771 @defmac PC_REGNUM
1772 If the program counter has a register number, define this as that
1773 register number. Otherwise, do not define it.
1774 @end defmac
1775
1776 @node Allocation Order
1777 @subsection Order of Allocation of Registers
1778 @cindex order of register allocation
1779 @cindex register allocation order
1780
1781 @c prevent bad page break with this line
1782 Registers are allocated in order.
1783
1784 @defmac REG_ALLOC_ORDER
1785 If defined, an initializer for a vector of integers, containing the
1786 numbers of hard registers in the order in which GCC should prefer
1787 to use them (from most preferred to least).
1788
1789 If this macro is not defined, registers are used lowest numbered first
1790 (all else being equal).
1791
1792 One use of this macro is on machines where the highest numbered
1793 registers must always be saved and the save-multiple-registers
1794 instruction supports only sequences of consecutive registers. On such
1795 machines, define @code{REG_ALLOC_ORDER} to be an initializer that lists
1796 the highest numbered allocable register first.
1797 @end defmac
1798
1799 @defmac ADJUST_REG_ALLOC_ORDER
1800 A C statement (sans semicolon) to choose the order in which to allocate
1801 hard registers for pseudo-registers local to a basic block.
1802
1803 Store the desired register order in the array @code{reg_alloc_order}.
1804 Element 0 should be the register to allocate first; element 1, the next
1805 register; and so on.
1806
1807 The macro body should not assume anything about the contents of
1808 @code{reg_alloc_order} before execution of the macro.
1809
1810 On most machines, it is not necessary to define this macro.
1811 @end defmac
1812
1813 @defmac HONOR_REG_ALLOC_ORDER
1814 Normally, IRA tries to estimate the costs for saving a register in the
1815 prologue and restoring it in the epilogue. This discourages it from
1816 using call-saved registers. If a machine wants to ensure that IRA
1817 allocates registers in the order given by REG_ALLOC_ORDER even if some
1818 call-saved registers appear earlier than call-used ones, then define this
1819 macro as a C expression to nonzero. Default is 0.
1820 @end defmac
1821
1822 @defmac IRA_HARD_REGNO_ADD_COST_MULTIPLIER (@var{regno})
1823 In some case register allocation order is not enough for the
1824 Integrated Register Allocator (@acronym{IRA}) to generate a good code.
1825 If this macro is defined, it should return a floating point value
1826 based on @var{regno}. The cost of using @var{regno} for a pseudo will
1827 be increased by approximately the pseudo's usage frequency times the
1828 value returned by this macro. Not defining this macro is equivalent
1829 to having it always return @code{0.0}.
1830
1831 On most machines, it is not necessary to define this macro.
1832 @end defmac
1833
1834 @node Values in Registers
1835 @subsection How Values Fit in Registers
1836
1837 This section discusses the macros that describe which kinds of values
1838 (specifically, which machine modes) each register can hold, and how many
1839 consecutive registers are needed for a given mode.
1840
1841 @hook TARGET_HARD_REGNO_NREGS
1842
1843 @defmac HARD_REGNO_NREGS_HAS_PADDING (@var{regno}, @var{mode})
1844 A C expression that is nonzero if a value of mode @var{mode}, stored
1845 in memory, ends with padding that causes it to take up more space than
1846 in registers starting at register number @var{regno} (as determined by
1847 multiplying GCC's notion of the size of the register when containing
1848 this mode by the number of registers returned by
1849 @code{TARGET_HARD_REGNO_NREGS}). By default this is zero.
1850
1851 For example, if a floating-point value is stored in three 32-bit
1852 registers but takes up 128 bits in memory, then this would be
1853 nonzero.
1854
1855 This macros only needs to be defined if there are cases where
1856 @code{subreg_get_info}
1857 would otherwise wrongly determine that a @code{subreg} can be
1858 represented by an offset to the register number, when in fact such a
1859 @code{subreg} would contain some of the padding not stored in
1860 registers and so not be representable.
1861 @end defmac
1862
1863 @defmac HARD_REGNO_NREGS_WITH_PADDING (@var{regno}, @var{mode})
1864 For values of @var{regno} and @var{mode} for which
1865 @code{HARD_REGNO_NREGS_HAS_PADDING} returns nonzero, a C expression
1866 returning the greater number of registers required to hold the value
1867 including any padding. In the example above, the value would be four.
1868 @end defmac
1869
1870 @defmac REGMODE_NATURAL_SIZE (@var{mode})
1871 Define this macro if the natural size of registers that hold values
1872 of mode @var{mode} is not the word size. It is a C expression that
1873 should give the natural size in bytes for the specified mode. It is
1874 used by the register allocator to try to optimize its results. This
1875 happens for example on SPARC 64-bit where the natural size of
1876 floating-point registers is still 32-bit.
1877 @end defmac
1878
1879 @hook TARGET_HARD_REGNO_MODE_OK
1880
1881 @defmac HARD_REGNO_RENAME_OK (@var{from}, @var{to})
1882 A C expression that is nonzero if it is OK to rename a hard register
1883 @var{from} to another hard register @var{to}.
1884
1885 One common use of this macro is to prevent renaming of a register to
1886 another register that is not saved by a prologue in an interrupt
1887 handler.
1888
1889 The default is always nonzero.
1890 @end defmac
1891
1892 @hook TARGET_MODES_TIEABLE_P
1893
1894 @hook TARGET_HARD_REGNO_SCRATCH_OK
1895
1896 @defmac AVOID_CCMODE_COPIES
1897 Define this macro if the compiler should avoid copies to/from @code{CCmode}
1898 registers. You should only define this macro if support for copying to/from
1899 @code{CCmode} is incomplete.
1900 @end defmac
1901
1902 @node Leaf Functions
1903 @subsection Handling Leaf Functions
1904
1905 @cindex leaf functions
1906 @cindex functions, leaf
1907 On some machines, a leaf function (i.e., one which makes no calls) can run
1908 more efficiently if it does not make its own register window. Often this
1909 means it is required to receive its arguments in the registers where they
1910 are passed by the caller, instead of the registers where they would
1911 normally arrive.
1912
1913 The special treatment for leaf functions generally applies only when
1914 other conditions are met; for example, often they may use only those
1915 registers for its own variables and temporaries. We use the term ``leaf
1916 function'' to mean a function that is suitable for this special
1917 handling, so that functions with no calls are not necessarily ``leaf
1918 functions''.
1919
1920 GCC assigns register numbers before it knows whether the function is
1921 suitable for leaf function treatment. So it needs to renumber the
1922 registers in order to output a leaf function. The following macros
1923 accomplish this.
1924
1925 @defmac LEAF_REGISTERS
1926 Name of a char vector, indexed by hard register number, which
1927 contains 1 for a register that is allowable in a candidate for leaf
1928 function treatment.
1929
1930 If leaf function treatment involves renumbering the registers, then the
1931 registers marked here should be the ones before renumbering---those that
1932 GCC would ordinarily allocate. The registers which will actually be
1933 used in the assembler code, after renumbering, should not be marked with 1
1934 in this vector.
1935
1936 Define this macro only if the target machine offers a way to optimize
1937 the treatment of leaf functions.
1938 @end defmac
1939
1940 @defmac LEAF_REG_REMAP (@var{regno})
1941 A C expression whose value is the register number to which @var{regno}
1942 should be renumbered, when a function is treated as a leaf function.
1943
1944 If @var{regno} is a register number which should not appear in a leaf
1945 function before renumbering, then the expression should yield @minus{}1, which
1946 will cause the compiler to abort.
1947
1948 Define this macro only if the target machine offers a way to optimize the
1949 treatment of leaf functions, and registers need to be renumbered to do
1950 this.
1951 @end defmac
1952
1953 @findex current_function_is_leaf
1954 @findex current_function_uses_only_leaf_regs
1955 @code{TARGET_ASM_FUNCTION_PROLOGUE} and
1956 @code{TARGET_ASM_FUNCTION_EPILOGUE} must usually treat leaf functions
1957 specially. They can test the C variable @code{current_function_is_leaf}
1958 which is nonzero for leaf functions. @code{current_function_is_leaf} is
1959 set prior to local register allocation and is valid for the remaining
1960 compiler passes. They can also test the C variable
1961 @code{current_function_uses_only_leaf_regs} which is nonzero for leaf
1962 functions which only use leaf registers.
1963 @code{current_function_uses_only_leaf_regs} is valid after all passes
1964 that modify the instructions have been run and is only useful if
1965 @code{LEAF_REGISTERS} is defined.
1966 @c changed this to fix overfull. ALSO: why the "it" at the beginning
1967 @c of the next paragraph?! --mew 2feb93
1968
1969 @node Stack Registers
1970 @subsection Registers That Form a Stack
1971
1972 There are special features to handle computers where some of the
1973 ``registers'' form a stack. Stack registers are normally written by
1974 pushing onto the stack, and are numbered relative to the top of the
1975 stack.
1976
1977 Currently, GCC can only handle one group of stack-like registers, and
1978 they must be consecutively numbered. Furthermore, the existing
1979 support for stack-like registers is specific to the 80387 floating
1980 point coprocessor. If you have a new architecture that uses
1981 stack-like registers, you will need to do substantial work on
1982 @file{reg-stack.cc} and write your machine description to cooperate
1983 with it, as well as defining these macros.
1984
1985 @defmac STACK_REGS
1986 Define this if the machine has any stack-like registers.
1987 @end defmac
1988
1989 @defmac STACK_REG_COVER_CLASS
1990 This is a cover class containing the stack registers. Define this if
1991 the machine has any stack-like registers.
1992 @end defmac
1993
1994 @defmac FIRST_STACK_REG
1995 The number of the first stack-like register. This one is the top
1996 of the stack.
1997 @end defmac
1998
1999 @defmac LAST_STACK_REG
2000 The number of the last stack-like register. This one is the bottom of
2001 the stack.
2002 @end defmac
2003
2004 @node Register Classes
2005 @section Register Classes
2006 @cindex register class definitions
2007 @cindex class definitions, register
2008
2009 On many machines, the numbered registers are not all equivalent.
2010 For example, certain registers may not be allowed for indexed addressing;
2011 certain registers may not be allowed in some instructions. These machine
2012 restrictions are described to the compiler using @dfn{register classes}.
2013
2014 You define a number of register classes, giving each one a name and saying
2015 which of the registers belong to it. Then you can specify register classes
2016 that are allowed as operands to particular instruction patterns.
2017
2018 @findex ALL_REGS
2019 @findex NO_REGS
2020 In general, each register will belong to several classes. In fact, one
2021 class must be named @code{ALL_REGS} and contain all the registers. Another
2022 class must be named @code{NO_REGS} and contain no registers. Often the
2023 union of two classes will be another class; however, this is not required.
2024
2025 @findex GENERAL_REGS
2026 One of the classes must be named @code{GENERAL_REGS}. There is nothing
2027 terribly special about the name, but the operand constraint letters
2028 @samp{r} and @samp{g} specify this class. If @code{GENERAL_REGS} is
2029 the same as @code{ALL_REGS}, just define it as a macro which expands
2030 to @code{ALL_REGS}.
2031
2032 Order the classes so that if class @var{x} is contained in class @var{y}
2033 then @var{x} has a lower class number than @var{y}.
2034
2035 The way classes other than @code{GENERAL_REGS} are specified in operand
2036 constraints is through machine-dependent operand constraint letters.
2037 You can define such letters to correspond to various classes, then use
2038 them in operand constraints.
2039
2040 You must define the narrowest register classes for allocatable
2041 registers, so that each class either has no subclasses, or that for
2042 some mode, the move cost between registers within the class is
2043 cheaper than moving a register in the class to or from memory
2044 (@pxref{Costs}).
2045
2046 You should define a class for the union of two classes whenever some
2047 instruction allows both classes. For example, if an instruction allows
2048 either a floating point (coprocessor) register or a general register for a
2049 certain operand, you should define a class @code{FLOAT_OR_GENERAL_REGS}
2050 which includes both of them. Otherwise you will get suboptimal code,
2051 or even internal compiler errors when reload cannot find a register in the
2052 class computed via @code{reg_class_subunion}.
2053
2054 You must also specify certain redundant information about the register
2055 classes: for each class, which classes contain it and which ones are
2056 contained in it; for each pair of classes, the largest class contained
2057 in their union.
2058
2059 When a value occupying several consecutive registers is expected in a
2060 certain class, all the registers used must belong to that class.
2061 Therefore, register classes cannot be used to enforce a requirement for
2062 a register pair to start with an even-numbered register. The way to
2063 specify this requirement is with @code{TARGET_HARD_REGNO_MODE_OK},
2064 or with a filter expression in a @code{define_register_constraint}.
2065
2066 Register classes used for input-operands of bitwise-and or shift
2067 instructions have a special requirement: each such class must have, for
2068 each fixed-point machine mode, a subclass whose registers can transfer that
2069 mode to or from memory. For example, on some machines, the operations for
2070 single-byte values (@code{QImode}) are limited to certain registers. When
2071 this is so, each register class that is used in a bitwise-and or shift
2072 instruction must have a subclass consisting of registers from which
2073 single-byte values can be loaded or stored. This is so that
2074 @code{PREFERRED_RELOAD_CLASS} can always have a possible value to return.
2075
2076 @deftp {Data type} {enum reg_class}
2077 An enumerated type that must be defined with all the register class names
2078 as enumerated values. @code{NO_REGS} must be first. @code{ALL_REGS}
2079 must be the last register class, followed by one more enumerated value,
2080 @code{LIM_REG_CLASSES}, which is not a register class but rather
2081 tells how many classes there are.
2082
2083 Each register class has a number, which is the value of casting
2084 the class name to type @code{int}. The number serves as an index
2085 in many of the tables described below.
2086 @end deftp
2087
2088 @defmac N_REG_CLASSES
2089 The number of distinct register classes, defined as follows:
2090
2091 @smallexample
2092 #define N_REG_CLASSES (int) LIM_REG_CLASSES
2093 @end smallexample
2094 @end defmac
2095
2096 @defmac REG_CLASS_NAMES
2097 An initializer containing the names of the register classes as C string
2098 constants. These names are used in writing some of the debugging dumps.
2099 @end defmac
2100
2101 @defmac REG_CLASS_CONTENTS
2102 An initializer containing the contents of the register classes, as integers
2103 which are bit masks. The @var{n}th integer specifies the contents of class
2104 @var{n}. The way the integer @var{mask} is interpreted is that
2105 register @var{r} is in the class if @code{@var{mask} & (1 << @var{r})} is 1.
2106
2107 When the machine has more than 32 registers, an integer does not suffice.
2108 Then the integers are replaced by sub-initializers, braced groupings containing
2109 several integers. Each sub-initializer must be suitable as an initializer
2110 for the type @code{HARD_REG_SET} which is defined in @file{hard-reg-set.h}.
2111 In this situation, the first integer in each sub-initializer corresponds to
2112 registers 0 through 31, the second integer to registers 32 through 63, and
2113 so on.
2114 @end defmac
2115
2116 @defmac REGNO_REG_CLASS (@var{regno})
2117 A C expression whose value is a register class containing hard register
2118 @var{regno}. In general there is more than one such class; choose a class
2119 which is @dfn{minimal}, meaning that no smaller class also contains the
2120 register.
2121 @end defmac
2122
2123 @defmac BASE_REG_CLASS
2124 A macro whose definition is the name of the class to which a valid
2125 base register must belong. A base register is one used in an address
2126 which is the register value plus a displacement.
2127 @end defmac
2128
2129 @defmac MODE_BASE_REG_CLASS (@var{mode})
2130 This is a variation of the @code{BASE_REG_CLASS} macro which allows
2131 the selection of a base register in a mode dependent manner. If
2132 @var{mode} is VOIDmode then it should return the same value as
2133 @code{BASE_REG_CLASS}.
2134 @end defmac
2135
2136 @defmac MODE_BASE_REG_REG_CLASS (@var{mode})
2137 A C expression whose value is the register class to which a valid
2138 base register must belong in order to be used in a base plus index
2139 register address. You should define this macro if base plus index
2140 addresses have different requirements than other base register uses.
2141 @end defmac
2142
2143 @defmac MODE_CODE_BASE_REG_CLASS (@var{mode}, @var{address_space}, @var{outer_code}, @var{index_code})
2144 A C expression whose value is the register class to which a valid
2145 base register for a memory reference in mode @var{mode} to address
2146 space @var{address_space} must belong. @var{outer_code} and @var{index_code}
2147 define the context in which the base register occurs. @var{outer_code} is
2148 the code of the immediately enclosing expression (@code{MEM} for the top level
2149 of an address, @code{ADDRESS} for something that occurs in an
2150 @code{address_operand}). @var{index_code} is the code of the corresponding
2151 index expression if @var{outer_code} is @code{PLUS}; @code{SCRATCH} otherwise.
2152 @end defmac
2153
2154 @defmac INSN_BASE_REG_CLASS (@var{insn})
2155 A C expression whose value is the register class to which a valid
2156 base register for a specified @var{insn} must belong. This macro is
2157 used when some backend insns may have limited usage of base register
2158 compared with other insns. If you define this macro, the compiler will
2159 use it instead of all other defined macros that relate to
2160 BASE_REG_CLASS.
2161 @end defmac
2162
2163 @defmac INDEX_REG_CLASS
2164 A macro whose definition is the name of the class to which a valid
2165 index register must belong. An index register is one used in an
2166 address where its value is either multiplied by a scale factor or
2167 added to another register (as well as added to a displacement).
2168 @end defmac
2169
2170 @defmac INSN_INDEX_REG_CLASS (@var{insn})
2171 A C expression whose value is the register class to which a valid
2172 index register for a specified @var{insn} must belong. This macro is
2173 used when some backend insns may have limited usage of index register
2174 compared with other insns. If you defined this macro, the compiler
2175 will use it instead of @code{INDEX_REG_CLASS}.
2176 @end defmac
2177
2178 @defmac REGNO_OK_FOR_BASE_P (@var{num})
2179 A C expression which is nonzero if register number @var{num} is
2180 suitable for use as a base register in operand addresses.
2181 @end defmac
2182
2183 @defmac REGNO_MODE_OK_FOR_BASE_P (@var{num}, @var{mode})
2184 A C expression that is just like @code{REGNO_OK_FOR_BASE_P}, except that
2185 that expression may examine the mode of the memory reference in
2186 @var{mode}. You should define this macro if the mode of the memory
2187 reference affects whether a register may be used as a base register. If
2188 you define this macro, the compiler will use it instead of
2189 @code{REGNO_OK_FOR_BASE_P}. The mode may be @code{VOIDmode} for
2190 addresses that appear outside a @code{MEM}, i.e., as an
2191 @code{address_operand}.
2192 @end defmac
2193
2194 @defmac REGNO_MODE_OK_FOR_REG_BASE_P (@var{num}, @var{mode})
2195 A C expression which is nonzero if register number @var{num} is suitable for
2196 use as a base register in base plus index operand addresses, accessing
2197 memory in mode @var{mode}. It may be either a suitable hard register or a
2198 pseudo register that has been allocated such a hard register. You should
2199 define this macro if base plus index addresses have different requirements
2200 than other base register uses.
2201
2202 Use of this macro is deprecated; please use the more general
2203 @code{REGNO_MODE_CODE_OK_FOR_BASE_P}.
2204 @end defmac
2205
2206 @defmac REGNO_MODE_CODE_OK_FOR_BASE_P (@var{num}, @var{mode}, @var{address_space}, @var{outer_code}, @var{index_code})
2207 A C expression which is nonzero if register number @var{num} is
2208 suitable for use as a base register in operand addresses, accessing
2209 memory in mode @var{mode} in address space @var{address_space}.
2210 This is similar to @code{REGNO_MODE_OK_FOR_BASE_P}, except
2211 that that expression may examine the context in which the register
2212 appears in the memory reference. @var{outer_code} is the code of the
2213 immediately enclosing expression (@code{MEM} if at the top level of the
2214 address, @code{ADDRESS} for something that occurs in an
2215 @code{address_operand}). @var{index_code} is the code of the
2216 corresponding index expression if @var{outer_code} is @code{PLUS};
2217 @code{SCRATCH} otherwise. The mode may be @code{VOIDmode} for addresses
2218 that appear outside a @code{MEM}, i.e., as an @code{address_operand}.
2219 @end defmac
2220
2221 @defmac REGNO_OK_FOR_INSN_BASE_P (@var{num}, @var{insn})
2222 A C expression which is nonzero if register number @var{num} is
2223 suitable for use as a base register in operand addresses for a specified
2224 @var{insn}. This macro is used when some backend insn may have limited
2225 usage of base register compared with other insns. If you define this
2226 macro, the compiler will use it instead of all other defined macros
2227 that relate to REGNO_OK_FOR_BASE_P.
2228 @end defmac
2229
2230 @defmac REGNO_OK_FOR_INDEX_P (@var{num})
2231 A C expression which is nonzero if register number @var{num} is
2232 suitable for use as an index register in operand addresses. It may be
2233 either a suitable hard register or a pseudo register that has been
2234 allocated such a hard register.
2235
2236 The difference between an index register and a base register is that
2237 the index register may be scaled. If an address involves the sum of
2238 two registers, neither one of them scaled, then either one may be
2239 labeled the ``base'' and the other the ``index''; but whichever
2240 labeling is used must fit the machine's constraints of which registers
2241 may serve in each capacity. The compiler will try both labelings,
2242 looking for one that is valid, and will reload one or both registers
2243 only if neither labeling works.
2244 @end defmac
2245
2246 @hook TARGET_PREFERRED_RENAME_CLASS
2247
2248 @hook TARGET_PREFERRED_RELOAD_CLASS
2249
2250 @defmac PREFERRED_RELOAD_CLASS (@var{x}, @var{class})
2251 A C expression that places additional restrictions on the register class
2252 to use when it is necessary to copy value @var{x} into a register in class
2253 @var{class}. The value is a register class; perhaps @var{class}, or perhaps
2254 another, smaller class. On many machines, the following definition is
2255 safe:
2256
2257 @smallexample
2258 #define PREFERRED_RELOAD_CLASS(X,CLASS) CLASS
2259 @end smallexample
2260
2261 Sometimes returning a more restrictive class makes better code. For
2262 example, on the 68000, when @var{x} is an integer constant that is in range
2263 for a @samp{moveq} instruction, the value of this macro is always
2264 @code{DATA_REGS} as long as @var{class} includes the data registers.
2265 Requiring a data register guarantees that a @samp{moveq} will be used.
2266
2267 One case where @code{PREFERRED_RELOAD_CLASS} must not return
2268 @var{class} is if @var{x} is a legitimate constant which cannot be
2269 loaded into some register class. By returning @code{NO_REGS} you can
2270 force @var{x} into a memory location. For example, rs6000 can load
2271 immediate values into general-purpose registers, but does not have an
2272 instruction for loading an immediate value into a floating-point
2273 register, so @code{PREFERRED_RELOAD_CLASS} returns @code{NO_REGS} when
2274 @var{x} is a floating-point constant. If the constant cannot be loaded
2275 into any kind of register, code generation will be better if
2276 @code{TARGET_LEGITIMATE_CONSTANT_P} makes the constant illegitimate instead
2277 of using @code{TARGET_PREFERRED_RELOAD_CLASS}.
2278
2279 If an insn has pseudos in it after register allocation, reload will go
2280 through the alternatives and call repeatedly @code{PREFERRED_RELOAD_CLASS}
2281 to find the best one. Returning @code{NO_REGS}, in this case, makes
2282 reload add a @code{!} in front of the constraint: the x86 back-end uses
2283 this feature to discourage usage of 387 registers when math is done in
2284 the SSE registers (and vice versa).
2285 @end defmac
2286
2287 @hook TARGET_PREFERRED_OUTPUT_RELOAD_CLASS
2288
2289 @defmac LIMIT_RELOAD_CLASS (@var{mode}, @var{class})
2290 A C expression that places additional restrictions on the register class
2291 to use when it is necessary to be able to hold a value of mode
2292 @var{mode} in a reload register for which class @var{class} would
2293 ordinarily be used.
2294
2295 Unlike @code{PREFERRED_RELOAD_CLASS}, this macro should be used when
2296 there are certain modes that simply cannot go in certain reload classes.
2297
2298 The value is a register class; perhaps @var{class}, or perhaps another,
2299 smaller class.
2300
2301 Don't define this macro unless the target machine has limitations which
2302 require the macro to do something nontrivial.
2303 @end defmac
2304
2305 @hook TARGET_SECONDARY_RELOAD
2306
2307 @defmac SECONDARY_RELOAD_CLASS (@var{class}, @var{mode}, @var{x})
2308 @defmacx SECONDARY_INPUT_RELOAD_CLASS (@var{class}, @var{mode}, @var{x})
2309 @defmacx SECONDARY_OUTPUT_RELOAD_CLASS (@var{class}, @var{mode}, @var{x})
2310 These macros are obsolete, new ports should use the target hook
2311 @code{TARGET_SECONDARY_RELOAD} instead.
2312
2313 These are obsolete macros, replaced by the @code{TARGET_SECONDARY_RELOAD}
2314 target hook. Older ports still define these macros to indicate to the
2315 reload phase that it may
2316 need to allocate at least one register for a reload in addition to the
2317 register to contain the data. Specifically, if copying @var{x} to a
2318 register @var{class} in @var{mode} requires an intermediate register,
2319 you were supposed to define @code{SECONDARY_INPUT_RELOAD_CLASS} to return the
2320 largest register class all of whose registers can be used as
2321 intermediate registers or scratch registers.
2322
2323 If copying a register @var{class} in @var{mode} to @var{x} requires an
2324 intermediate or scratch register, @code{SECONDARY_OUTPUT_RELOAD_CLASS}
2325 was supposed to be defined to return the largest register
2326 class required. If the
2327 requirements for input and output reloads were the same, the macro
2328 @code{SECONDARY_RELOAD_CLASS} should have been used instead of defining both
2329 macros identically.
2330
2331 The values returned by these macros are often @code{GENERAL_REGS}.
2332 Return @code{NO_REGS} if no spare register is needed; i.e., if @var{x}
2333 can be directly copied to or from a register of @var{class} in
2334 @var{mode} without requiring a scratch register. Do not define this
2335 macro if it would always return @code{NO_REGS}.
2336
2337 If a scratch register is required (either with or without an
2338 intermediate register), you were supposed to define patterns for
2339 @samp{reload_in@var{m}} or @samp{reload_out@var{m}}, as required
2340 (@pxref{Standard Names}. These patterns, which were normally
2341 implemented with a @code{define_expand}, should be similar to the
2342 @samp{mov@var{m}} patterns, except that operand 2 is the scratch
2343 register.
2344
2345 These patterns need constraints for the reload register and scratch
2346 register that
2347 contain a single register class. If the original reload register (whose
2348 class is @var{class}) can meet the constraint given in the pattern, the
2349 value returned by these macros is used for the class of the scratch
2350 register. Otherwise, two additional reload registers are required.
2351 Their classes are obtained from the constraints in the insn pattern.
2352
2353 @var{x} might be a pseudo-register or a @code{subreg} of a
2354 pseudo-register, which could either be in a hard register or in memory.
2355 Use @code{true_regnum} to find out; it will return @minus{}1 if the pseudo is
2356 in memory and the hard register number if it is in a register.
2357
2358 These macros should not be used in the case where a particular class of
2359 registers can only be copied to memory and not to another class of
2360 registers. In that case, secondary reload registers are not needed and
2361 would not be helpful. Instead, a stack location must be used to perform
2362 the copy and the @code{mov@var{m}} pattern should use memory as an
2363 intermediate storage. This case often occurs between floating-point and
2364 general registers.
2365 @end defmac
2366
2367 @hook TARGET_SECONDARY_MEMORY_NEEDED
2368
2369 @defmac SECONDARY_MEMORY_NEEDED_RTX (@var{mode})
2370 Normally when @code{TARGET_SECONDARY_MEMORY_NEEDED} is defined, the compiler
2371 allocates a stack slot for a memory location needed for register copies.
2372 If this macro is defined, the compiler instead uses the memory location
2373 defined by this macro.
2374
2375 Do not define this macro if you do not define
2376 @code{TARGET_SECONDARY_MEMORY_NEEDED}.
2377 @end defmac
2378
2379 @hook TARGET_SECONDARY_MEMORY_NEEDED_MODE
2380
2381 @hook TARGET_SELECT_EARLY_REMAT_MODES
2382
2383 @hook TARGET_CLASS_LIKELY_SPILLED_P
2384
2385 @hook TARGET_CLASS_MAX_NREGS
2386
2387 @defmac CLASS_MAX_NREGS (@var{class}, @var{mode})
2388 A C expression for the maximum number of consecutive registers
2389 of class @var{class} needed to hold a value of mode @var{mode}.
2390
2391 This is closely related to the macro @code{TARGET_HARD_REGNO_NREGS}. In fact,
2392 the value of the macro @code{CLASS_MAX_NREGS (@var{class}, @var{mode})}
2393 should be the maximum value of @code{TARGET_HARD_REGNO_NREGS (@var{regno},
2394 @var{mode})} for all @var{regno} values in the class @var{class}.
2395
2396 This macro helps control the handling of multiple-word values
2397 in the reload pass.
2398 @end defmac
2399
2400 @hook TARGET_CAN_CHANGE_MODE_CLASS
2401
2402 @hook TARGET_IRA_CHANGE_PSEUDO_ALLOCNO_CLASS
2403
2404 @hook TARGET_LRA_P
2405
2406 @hook TARGET_REGISTER_PRIORITY
2407
2408 @hook TARGET_REGISTER_USAGE_LEVELING_P
2409
2410 @hook TARGET_DIFFERENT_ADDR_DISPLACEMENT_P
2411
2412 @hook TARGET_CANNOT_SUBSTITUTE_MEM_EQUIV_P
2413
2414 @hook TARGET_LEGITIMIZE_ADDRESS_DISPLACEMENT
2415
2416 @hook TARGET_SPILL_CLASS
2417
2418 @hook TARGET_ADDITIONAL_ALLOCNO_CLASS_P
2419
2420 @hook TARGET_CSTORE_MODE
2421
2422 @hook TARGET_COMPUTE_PRESSURE_CLASSES
2423
2424 @node Stack and Calling
2425 @section Stack Layout and Calling Conventions
2426 @cindex calling conventions
2427
2428 @c prevent bad page break with this line
2429 This describes the stack layout and calling conventions.
2430
2431 @menu
2432 * Frame Layout::
2433 * Exception Handling::
2434 * Stack Checking::
2435 * Frame Registers::
2436 * Elimination::
2437 * Stack Arguments::
2438 * Register Arguments::
2439 * Scalar Return::
2440 * Aggregate Return::
2441 * Caller Saves::
2442 * Function Entry::
2443 * Profiling::
2444 * Tail Calls::
2445 * Shrink-wrapping separate components::
2446 * Stack Smashing Protection::
2447 * Miscellaneous Register Hooks::
2448 @end menu
2449
2450 @node Frame Layout
2451 @subsection Basic Stack Layout
2452 @cindex stack frame layout
2453 @cindex frame layout
2454
2455 @c prevent bad page break with this line
2456 Here is the basic stack layout.
2457
2458 @defmac STACK_GROWS_DOWNWARD
2459 Define this macro to be true if pushing a word onto the stack moves the stack
2460 pointer to a smaller address, and false otherwise.
2461 @end defmac
2462
2463 @defmac STACK_PUSH_CODE
2464 This macro defines the operation used when something is pushed
2465 on the stack. In RTL, a push operation will be
2466 @code{(set (mem (STACK_PUSH_CODE (reg sp))) @dots{})}
2467
2468 The choices are @code{PRE_DEC}, @code{POST_DEC}, @code{PRE_INC},
2469 and @code{POST_INC}. Which of these is correct depends on
2470 the stack direction and on whether the stack pointer points
2471 to the last item on the stack or whether it points to the
2472 space for the next item on the stack.
2473
2474 The default is @code{PRE_DEC} when @code{STACK_GROWS_DOWNWARD} is
2475 true, which is almost always right, and @code{PRE_INC} otherwise,
2476 which is often wrong.
2477 @end defmac
2478
2479 @defmac FRAME_GROWS_DOWNWARD
2480 Define this macro to nonzero value if the addresses of local variable slots
2481 are at negative offsets from the frame pointer.
2482 @end defmac
2483
2484 @defmac ARGS_GROW_DOWNWARD
2485 Define this macro if successive arguments to a function occupy decreasing
2486 addresses on the stack.
2487 @end defmac
2488
2489 @hook TARGET_STARTING_FRAME_OFFSET
2490
2491 @defmac STACK_ALIGNMENT_NEEDED
2492 Define to zero to disable final alignment of the stack during reload.
2493 The nonzero default for this macro is suitable for most ports.
2494
2495 On ports where @code{TARGET_STARTING_FRAME_OFFSET} is nonzero or where there
2496 is a register save block following the local block that doesn't require
2497 alignment to @code{STACK_BOUNDARY}, it may be beneficial to disable
2498 stack alignment and do it in the backend.
2499 @end defmac
2500
2501 @defmac STACK_POINTER_OFFSET
2502 Offset from the stack pointer register to the first location at which
2503 outgoing arguments are placed. If not specified, the default value of
2504 zero is used. This is the proper value for most machines.
2505
2506 If @code{ARGS_GROW_DOWNWARD}, this is the offset to the location above
2507 the first location at which outgoing arguments are placed.
2508 @end defmac
2509
2510 @defmac FIRST_PARM_OFFSET (@var{fundecl})
2511 Offset from the argument pointer register to the first argument's
2512 address. On some machines it may depend on the data type of the
2513 function.
2514
2515 If @code{ARGS_GROW_DOWNWARD}, this is the offset to the location above
2516 the first argument's address.
2517 @end defmac
2518
2519 @defmac STACK_DYNAMIC_OFFSET (@var{fundecl})
2520 Offset from the stack pointer register to an item dynamically allocated
2521 on the stack, e.g., by @code{alloca}.
2522
2523 The default value for this macro is @code{STACK_POINTER_OFFSET} plus the
2524 length of the outgoing arguments. The default is correct for most
2525 machines. See @file{function.cc} for details.
2526 @end defmac
2527
2528 @defmac INITIAL_FRAME_ADDRESS_RTX
2529 A C expression whose value is RTL representing the address of the initial
2530 stack frame. This address is passed to @code{RETURN_ADDR_RTX} and
2531 @code{DYNAMIC_CHAIN_ADDRESS}. If you don't define this macro, a reasonable
2532 default value will be used. Define this macro in order to make frame pointer
2533 elimination work in the presence of @code{__builtin_frame_address (count)} and
2534 @code{__builtin_return_address (count)} for @code{count} not equal to zero.
2535 @end defmac
2536
2537 @defmac DYNAMIC_CHAIN_ADDRESS (@var{frameaddr})
2538 A C expression whose value is RTL representing the address in a stack
2539 frame where the pointer to the caller's frame is stored. Assume that
2540 @var{frameaddr} is an RTL expression for the address of the stack frame
2541 itself.
2542
2543 If you don't define this macro, the default is to return the value
2544 of @var{frameaddr}---that is, the stack frame address is also the
2545 address of the stack word that points to the previous frame.
2546 @end defmac
2547
2548 @defmac SETUP_FRAME_ADDRESSES
2549 A C expression that produces the machine-specific code to
2550 setup the stack so that arbitrary frames can be accessed. For example,
2551 on the SPARC, we must flush all of the register windows to the stack
2552 before we can access arbitrary stack frames. You will seldom need to
2553 define this macro. The default is to do nothing.
2554 @end defmac
2555
2556 @hook TARGET_BUILTIN_SETJMP_FRAME_VALUE
2557
2558 @defmac FRAME_ADDR_RTX (@var{frameaddr})
2559 A C expression whose value is RTL representing the value of the frame
2560 address for the current frame. @var{frameaddr} is the frame pointer
2561 of the current frame. This is used for __builtin_frame_address.
2562 You need only define this macro if the frame address is not the same
2563 as the frame pointer. Most machines do not need to define it.
2564 @end defmac
2565
2566 @defmac RETURN_ADDR_RTX (@var{count}, @var{frameaddr})
2567 A C expression whose value is RTL representing the value of the return
2568 address for the frame @var{count} steps up from the current frame, after
2569 the prologue. @var{frameaddr} is the frame pointer of the @var{count}
2570 frame, or the frame pointer of the @var{count} @minus{} 1 frame if
2571 @code{RETURN_ADDR_IN_PREVIOUS_FRAME} is nonzero.
2572
2573 The value of the expression must always be the correct address when
2574 @var{count} is zero, but may be @code{NULL_RTX} if there is no way to
2575 determine the return address of other frames.
2576 @end defmac
2577
2578 @defmac RETURN_ADDR_IN_PREVIOUS_FRAME
2579 Define this macro to nonzero value if the return address of a particular
2580 stack frame is accessed from the frame pointer of the previous stack
2581 frame. The zero default for this macro is suitable for most ports.
2582 @end defmac
2583
2584 @defmac INCOMING_RETURN_ADDR_RTX
2585 A C expression whose value is RTL representing the location of the
2586 incoming return address at the beginning of any function, before the
2587 prologue. This RTL is either a @code{REG}, indicating that the return
2588 value is saved in @samp{REG}, or a @code{MEM} representing a location in
2589 the stack.
2590
2591 You only need to define this macro if you want to support call frame
2592 debugging information like that provided by DWARF 2.
2593
2594 If this RTL is a @code{REG}, you should also define
2595 @code{DWARF_FRAME_RETURN_COLUMN} to @code{DWARF_FRAME_REGNUM (REGNO)}.
2596 @end defmac
2597
2598 @defmac DWARF_ALT_FRAME_RETURN_COLUMN
2599 A C expression whose value is an integer giving a DWARF 2 column
2600 number that may be used as an alternative return column. The column
2601 must not correspond to any gcc hard register (that is, it must not
2602 be in the range of @code{DWARF_FRAME_REGNUM}).
2603
2604 This macro can be useful if @code{DWARF_FRAME_RETURN_COLUMN} is set to a
2605 general register, but an alternative column needs to be used for signal
2606 frames. Some targets have also used different frame return columns
2607 over time.
2608 @end defmac
2609
2610 @defmac DWARF_ZERO_REG
2611 A C expression whose value is an integer giving a DWARF 2 register
2612 number that is considered to always have the value zero. This should
2613 only be defined if the target has an architected zero register, and
2614 someone decided it was a good idea to use that register number to
2615 terminate the stack backtrace. New ports should avoid this.
2616 @end defmac
2617
2618 @defmac DWARF_VERSION_DEFAULT
2619 A C expression whose value is the default dwarf standard version we'll honor
2620 and advertise when generating dwarf debug information, in absence of
2621 an explicit @option{-gdwarf-@var{version}} option on the command line.
2622 @end defmac
2623
2624 @hook TARGET_DWARF_HANDLE_FRAME_UNSPEC
2625
2626 @hook TARGET_DWARF_POLY_INDETERMINATE_VALUE
2627
2628 @defmac INCOMING_FRAME_SP_OFFSET
2629 A C expression whose value is an integer giving the offset, in bytes,
2630 from the value of the stack pointer register to the top of the stack
2631 frame at the beginning of any function, before the prologue. The top of
2632 the frame is defined to be the value of the stack pointer in the
2633 previous frame, just before the call instruction.
2634
2635 You only need to define this macro if you want to support call frame
2636 debugging information like that provided by DWARF 2.
2637 @end defmac
2638
2639 @defmac DEFAULT_INCOMING_FRAME_SP_OFFSET
2640 Like @code{INCOMING_FRAME_SP_OFFSET}, but must be the same for all
2641 functions of the same ABI, and when using GAS @code{.cfi_*} directives
2642 must also agree with the default CFI GAS emits. Define this macro
2643 only if @code{INCOMING_FRAME_SP_OFFSET} can have different values
2644 between different functions of the same ABI or when
2645 @code{INCOMING_FRAME_SP_OFFSET} does not agree with GAS default CFI.
2646 @end defmac
2647
2648 @defmac ARG_POINTER_CFA_OFFSET (@var{fundecl})
2649 A C expression whose value is an integer giving the offset, in bytes,
2650 from the argument pointer to the canonical frame address (cfa). The
2651 final value should coincide with that calculated by
2652 @code{INCOMING_FRAME_SP_OFFSET}. Which is unfortunately not usable
2653 during virtual register instantiation.
2654
2655 The default value for this macro is
2656 @code{FIRST_PARM_OFFSET (fundecl) + crtl->args.pretend_args_size},
2657 which is correct for most machines; in general, the arguments are found
2658 immediately before the stack frame. Note that this is not the case on
2659 some targets that save registers into the caller's frame, such as SPARC
2660 and rs6000, and so such targets need to define this macro.
2661
2662 You only need to define this macro if the default is incorrect, and you
2663 want to support call frame debugging information like that provided by
2664 DWARF 2.
2665 @end defmac
2666
2667 @defmac FRAME_POINTER_CFA_OFFSET (@var{fundecl})
2668 If defined, a C expression whose value is an integer giving the offset
2669 in bytes from the frame pointer to the canonical frame address (cfa).
2670 The final value should coincide with that calculated by
2671 @code{INCOMING_FRAME_SP_OFFSET}.
2672
2673 Normally the CFA is calculated as an offset from the argument pointer,
2674 via @code{ARG_POINTER_CFA_OFFSET}, but if the argument pointer is
2675 variable due to the ABI, this may not be possible. If this macro is
2676 defined, it implies that the virtual register instantiation should be
2677 based on the frame pointer instead of the argument pointer. Only one
2678 of @code{FRAME_POINTER_CFA_OFFSET} and @code{ARG_POINTER_CFA_OFFSET}
2679 should be defined.
2680 @end defmac
2681
2682 @defmac CFA_FRAME_BASE_OFFSET (@var{fundecl})
2683 If defined, a C expression whose value is an integer giving the offset
2684 in bytes from the canonical frame address (cfa) to the frame base used
2685 in DWARF 2 debug information. The default is zero. A different value
2686 may reduce the size of debug information on some ports.
2687 @end defmac
2688
2689 @hook TARGET_HAVE_STRUB_SUPPORT_FOR
2690
2691 @defmac TARGET_STRUB_USE_DYNAMIC_ARRAY
2692 If defined to nonzero, @code{__strub_leave} will allocate a dynamic
2693 array covering the stack range that needs scrubbing before clearing it.
2694 Allocating the array tends to make scrubbing slower, but it enables the
2695 scrubbing to be safely implemented with a @code{memset} call, which
2696 could make up for the difference.
2697 @end defmac
2698
2699 @defmac TARGET_STRUB_MAY_USE_MEMSET
2700 If defined to nonzero, enable @code{__strub_leave} to be optimized so as
2701 to call @code{memset} for stack scrubbing. This is only enabled by
2702 default if @code{TARGET_STRUB_USE_DYNAMIC_ARRAY} is enabled; it's not
2703 advisable to enable it otherwise, since @code{memset} would then likely
2704 overwrite its own stack frame, but it might work if the target ABI
2705 enables @code{memset} to not use the stack at all, not even for
2706 arguments or its return address, and its implementation is trivial
2707 enough that it doesn't use a stack frame.
2708 @end defmac
2709
2710 @node Exception Handling
2711 @subsection Exception Handling Support
2712 @cindex exception handling
2713
2714 @defmac EH_RETURN_DATA_REGNO (@var{N})
2715 A C expression whose value is the @var{N}th register number used for
2716 data by exception handlers, or @code{INVALID_REGNUM} if fewer than
2717 @var{N} registers are usable.
2718
2719 The exception handling library routines communicate with the exception
2720 handlers via a set of agreed upon registers. Ideally these registers
2721 should be call-clobbered; it is possible to use call-saved registers,
2722 but may negatively impact code size. The target must support at least
2723 2 data registers, but should define 4 if there are enough free registers.
2724
2725 You must define this macro if you want to support call frame exception
2726 handling like that provided by DWARF 2.
2727 @end defmac
2728
2729 @defmac EH_RETURN_STACKADJ_RTX
2730 A C expression whose value is RTL representing a location in which
2731 to store a stack adjustment to be applied before function return.
2732 This is used to unwind the stack to an exception handler's call frame.
2733 It will be assigned zero on code paths that return normally.
2734
2735 Typically this is a call-clobbered hard register that is otherwise
2736 untouched by the epilogue, but could also be a stack slot.
2737
2738 Do not define this macro if the stack pointer is saved and restored
2739 by the regular prolog and epilog code in the call frame itself; in
2740 this case, the exception handling library routines will update the
2741 stack location to be restored in place. Otherwise, you must define
2742 this macro if you want to support call frame exception handling like
2743 that provided by DWARF 2.
2744 @end defmac
2745
2746 @defmac EH_RETURN_HANDLER_RTX
2747 A C expression whose value is RTL representing a location in which
2748 to store the address of an exception handler to which we should
2749 return. It will not be assigned on code paths that return normally.
2750
2751 Typically this is the location in the call frame at which the normal
2752 return address is stored. For targets that return by popping an
2753 address off the stack, this might be a memory address just below
2754 the @emph{target} call frame rather than inside the current call
2755 frame. If defined, @code{EH_RETURN_STACKADJ_RTX} will have already
2756 been assigned, so it may be used to calculate the location of the
2757 target call frame.
2758
2759 Some targets have more complex requirements than storing to an
2760 address calculable during initial code generation. In that case
2761 the @code{eh_return} instruction pattern should be used instead.
2762
2763 If you want to support call frame exception handling, you must
2764 define either this macro or the @code{eh_return} instruction pattern.
2765 @end defmac
2766
2767 @defmac EH_RETURN_TAKEN_RTX
2768 A C expression whose value is RTL representing a location in which
2769 to store if the EH return path was taken instead of a normal return.
2770 This macro allows conditionally executing different code in the
2771 epilogue for the EH and normal return cases.
2772
2773 When this macro is defined, the macros @code{EH_RETURN_STACKADJ_RTX}
2774 and @code{EH_RETURN_HANDLER_RTX} are only meaningful in the epilogue
2775 when 1 is stored to the specified location. The value 0 means normal
2776 return.
2777 @end defmac
2778
2779 @defmac RETURN_ADDR_OFFSET
2780 If defined, an integer-valued C expression for which rtl will be generated
2781 to add it to the exception handler address before it is searched in the
2782 exception handling tables, and to subtract it again from the address before
2783 using it to return to the exception handler.
2784 @end defmac
2785
2786 @defmac ASM_PREFERRED_EH_DATA_FORMAT (@var{code}, @var{global})
2787 This macro chooses the encoding of pointers embedded in the exception
2788 handling sections. If at all possible, this should be defined such
2789 that the exception handling section will not require dynamic relocations,
2790 and so may be read-only.
2791
2792 @var{code} is 0 for data, 1 for code labels, 2 for function pointers.
2793 @var{global} is true if the symbol may be affected by dynamic relocations.
2794 The macro should return a combination of the @code{DW_EH_PE_*} defines
2795 as found in @file{dwarf2.h}.
2796
2797 If this macro is not defined, pointers will not be encoded but
2798 represented directly.
2799 @end defmac
2800
2801 @defmac ASM_MAYBE_OUTPUT_ENCODED_ADDR_RTX (@var{file}, @var{encoding}, @var{size}, @var{addr}, @var{done})
2802 This macro allows the target to emit whatever special magic is required
2803 to represent the encoding chosen by @code{ASM_PREFERRED_EH_DATA_FORMAT}.
2804 Generic code takes care of pc-relative and indirect encodings; this must
2805 be defined if the target uses text-relative or data-relative encodings.
2806
2807 This is a C statement that branches to @var{done} if the format was
2808 handled. @var{encoding} is the format chosen, @var{size} is the number
2809 of bytes that the format occupies, @var{addr} is the @code{SYMBOL_REF}
2810 to be emitted.
2811 @end defmac
2812
2813 @defmac MD_FALLBACK_FRAME_STATE_FOR (@var{context}, @var{fs})
2814 This macro allows the target to add CPU and operating system specific
2815 code to the call-frame unwinder for use when there is no unwind data
2816 available. The most common reason to implement this macro is to unwind
2817 through signal frames.
2818
2819 This macro is called from @code{uw_frame_state_for} in
2820 @file{unwind-dw2.c}, @file{unwind-dw2-xtensa.c} and
2821 @file{unwind-ia64.c}. @var{context} is an @code{_Unwind_Context};
2822 @var{fs} is an @code{_Unwind_FrameState}. Examine @code{context->ra}
2823 for the address of the code being executed and @code{context->cfa} for
2824 the stack pointer value. If the frame can be decoded, the register
2825 save addresses should be updated in @var{fs} and the macro should
2826 evaluate to @code{_URC_NO_REASON}. If the frame cannot be decoded,
2827 the macro should evaluate to @code{_URC_END_OF_STACK}.
2828
2829 For proper signal handling in Java this macro is accompanied by
2830 @code{MAKE_THROW_FRAME}, defined in @file{libjava/include/*-signal.h} headers.
2831 @end defmac
2832
2833 @defmac MD_HANDLE_UNWABI (@var{context}, @var{fs})
2834 This macro allows the target to add operating system specific code to the
2835 call-frame unwinder to handle the IA-64 @code{.unwabi} unwinding directive,
2836 usually used for signal or interrupt frames.
2837
2838 This macro is called from @code{uw_update_context} in libgcc's
2839 @file{unwind-ia64.c}. @var{context} is an @code{_Unwind_Context};
2840 @var{fs} is an @code{_Unwind_FrameState}. Examine @code{fs->unwabi}
2841 for the abi and context in the @code{.unwabi} directive. If the
2842 @code{.unwabi} directive can be handled, the register save addresses should
2843 be updated in @var{fs}.
2844 @end defmac
2845
2846 @defmac TARGET_USES_WEAK_UNWIND_INFO
2847 A C expression that evaluates to true if the target requires unwind
2848 info to be given comdat linkage. Define it to be @code{1} if comdat
2849 linkage is necessary. The default is @code{0}.
2850 @end defmac
2851
2852 @node Stack Checking
2853 @subsection Specifying How Stack Checking is Done
2854
2855 GCC will check that stack references are within the boundaries of the
2856 stack, if the option @option{-fstack-check} is specified, in one of
2857 three ways:
2858
2859 @enumerate
2860 @item
2861 If the value of the @code{STACK_CHECK_BUILTIN} macro is nonzero, GCC
2862 will assume that you have arranged for full stack checking to be done
2863 at appropriate places in the configuration files. GCC will not do
2864 other special processing.
2865
2866 @item
2867 If @code{STACK_CHECK_BUILTIN} is zero and the value of the
2868 @code{STACK_CHECK_STATIC_BUILTIN} macro is nonzero, GCC will assume
2869 that you have arranged for static stack checking (checking of the
2870 static stack frame of functions) to be done at appropriate places
2871 in the configuration files. GCC will only emit code to do dynamic
2872 stack checking (checking on dynamic stack allocations) using the third
2873 approach below.
2874
2875 @item
2876 If neither of the above are true, GCC will generate code to periodically
2877 ``probe'' the stack pointer using the values of the macros defined below.
2878 @end enumerate
2879
2880 If neither STACK_CHECK_BUILTIN nor STACK_CHECK_STATIC_BUILTIN is defined,
2881 GCC will change its allocation strategy for large objects if the option
2882 @option{-fstack-check} is specified: they will always be allocated
2883 dynamically if their size exceeds @code{STACK_CHECK_MAX_VAR_SIZE} bytes.
2884
2885 @defmac STACK_CHECK_BUILTIN
2886 A nonzero value if stack checking is done by the configuration files in a
2887 machine-dependent manner. You should define this macro if stack checking
2888 is required by the ABI of your machine or if you would like to do stack
2889 checking in some more efficient way than the generic approach. The default
2890 value of this macro is zero.
2891 @end defmac
2892
2893 @defmac STACK_CHECK_STATIC_BUILTIN
2894 A nonzero value if static stack checking is done by the configuration files
2895 in a machine-dependent manner. You should define this macro if you would
2896 like to do static stack checking in some more efficient way than the generic
2897 approach. The default value of this macro is zero.
2898 @end defmac
2899
2900 @defmac STACK_CHECK_PROBE_INTERVAL_EXP
2901 An integer specifying the interval at which GCC must generate stack probe
2902 instructions, defined as 2 raised to this integer. You will normally
2903 define this macro so that the interval be no larger than the size of
2904 the ``guard pages'' at the end of a stack area. The default value
2905 of 12 (4096-byte interval) is suitable for most systems.
2906 @end defmac
2907
2908 @defmac STACK_CHECK_MOVING_SP
2909 An integer which is nonzero if GCC should move the stack pointer page by page
2910 when doing probes. This can be necessary on systems where the stack pointer
2911 contains the bottom address of the memory area accessible to the executing
2912 thread at any point in time. In this situation an alternate signal stack
2913 is required in order to be able to recover from a stack overflow. The
2914 default value of this macro is zero.
2915 @end defmac
2916
2917 @defmac STACK_CHECK_PROTECT
2918 The number of bytes of stack needed to recover from a stack overflow, for
2919 languages where such a recovery is supported. The default value of 4KB/8KB
2920 with the @code{setjmp}/@code{longjmp}-based exception handling mechanism and
2921 8KB/12KB with other exception handling mechanisms should be adequate for most
2922 architectures and operating systems.
2923 @end defmac
2924
2925 The following macros are relevant only if neither STACK_CHECK_BUILTIN
2926 nor STACK_CHECK_STATIC_BUILTIN is defined; you can omit them altogether
2927 in the opposite case.
2928
2929 @defmac STACK_CHECK_MAX_FRAME_SIZE
2930 The maximum size of a stack frame, in bytes. GCC will generate probe
2931 instructions in non-leaf functions to ensure at least this many bytes of
2932 stack are available. If a stack frame is larger than this size, stack
2933 checking will not be reliable and GCC will issue a warning. The
2934 default is chosen so that GCC only generates one instruction on most
2935 systems. You should normally not change the default value of this macro.
2936 @end defmac
2937
2938 @defmac STACK_CHECK_FIXED_FRAME_SIZE
2939 GCC uses this value to generate the above warning message. It
2940 represents the amount of fixed frame used by a function, not including
2941 space for any callee-saved registers, temporaries and user variables.
2942 You need only specify an upper bound for this amount and will normally
2943 use the default of four words.
2944 @end defmac
2945
2946 @defmac STACK_CHECK_MAX_VAR_SIZE
2947 The maximum size, in bytes, of an object that GCC will place in the
2948 fixed area of the stack frame when the user specifies
2949 @option{-fstack-check}.
2950 GCC computed the default from the values of the above macros and you will
2951 normally not need to override that default.
2952 @end defmac
2953
2954 @hook TARGET_STACK_CLASH_PROTECTION_ALLOCA_PROBE_RANGE
2955
2956 @need 2000
2957 @node Frame Registers
2958 @subsection Registers That Address the Stack Frame
2959
2960 @c prevent bad page break with this line
2961 This discusses registers that address the stack frame.
2962
2963 @defmac STACK_POINTER_REGNUM
2964 The register number of the stack pointer register, which must also be a
2965 fixed register according to @code{FIXED_REGISTERS}. On most machines,
2966 the hardware determines which register this is.
2967 @end defmac
2968
2969 @defmac FRAME_POINTER_REGNUM
2970 The register number of the frame pointer register, which is used to
2971 access automatic variables in the stack frame. On some machines, the
2972 hardware determines which register this is. On other machines, you can
2973 choose any register you wish for this purpose.
2974 @end defmac
2975
2976 @defmac HARD_FRAME_POINTER_REGNUM
2977 On some machines the offset between the frame pointer and starting
2978 offset of the automatic variables is not known until after register
2979 allocation has been done (for example, because the saved registers are
2980 between these two locations). On those machines, define
2981 @code{FRAME_POINTER_REGNUM} the number of a special, fixed register to
2982 be used internally until the offset is known, and define
2983 @code{HARD_FRAME_POINTER_REGNUM} to be the actual hard register number
2984 used for the frame pointer.
2985
2986 You should define this macro only in the very rare circumstances when it
2987 is not possible to calculate the offset between the frame pointer and
2988 the automatic variables until after register allocation has been
2989 completed. When this macro is defined, you must also indicate in your
2990 definition of @code{ELIMINABLE_REGS} how to eliminate
2991 @code{FRAME_POINTER_REGNUM} into either @code{HARD_FRAME_POINTER_REGNUM}
2992 or @code{STACK_POINTER_REGNUM}.
2993
2994 Do not define this macro if it would be the same as
2995 @code{FRAME_POINTER_REGNUM}.
2996 @end defmac
2997
2998 @defmac ARG_POINTER_REGNUM
2999 The register number of the arg pointer register, which is used to access
3000 the function's argument list. On some machines, this is the same as the
3001 frame pointer register. On some machines, the hardware determines which
3002 register this is. On other machines, you can choose any register you
3003 wish for this purpose. If this is not the same register as the frame
3004 pointer register, then you must mark it as a fixed register according to
3005 @code{FIXED_REGISTERS}, or arrange to be able to eliminate it
3006 (@pxref{Elimination}).
3007 @end defmac
3008
3009 @defmac HARD_FRAME_POINTER_IS_FRAME_POINTER
3010 Define this to a preprocessor constant that is nonzero if
3011 @code{hard_frame_pointer_rtx} and @code{frame_pointer_rtx} should be
3012 the same. The default definition is @samp{(HARD_FRAME_POINTER_REGNUM
3013 == FRAME_POINTER_REGNUM)}; you only need to define this macro if that
3014 definition is not suitable for use in preprocessor conditionals.
3015 @end defmac
3016
3017 @defmac HARD_FRAME_POINTER_IS_ARG_POINTER
3018 Define this to a preprocessor constant that is nonzero if
3019 @code{hard_frame_pointer_rtx} and @code{arg_pointer_rtx} should be the
3020 same. The default definition is @samp{(HARD_FRAME_POINTER_REGNUM ==
3021 ARG_POINTER_REGNUM)}; you only need to define this macro if that
3022 definition is not suitable for use in preprocessor conditionals.
3023 @end defmac
3024
3025 @defmac RETURN_ADDRESS_POINTER_REGNUM
3026 The register number of the return address pointer register, which is used to
3027 access the current function's return address from the stack. On some
3028 machines, the return address is not at a fixed offset from the frame
3029 pointer or stack pointer or argument pointer. This register can be defined
3030 to point to the return address on the stack, and then be converted by
3031 @code{ELIMINABLE_REGS} into either the frame pointer or stack pointer.
3032
3033 Do not define this macro unless there is no other way to get the return
3034 address from the stack.
3035 @end defmac
3036
3037 @defmac STATIC_CHAIN_REGNUM
3038 @defmacx STATIC_CHAIN_INCOMING_REGNUM
3039 Register numbers used for passing a function's static chain pointer. If
3040 register windows are used, the register number as seen by the called
3041 function is @code{STATIC_CHAIN_INCOMING_REGNUM}, while the register
3042 number as seen by the calling function is @code{STATIC_CHAIN_REGNUM}. If
3043 these registers are the same, @code{STATIC_CHAIN_INCOMING_REGNUM} need
3044 not be defined.
3045
3046 The static chain register need not be a fixed register.
3047
3048 If the static chain is passed in memory, these macros should not be
3049 defined; instead, the @code{TARGET_STATIC_CHAIN} hook should be used.
3050 @end defmac
3051
3052 @hook TARGET_STATIC_CHAIN
3053
3054 @defmac DWARF_FRAME_REGISTERS
3055 This macro specifies the maximum number of hard registers that can be
3056 saved in a call frame. This is used to size data structures used in
3057 DWARF2 exception handling.
3058
3059 Prior to GCC 3.0, this macro was needed in order to establish a stable
3060 exception handling ABI in the face of adding new hard registers for ISA
3061 extensions. In GCC 3.0 and later, the EH ABI is insulated from changes
3062 in the number of hard registers. Nevertheless, this macro can still be
3063 used to reduce the runtime memory requirements of the exception handling
3064 routines, which can be substantial if the ISA contains a lot of
3065 registers that are not call-saved.
3066
3067 If this macro is not defined, it defaults to
3068 @code{FIRST_PSEUDO_REGISTER}.
3069 @end defmac
3070
3071 @defmac PRE_GCC3_DWARF_FRAME_REGISTERS
3072
3073 This macro is similar to @code{DWARF_FRAME_REGISTERS}, but is provided
3074 for backward compatibility in pre GCC 3.0 compiled code.
3075
3076 If this macro is not defined, it defaults to
3077 @code{DWARF_FRAME_REGISTERS}.
3078 @end defmac
3079
3080 @defmac DWARF_REG_TO_UNWIND_COLUMN (@var{regno})
3081
3082 Define this macro if the target's representation for dwarf registers
3083 is different than the internal representation for unwind column.
3084 Given a dwarf register, this macro should return the internal unwind
3085 column number to use instead.
3086 @end defmac
3087
3088 @defmac DWARF_FRAME_REGNUM (@var{regno})
3089
3090 Define this macro if the target's representation for dwarf registers
3091 used in .eh_frame or .debug_frame is different from that used in other
3092 debug info sections. Given a GCC hard register number, this macro
3093 should return the .eh_frame register number. The default is
3094 @code{DEBUGGER_REGNO (@var{regno})}.
3095
3096 @end defmac
3097
3098 @defmac DWARF2_FRAME_REG_OUT (@var{regno}, @var{for_eh})
3099
3100 Define this macro to map register numbers held in the call frame info
3101 that GCC has collected using @code{DWARF_FRAME_REGNUM} to those that
3102 should be output in .debug_frame (@code{@var{for_eh}} is zero) and
3103 .eh_frame (@code{@var{for_eh}} is nonzero). The default is to
3104 return @code{@var{regno}}.
3105
3106 @end defmac
3107
3108 @defmac REG_VALUE_IN_UNWIND_CONTEXT
3109
3110 Define this macro if the target stores register values as
3111 @code{_Unwind_Word} type in unwind context. It should be defined if
3112 target register size is larger than the size of @code{void *}. The
3113 default is to store register values as @code{void *} type.
3114
3115 @end defmac
3116
3117 @defmac ASSUME_EXTENDED_UNWIND_CONTEXT
3118
3119 Define this macro to be 1 if the target always uses extended unwind
3120 context with version, args_size and by_value fields. If it is undefined,
3121 it will be defined to 1 when @code{REG_VALUE_IN_UNWIND_CONTEXT} is
3122 defined and 0 otherwise.
3123
3124 @end defmac
3125
3126 @defmac DWARF_LAZY_REGISTER_VALUE (@var{regno}, @var{value})
3127 Define this macro if the target has pseudo DWARF registers whose
3128 values need to be computed lazily on demand by the unwinder (such as when
3129 referenced in a CFA expression). The macro returns true if @var{regno}
3130 is such a register and stores its value in @samp{*@var{value}} if so.
3131 @end defmac
3132
3133 @node Elimination
3134 @subsection Eliminating Frame Pointer and Arg Pointer
3135
3136 @c prevent bad page break with this line
3137 This is about eliminating the frame pointer and arg pointer.
3138
3139 @hook TARGET_FRAME_POINTER_REQUIRED
3140
3141 @defmac ELIMINABLE_REGS
3142 This macro specifies a table of register pairs used to eliminate
3143 unneeded registers that point into the stack frame.
3144
3145 The definition of this macro is a list of structure initializations, each
3146 of which specifies an original and replacement register.
3147
3148 On some machines, the position of the argument pointer is not known until
3149 the compilation is completed. In such a case, a separate hard register
3150 must be used for the argument pointer. This register can be eliminated by
3151 replacing it with either the frame pointer or the argument pointer,
3152 depending on whether or not the frame pointer has been eliminated.
3153
3154 In this case, you might specify:
3155 @smallexample
3156 #define ELIMINABLE_REGS \
3157 @{@{ARG_POINTER_REGNUM, STACK_POINTER_REGNUM@}, \
3158 @{ARG_POINTER_REGNUM, FRAME_POINTER_REGNUM@}, \
3159 @{FRAME_POINTER_REGNUM, STACK_POINTER_REGNUM@}@}
3160 @end smallexample
3161
3162 Note that the elimination of the argument pointer with the stack pointer is
3163 specified first since that is the preferred elimination.
3164 @end defmac
3165
3166 @hook TARGET_CAN_ELIMINATE
3167
3168 @defmac INITIAL_ELIMINATION_OFFSET (@var{from-reg}, @var{to-reg}, @var{offset-var})
3169 This macro returns the initial difference between the specified pair
3170 of registers. The value would be computed from information
3171 such as the result of @code{get_frame_size ()} and the tables of
3172 registers @code{df_regs_ever_live_p} and @code{call_used_regs}.
3173 @end defmac
3174
3175 @hook TARGET_COMPUTE_FRAME_LAYOUT
3176
3177 @node Stack Arguments
3178 @subsection Passing Function Arguments on the Stack
3179 @cindex arguments on stack
3180 @cindex stack arguments
3181
3182 The macros in this section control how arguments are passed
3183 on the stack. See the following section for other macros that
3184 control passing certain arguments in registers.
3185
3186 @hook TARGET_PROMOTE_PROTOTYPES
3187
3188 @hook TARGET_PUSH_ARGUMENT
3189
3190 @defmac PUSH_ARGS_REVERSED
3191 A C expression. If nonzero, function arguments will be evaluated from
3192 last to first, rather than from first to last. If this macro is not
3193 defined, it defaults to @code{PUSH_ARGS} on targets where the stack
3194 and args grow in opposite directions, and 0 otherwise.
3195 @end defmac
3196
3197 @defmac PUSH_ROUNDING (@var{npushed})
3198 A C expression that is the number of bytes actually pushed onto the
3199 stack when an instruction attempts to push @var{npushed} bytes.
3200
3201 On some machines, the definition
3202
3203 @smallexample
3204 #define PUSH_ROUNDING(BYTES) (BYTES)
3205 @end smallexample
3206
3207 @noindent
3208 will suffice. But on other machines, instructions that appear
3209 to push one byte actually push two bytes in an attempt to maintain
3210 alignment. Then the definition should be
3211
3212 @smallexample
3213 #define PUSH_ROUNDING(BYTES) (((BYTES) + 1) & ~1)
3214 @end smallexample
3215
3216 If the value of this macro has a type, it should be an unsigned type.
3217 @end defmac
3218
3219 @findex outgoing_args_size
3220 @findex crtl->outgoing_args_size
3221 @defmac ACCUMULATE_OUTGOING_ARGS
3222 A C expression. If nonzero, the maximum amount of space required for outgoing arguments
3223 will be computed and placed into
3224 @code{crtl->outgoing_args_size}. No space will be pushed
3225 onto the stack for each call; instead, the function prologue should
3226 increase the stack frame size by this amount.
3227
3228 Setting both @code{PUSH_ARGS} and @code{ACCUMULATE_OUTGOING_ARGS}
3229 is not proper.
3230 @end defmac
3231
3232 @defmac REG_PARM_STACK_SPACE (@var{fndecl})
3233 Define this macro if functions should assume that stack space has been
3234 allocated for arguments even when their values are passed in
3235 registers.
3236
3237 The value of this macro is the size, in bytes, of the area reserved for
3238 arguments passed in registers for the function represented by @var{fndecl},
3239 which can be zero if GCC is calling a library function.
3240 The argument @var{fndecl} can be the FUNCTION_DECL, or the type itself
3241 of the function.
3242
3243 This space can be allocated by the caller, or be a part of the
3244 machine-dependent stack frame: @code{OUTGOING_REG_PARM_STACK_SPACE} says
3245 which.
3246 @end defmac
3247 @c above is overfull. not sure what to do. --mew 5feb93 did
3248 @c something, not sure if it looks good. --mew 10feb93
3249
3250 @defmac INCOMING_REG_PARM_STACK_SPACE (@var{fndecl})
3251 Like @code{REG_PARM_STACK_SPACE}, but for incoming register arguments.
3252 Define this macro if space guaranteed when compiling a function body
3253 is different to space required when making a call, a situation that
3254 can arise with K&R style function definitions.
3255 @end defmac
3256
3257 @defmac OUTGOING_REG_PARM_STACK_SPACE (@var{fntype})
3258 Define this to a nonzero value if it is the responsibility of the
3259 caller to allocate the area reserved for arguments passed in registers
3260 when calling a function of @var{fntype}. @var{fntype} may be NULL
3261 if the function called is a library function.
3262
3263 If @code{ACCUMULATE_OUTGOING_ARGS} is defined, this macro controls
3264 whether the space for these arguments counts in the value of
3265 @code{crtl->outgoing_args_size}.
3266 @end defmac
3267
3268 @defmac STACK_PARMS_IN_REG_PARM_AREA
3269 Define this macro if @code{REG_PARM_STACK_SPACE} is defined, but the
3270 stack parameters don't skip the area specified by it.
3271 @c i changed this, makes more sens and it should have taken care of the
3272 @c overfull.. not as specific, tho. --mew 5feb93
3273
3274 Normally, when a parameter is not passed in registers, it is placed on the
3275 stack beyond the @code{REG_PARM_STACK_SPACE} area. Defining this macro
3276 suppresses this behavior and causes the parameter to be passed on the
3277 stack in its natural location.
3278 @end defmac
3279
3280 @hook TARGET_RETURN_POPS_ARGS
3281
3282 @defmac CALL_POPS_ARGS (@var{cum})
3283 A C expression that should indicate the number of bytes a call sequence
3284 pops off the stack. It is added to the value of @code{RETURN_POPS_ARGS}
3285 when compiling a function call.
3286
3287 @var{cum} is the variable in which all arguments to the called function
3288 have been accumulated.
3289
3290 On certain architectures, such as the SH5, a call trampoline is used
3291 that pops certain registers off the stack, depending on the arguments
3292 that have been passed to the function. Since this is a property of the
3293 call site, not of the called function, @code{RETURN_POPS_ARGS} is not
3294 appropriate.
3295 @end defmac
3296
3297 @node Register Arguments
3298 @subsection Passing Arguments in Registers
3299 @cindex arguments in registers
3300 @cindex registers arguments
3301
3302 This section describes the macros which let you control how various
3303 types of arguments are passed in registers or how they are arranged in
3304 the stack.
3305
3306 @hook TARGET_FUNCTION_ARG
3307
3308 @hook TARGET_MUST_PASS_IN_STACK
3309
3310 @hook TARGET_FUNCTION_INCOMING_ARG
3311
3312 @hook TARGET_USE_PSEUDO_PIC_REG
3313
3314 @hook TARGET_INIT_PIC_REG
3315
3316 @hook TARGET_ARG_PARTIAL_BYTES
3317
3318 @hook TARGET_PASS_BY_REFERENCE
3319
3320 @hook TARGET_CALLEE_COPIES
3321
3322 @defmac CUMULATIVE_ARGS
3323 A C type for declaring a variable that is used as the first argument
3324 of @code{TARGET_FUNCTION_ARG} and other related values. For some
3325 target machines, the type @code{int} suffices and can hold the number
3326 of bytes of argument so far.
3327
3328 There is no need to record in @code{CUMULATIVE_ARGS} anything about the
3329 arguments that have been passed on the stack. The compiler has other
3330 variables to keep track of that. For target machines on which all
3331 arguments are passed on the stack, there is no need to store anything in
3332 @code{CUMULATIVE_ARGS}; however, the data structure must exist and
3333 should not be empty, so use @code{int}.
3334 @end defmac
3335
3336 @defmac OVERRIDE_ABI_FORMAT (@var{fndecl})
3337 If defined, this macro is called before generating any code for a
3338 function, but after the @var{cfun} descriptor for the function has been
3339 created. The back end may use this macro to update @var{cfun} to
3340 reflect an ABI other than that which would normally be used by default.
3341 If the compiler is generating code for a compiler-generated function,
3342 @var{fndecl} may be @code{NULL}.
3343 @end defmac
3344
3345 @defmac INIT_CUMULATIVE_ARGS (@var{cum}, @var{fntype}, @var{libname}, @var{fndecl}, @var{n_named_args})
3346 A C statement (sans semicolon) for initializing the variable
3347 @var{cum} for the state at the beginning of the argument list. The
3348 variable has type @code{CUMULATIVE_ARGS}. The value of @var{fntype}
3349 is the tree node for the data type of the function which will receive
3350 the args, or 0 if the args are to a compiler support library function.
3351 For direct calls that are not libcalls, @var{fndecl} contain the
3352 declaration node of the function. @var{fndecl} is also set when
3353 @code{INIT_CUMULATIVE_ARGS} is used to find arguments for the function
3354 being compiled. @var{n_named_args} is set to the number of named
3355 arguments, including a structure return address if it is passed as a
3356 parameter, when making a call. When processing incoming arguments,
3357 @var{n_named_args} is set to @minus{}1.
3358
3359 When processing a call to a compiler support library function,
3360 @var{libname} identifies which one. It is a @code{symbol_ref} rtx which
3361 contains the name of the function, as a string. @var{libname} is 0 when
3362 an ordinary C function call is being processed. Thus, each time this
3363 macro is called, either @var{libname} or @var{fntype} is nonzero, but
3364 never both of them at once.
3365 @end defmac
3366
3367 @defmac INIT_CUMULATIVE_LIBCALL_ARGS (@var{cum}, @var{mode}, @var{libname})
3368 Like @code{INIT_CUMULATIVE_ARGS} but only used for outgoing libcalls,
3369 it gets a @code{MODE} argument instead of @var{fntype}, that would be
3370 @code{NULL}. @var{indirect} would always be zero, too. If this macro
3371 is not defined, @code{INIT_CUMULATIVE_ARGS (cum, NULL_RTX, libname,
3372 0)} is used instead.
3373 @end defmac
3374
3375 @defmac INIT_CUMULATIVE_INCOMING_ARGS (@var{cum}, @var{fntype}, @var{libname})
3376 Like @code{INIT_CUMULATIVE_ARGS} but overrides it for the purposes of
3377 finding the arguments for the function being compiled. If this macro is
3378 undefined, @code{INIT_CUMULATIVE_ARGS} is used instead.
3379
3380 The value passed for @var{libname} is always 0, since library routines
3381 with special calling conventions are never compiled with GCC@. The
3382 argument @var{libname} exists for symmetry with
3383 @code{INIT_CUMULATIVE_ARGS}.
3384 @c could use "this macro" in place of @code{INIT_CUMULATIVE_ARGS}, maybe.
3385 @c --mew 5feb93 i switched the order of the sentences. --mew 10feb93
3386 @end defmac
3387
3388 @hook TARGET_FUNCTION_ARG_ADVANCE
3389
3390 @hook TARGET_FUNCTION_ARG_OFFSET
3391
3392 @hook TARGET_FUNCTION_ARG_PADDING
3393
3394 @defmac PAD_VARARGS_DOWN
3395 If defined, a C expression which determines whether the default
3396 implementation of va_arg will attempt to pad down before reading the
3397 next argument, if that argument is smaller than its aligned space as
3398 controlled by @code{PARM_BOUNDARY}. If this macro is not defined, all such
3399 arguments are padded down if @code{BYTES_BIG_ENDIAN} is true.
3400 @end defmac
3401
3402 @defmac BLOCK_REG_PADDING (@var{mode}, @var{type}, @var{first})
3403 Specify padding for the last element of a block move between registers and
3404 memory. @var{first} is nonzero if this is the only element. Defining this
3405 macro allows better control of register function parameters on big-endian
3406 machines, without using @code{PARALLEL} rtl. In particular,
3407 @code{MUST_PASS_IN_STACK} need not test padding and mode of types in
3408 registers, as there is no longer a "wrong" part of a register; For example,
3409 a three byte aggregate may be passed in the high part of a register if so
3410 required.
3411 @end defmac
3412
3413 @hook TARGET_FUNCTION_ARG_BOUNDARY
3414
3415 @hook TARGET_FUNCTION_ARG_ROUND_BOUNDARY
3416
3417 @defmac FUNCTION_ARG_REGNO_P (@var{regno})
3418 A C expression that is nonzero if @var{regno} is the number of a hard
3419 register in which function arguments are sometimes passed. This does
3420 @emph{not} include implicit arguments such as the static chain and
3421 the structure-value address. On many machines, no registers can be
3422 used for this purpose since all function arguments are pushed on the
3423 stack.
3424 @end defmac
3425
3426 @hook TARGET_SPLIT_COMPLEX_ARG
3427
3428 @hook TARGET_BUILD_BUILTIN_VA_LIST
3429
3430 @hook TARGET_ENUM_VA_LIST_P
3431
3432 @hook TARGET_FN_ABI_VA_LIST
3433
3434 @hook TARGET_CANONICAL_VA_LIST_TYPE
3435
3436 @hook TARGET_GIMPLIFY_VA_ARG_EXPR
3437
3438 @hook TARGET_VALID_POINTER_MODE
3439
3440 @hook TARGET_REF_MAY_ALIAS_ERRNO
3441
3442 @hook TARGET_TRANSLATE_MODE_ATTRIBUTE
3443
3444 @hook TARGET_SCALAR_MODE_SUPPORTED_P
3445
3446 @hook TARGET_VECTOR_MODE_SUPPORTED_P
3447
3448 @hook TARGET_VECTOR_MODE_SUPPORTED_ANY_TARGET_P
3449
3450 @hook TARGET_COMPATIBLE_VECTOR_TYPES_P
3451
3452 @hook TARGET_ARRAY_MODE
3453
3454 @hook TARGET_ARRAY_MODE_SUPPORTED_P
3455
3456 @hook TARGET_LIBGCC_FLOATING_MODE_SUPPORTED_P
3457
3458 @hook TARGET_FLOATN_MODE
3459
3460 @hook TARGET_FLOATN_BUILTIN_P
3461
3462 @hook TARGET_SMALL_REGISTER_CLASSES_FOR_MODE_P
3463
3464 @node Scalar Return
3465 @subsection How Scalar Function Values Are Returned
3466 @cindex return values in registers
3467 @cindex values, returned by functions
3468 @cindex scalars, returned as values
3469
3470 This section discusses the macros that control returning scalars as
3471 values---values that can fit in registers.
3472
3473 @hook TARGET_FUNCTION_VALUE
3474
3475 @defmac FUNCTION_VALUE (@var{valtype}, @var{func})
3476 This macro has been deprecated. Use @code{TARGET_FUNCTION_VALUE} for
3477 a new target instead.
3478 @end defmac
3479
3480 @defmac LIBCALL_VALUE (@var{mode})
3481 A C expression to create an RTX representing the place where a library
3482 function returns a value of mode @var{mode}.
3483
3484 Note that ``library function'' in this context means a compiler
3485 support routine, used to perform arithmetic, whose name is known
3486 specially by the compiler and was not mentioned in the C code being
3487 compiled.
3488 @end defmac
3489
3490 @hook TARGET_LIBCALL_VALUE
3491
3492 @defmac FUNCTION_VALUE_REGNO_P (@var{regno})
3493 A C expression that is nonzero if @var{regno} is the number of a hard
3494 register in which the values of called function may come back.
3495
3496 A register whose use for returning values is limited to serving as the
3497 second of a pair (for a value of type @code{double}, say) need not be
3498 recognized by this macro. So for most machines, this definition
3499 suffices:
3500
3501 @smallexample
3502 #define FUNCTION_VALUE_REGNO_P(N) ((N) == 0)
3503 @end smallexample
3504
3505 If the machine has register windows, so that the caller and the called
3506 function use different registers for the return value, this macro
3507 should recognize only the caller's register numbers.
3508
3509 This macro has been deprecated. Use @code{TARGET_FUNCTION_VALUE_REGNO_P}
3510 for a new target instead.
3511 @end defmac
3512
3513 @hook TARGET_FUNCTION_VALUE_REGNO_P
3514
3515 @defmac APPLY_RESULT_SIZE
3516 Define this macro if @samp{untyped_call} and @samp{untyped_return}
3517 need more space than is implied by @code{FUNCTION_VALUE_REGNO_P} for
3518 saving and restoring an arbitrary return value.
3519 @end defmac
3520
3521 @hook TARGET_OMIT_STRUCT_RETURN_REG
3522
3523 @hook TARGET_RETURN_IN_MSB
3524
3525 @node Aggregate Return
3526 @subsection How Large Values Are Returned
3527 @cindex aggregates as return values
3528 @cindex large return values
3529 @cindex returning aggregate values
3530 @cindex structure value address
3531
3532 When a function value's mode is @code{BLKmode} (and in some other
3533 cases), the value is not returned according to
3534 @code{TARGET_FUNCTION_VALUE} (@pxref{Scalar Return}). Instead, the
3535 caller passes the address of a block of memory in which the value
3536 should be stored. This address is called the @dfn{structure value
3537 address}.
3538
3539 This section describes how to control returning structure values in
3540 memory.
3541
3542 @hook TARGET_RETURN_IN_MEMORY
3543
3544 @defmac DEFAULT_PCC_STRUCT_RETURN
3545 Define this macro to be 1 if all structure and union return values must be
3546 in memory. Since this results in slower code, this should be defined
3547 only if needed for compatibility with other compilers or with an ABI@.
3548 If you define this macro to be 0, then the conventions used for structure
3549 and union return values are decided by the @code{TARGET_RETURN_IN_MEMORY}
3550 target hook.
3551
3552 If not defined, this defaults to the value 1.
3553 @end defmac
3554
3555 @hook TARGET_STRUCT_VALUE_RTX
3556
3557 @defmac PCC_STATIC_STRUCT_RETURN
3558 Define this macro if the usual system convention on the target machine
3559 for returning structures and unions is for the called function to return
3560 the address of a static variable containing the value.
3561
3562 Do not define this if the usual system convention is for the caller to
3563 pass an address to the subroutine.
3564
3565 This macro has effect in @option{-fpcc-struct-return} mode, but it does
3566 nothing when you use @option{-freg-struct-return} mode.
3567 @end defmac
3568
3569 @hook TARGET_GET_RAW_RESULT_MODE
3570
3571 @hook TARGET_GET_RAW_ARG_MODE
3572
3573 @hook TARGET_EMPTY_RECORD_P
3574
3575 @hook TARGET_WARN_PARAMETER_PASSING_ABI
3576
3577 @node Caller Saves
3578 @subsection Caller-Saves Register Allocation
3579
3580 If you enable it, GCC can save registers around function calls. This
3581 makes it possible to use call-clobbered registers to hold variables that
3582 must live across calls.
3583
3584 @defmac HARD_REGNO_CALLER_SAVE_MODE (@var{regno}, @var{nregs})
3585 A C expression specifying which mode is required for saving @var{nregs}
3586 of a pseudo-register in call-clobbered hard register @var{regno}. If
3587 @var{regno} is unsuitable for caller save, @code{VOIDmode} should be
3588 returned. For most machines this macro need not be defined since GCC
3589 will select the smallest suitable mode.
3590 @end defmac
3591
3592 @node Function Entry
3593 @subsection Function Entry and Exit
3594 @cindex function entry and exit
3595 @cindex prologue
3596 @cindex epilogue
3597
3598 This section describes the macros that output function entry
3599 (@dfn{prologue}) and exit (@dfn{epilogue}) code.
3600
3601 @hook TARGET_ASM_PRINT_PATCHABLE_FUNCTION_ENTRY
3602
3603 @hook TARGET_ASM_FUNCTION_PROLOGUE
3604
3605 @hook TARGET_ASM_FUNCTION_END_PROLOGUE
3606
3607 @hook TARGET_ASM_FUNCTION_BEGIN_EPILOGUE
3608
3609 @hook TARGET_ASM_FUNCTION_EPILOGUE
3610
3611 @itemize @bullet
3612 @findex pretend_args_size
3613 @findex crtl->args.pretend_args_size
3614 @item
3615 A region of @code{crtl->args.pretend_args_size} bytes of
3616 uninitialized space just underneath the first argument arriving on the
3617 stack. (This may not be at the very start of the allocated stack region
3618 if the calling sequence has pushed anything else since pushing the stack
3619 arguments. But usually, on such machines, nothing else has been pushed
3620 yet, because the function prologue itself does all the pushing.) This
3621 region is used on machines where an argument may be passed partly in
3622 registers and partly in memory, and, in some cases to support the
3623 features in @code{<stdarg.h>}.
3624
3625 @item
3626 An area of memory used to save certain registers used by the function.
3627 The size of this area, which may also include space for such things as
3628 the return address and pointers to previous stack frames, is
3629 machine-specific and usually depends on which registers have been used
3630 in the function. Machines with register windows often do not require
3631 a save area.
3632
3633 @item
3634 A region of at least @var{size} bytes, possibly rounded up to an allocation
3635 boundary, to contain the local variables of the function. On some machines,
3636 this region and the save area may occur in the opposite order, with the
3637 save area closer to the top of the stack.
3638
3639 @cindex @code{ACCUMULATE_OUTGOING_ARGS} and stack frames
3640 @item
3641 Optionally, when @code{ACCUMULATE_OUTGOING_ARGS} is defined, a region of
3642 @code{crtl->outgoing_args_size} bytes to be used for outgoing
3643 argument lists of the function. @xref{Stack Arguments}.
3644 @end itemize
3645
3646 @defmac EXIT_IGNORE_STACK
3647 Define this macro as a C expression that is nonzero if the return
3648 instruction or the function epilogue ignores the value of the stack
3649 pointer; in other words, if it is safe to delete an instruction to
3650 adjust the stack pointer before a return from the function. The
3651 default is 0.
3652
3653 Note that this macro's value is relevant only for functions for which
3654 frame pointers are maintained. It is never safe to delete a final
3655 stack adjustment in a function that has no frame pointer, and the
3656 compiler knows this regardless of @code{EXIT_IGNORE_STACK}.
3657 @end defmac
3658
3659 @defmac EPILOGUE_USES (@var{regno})
3660 Define this macro as a C expression that is nonzero for registers that are
3661 used by the epilogue or the @samp{return} pattern. The stack and frame
3662 pointer registers are already assumed to be used as needed.
3663 @end defmac
3664
3665 @defmac EH_USES (@var{regno})
3666 Define this macro as a C expression that is nonzero for registers that are
3667 used by the exception handling mechanism, and so should be considered live
3668 on entry to an exception edge.
3669 @end defmac
3670
3671 @hook TARGET_ASM_OUTPUT_MI_THUNK
3672
3673 @hook TARGET_ASM_CAN_OUTPUT_MI_THUNK
3674
3675 @node Profiling
3676 @subsection Generating Code for Profiling
3677 @cindex profiling, code generation
3678
3679 These macros will help you generate code for profiling.
3680
3681 @defmac FUNCTION_PROFILER (@var{file}, @var{labelno})
3682 A C statement or compound statement to output to @var{file} some
3683 assembler code to call the profiling subroutine @code{mcount}.
3684
3685 @findex mcount
3686 The details of how @code{mcount} expects to be called are determined by
3687 your operating system environment, not by GCC@. To figure them out,
3688 compile a small program for profiling using the system's installed C
3689 compiler and look at the assembler code that results.
3690
3691 Older implementations of @code{mcount} expect the address of a counter
3692 variable to be loaded into some register. The name of this variable is
3693 @samp{LP} followed by the number @var{labelno}, so you would generate
3694 the name using @samp{LP%d} in a @code{fprintf}.
3695 @end defmac
3696
3697 @defmac PROFILE_HOOK
3698 A C statement or compound statement to output to @var{file} some assembly
3699 code to call the profiling subroutine @code{mcount} even the target does
3700 not support profiling.
3701 @end defmac
3702
3703 @defmac NO_PROFILE_COUNTERS
3704 Define this macro to be an expression with a nonzero value if the
3705 @code{mcount} subroutine on your system does not need a counter variable
3706 allocated for each function. This is true for almost all modern
3707 implementations. If you define this macro, you must not use the
3708 @var{labelno} argument to @code{FUNCTION_PROFILER}.
3709 @end defmac
3710
3711 @defmac PROFILE_BEFORE_PROLOGUE
3712 Define this macro if the code for function profiling should come before
3713 the function prologue. Normally, the profiling code comes after.
3714 @end defmac
3715
3716 @hook TARGET_KEEP_LEAF_WHEN_PROFILED
3717
3718 @node Tail Calls
3719 @subsection Permitting tail calls
3720 @cindex tail calls
3721
3722 @hook TARGET_FUNCTION_OK_FOR_SIBCALL
3723
3724 @hook TARGET_EXTRA_LIVE_ON_ENTRY
3725
3726 @hook TARGET_SET_UP_BY_PROLOGUE
3727
3728 @hook TARGET_WARN_FUNC_RETURN
3729
3730 @node Shrink-wrapping separate components
3731 @subsection Shrink-wrapping separate components
3732 @cindex shrink-wrapping separate components
3733
3734 The prologue may perform a variety of target dependent tasks such as
3735 saving callee-saved registers, saving the return address, aligning the
3736 stack, creating a stack frame, initializing the PIC register, setting
3737 up the static chain, etc.
3738
3739 On some targets some of these tasks may be independent of others and
3740 thus may be shrink-wrapped separately. These independent tasks are
3741 referred to as components and are handled generically by the target
3742 independent parts of GCC.
3743
3744 Using the following hooks those prologue or epilogue components can be
3745 shrink-wrapped separately, so that the initialization (and possibly
3746 teardown) those components do is not done as frequently on execution
3747 paths where this would unnecessary.
3748
3749 What exactly those components are is up to the target code; the generic
3750 code treats them abstractly, as a bit in an @code{sbitmap}. These
3751 @code{sbitmap}s are allocated by the @code{shrink_wrap.get_separate_components}
3752 and @code{shrink_wrap.components_for_bb} hooks, and deallocated by the
3753 generic code.
3754
3755 @hook TARGET_SHRINK_WRAP_GET_SEPARATE_COMPONENTS
3756
3757 @hook TARGET_SHRINK_WRAP_COMPONENTS_FOR_BB
3758
3759 @hook TARGET_SHRINK_WRAP_DISQUALIFY_COMPONENTS
3760
3761 @hook TARGET_SHRINK_WRAP_EMIT_PROLOGUE_COMPONENTS
3762
3763 @hook TARGET_SHRINK_WRAP_EMIT_EPILOGUE_COMPONENTS
3764
3765 @hook TARGET_SHRINK_WRAP_SET_HANDLED_COMPONENTS
3766
3767 @node Stack Smashing Protection
3768 @subsection Stack smashing protection
3769 @cindex stack smashing protection
3770
3771 @hook TARGET_STACK_PROTECT_GUARD
3772
3773 @hook TARGET_STACK_PROTECT_FAIL
3774
3775 @hook TARGET_STACK_PROTECT_RUNTIME_ENABLED_P
3776
3777 @hook TARGET_SUPPORTS_SPLIT_STACK
3778
3779 @hook TARGET_GET_VALID_OPTION_VALUES
3780
3781 @node Miscellaneous Register Hooks
3782 @subsection Miscellaneous register hooks
3783 @cindex miscellaneous register hooks
3784
3785 @hook TARGET_CALL_FUSAGE_CONTAINS_NON_CALLEE_CLOBBERS
3786
3787 @node Varargs
3788 @section Implementing the Varargs Macros
3789 @cindex varargs implementation
3790
3791 GCC comes with an implementation of @code{<varargs.h>} and
3792 @code{<stdarg.h>} that work without change on machines that pass arguments
3793 on the stack. Other machines require their own implementations of
3794 varargs, and the two machine independent header files must have
3795 conditionals to include it.
3796
3797 ISO @code{<stdarg.h>} differs from traditional @code{<varargs.h>} mainly in
3798 the calling convention for @code{va_start}. The traditional
3799 implementation takes just one argument, which is the variable in which
3800 to store the argument pointer. The ISO implementation of
3801 @code{va_start} takes an additional second argument. The user is
3802 supposed to write the last named argument of the function here.
3803
3804 However, @code{va_start} should not use this argument. The way to find
3805 the end of the named arguments is with the built-in functions described
3806 below.
3807
3808 @defmac __builtin_saveregs ()
3809 Use this built-in function to save the argument registers in memory so
3810 that the varargs mechanism can access them. Both ISO and traditional
3811 versions of @code{va_start} must use @code{__builtin_saveregs}, unless
3812 you use @code{TARGET_SETUP_INCOMING_VARARGS} (see below) instead.
3813
3814 On some machines, @code{__builtin_saveregs} is open-coded under the
3815 control of the target hook @code{TARGET_EXPAND_BUILTIN_SAVEREGS}. On
3816 other machines, it calls a routine written in assembler language,
3817 found in @file{libgcc2.c}.
3818
3819 Code generated for the call to @code{__builtin_saveregs} appears at the
3820 beginning of the function, as opposed to where the call to
3821 @code{__builtin_saveregs} is written, regardless of what the code is.
3822 This is because the registers must be saved before the function starts
3823 to use them for its own purposes.
3824 @c i rewrote the first sentence above to fix an overfull hbox. --mew
3825 @c 10feb93
3826 @end defmac
3827
3828 @defmac __builtin_next_arg (@var{lastarg})
3829 This builtin returns the address of the first anonymous stack
3830 argument, as type @code{void *}. If @code{ARGS_GROW_DOWNWARD}, it
3831 returns the address of the location above the first anonymous stack
3832 argument. Use it in @code{va_start} to initialize the pointer for
3833 fetching arguments from the stack. Also use it in @code{va_start} to
3834 verify that the second parameter @var{lastarg} is the last named argument
3835 of the current function.
3836 @end defmac
3837
3838 @defmac __builtin_classify_type (@var{object})
3839 Since each machine has its own conventions for which data types are
3840 passed in which kind of register, your implementation of @code{va_arg}
3841 has to embody these conventions. The easiest way to categorize the
3842 specified data type is to use @code{__builtin_classify_type} together
3843 with @code{sizeof} and @code{__alignof__}.
3844
3845 @code{__builtin_classify_type} ignores the value of @var{object},
3846 considering only its data type. It returns an integer describing what
3847 kind of type that is---integer, floating, pointer, structure, and so on.
3848
3849 The file @file{typeclass.h} defines an enumeration that you can use to
3850 interpret the values of @code{__builtin_classify_type}.
3851 @end defmac
3852
3853 These machine description macros help implement varargs:
3854
3855 @hook TARGET_EXPAND_BUILTIN_SAVEREGS
3856
3857 @hook TARGET_SETUP_INCOMING_VARARGS
3858
3859 @hook TARGET_STRICT_ARGUMENT_NAMING
3860
3861 @hook TARGET_START_CALL_ARGS
3862
3863 @hook TARGET_CALL_ARGS
3864
3865 @hook TARGET_END_CALL_ARGS
3866
3867 @hook TARGET_PRETEND_OUTGOING_VARARGS_NAMED
3868
3869 @node Trampolines
3870 @section Support for Nested Functions
3871 @cindex support for nested functions
3872 @cindex trampolines for nested functions
3873 @cindex descriptors for nested functions
3874 @cindex nested functions, support for
3875
3876 Taking the address of a nested function requires special compiler
3877 handling to ensure that the static chain register is loaded when
3878 the function is invoked via an indirect call.
3879
3880 GCC has traditionally supported nested functions by creating an
3881 executable @dfn{trampoline} at run time when the address of a nested
3882 function is taken. This is a small piece of code which normally
3883 resides on the stack, in the stack frame of the containing function.
3884 The trampoline loads the static chain register and then jumps to the
3885 real address of the nested function.
3886
3887 The use of trampolines requires an executable stack, which is a
3888 security risk. To avoid this problem, GCC also supports another
3889 strategy: using descriptors for nested functions. Under this model,
3890 taking the address of a nested function results in a pointer to a
3891 non-executable function descriptor object. Initializing the static chain
3892 from the descriptor is handled at indirect call sites.
3893
3894 On some targets, including HPPA and IA-64, function descriptors may be
3895 mandated by the ABI or be otherwise handled in a target-specific way
3896 by the back end in its code generation strategy for indirect calls.
3897 GCC also provides its own generic descriptor implementation to support the
3898 @option{-fno-trampolines} option. In this case runtime detection of
3899 function descriptors at indirect call sites relies on descriptor
3900 pointers being tagged with a bit that is never set in bare function
3901 addresses. Since GCC's generic function descriptors are
3902 not ABI-compliant, this option is typically used only on a
3903 per-language basis (notably by Ada) or when it can otherwise be
3904 applied to the whole program.
3905
3906 For languages other than Ada, the @code{-ftrampolines} and
3907 @code{-fno-trampolines} options currently have no effect, and
3908 trampolines are always generated on platforms that need them
3909 for nested functions.
3910
3911 Define the following hook if your backend either implements ABI-specified
3912 descriptor support, or can use GCC's generic descriptor implementation
3913 for nested functions.
3914
3915 @hook TARGET_CUSTOM_FUNCTION_DESCRIPTORS
3916
3917 The following macros tell GCC how to generate code to allocate and
3918 initialize an executable trampoline. You can also use this interface
3919 if your back end needs to create ABI-specified non-executable descriptors; in
3920 this case the "trampoline" created is the descriptor containing data only.
3921
3922 The instructions in an executable trampoline must do two things: load
3923 a constant address into the static chain register, and jump to the real
3924 address of the nested function. On CISC machines such as the m68k,
3925 this requires two instructions, a move immediate and a jump. Then the
3926 two addresses exist in the trampoline as word-long immediate operands.
3927 On RISC machines, it is often necessary to load each address into a
3928 register in two parts. Then pieces of each address form separate
3929 immediate operands.
3930
3931 The code generated to initialize the trampoline must store the variable
3932 parts---the static chain value and the function address---into the
3933 immediate operands of the instructions. On a CISC machine, this is
3934 simply a matter of copying each address to a memory reference at the
3935 proper offset from the start of the trampoline. On a RISC machine, it
3936 may be necessary to take out pieces of the address and store them
3937 separately.
3938
3939 @hook TARGET_ASM_TRAMPOLINE_TEMPLATE
3940
3941 @defmac TRAMPOLINE_SECTION
3942 Return the section into which the trampoline template is to be placed
3943 (@pxref{Sections}). The default value is @code{readonly_data_section}.
3944 @end defmac
3945
3946 @defmac TRAMPOLINE_SIZE
3947 A C expression for the size in bytes of the trampoline, as an integer.
3948 @end defmac
3949
3950 @defmac TRAMPOLINE_ALIGNMENT
3951 Alignment required for trampolines, in bits.
3952
3953 If you don't define this macro, the value of @code{FUNCTION_ALIGNMENT}
3954 is used for aligning trampolines.
3955 @end defmac
3956
3957 @hook TARGET_TRAMPOLINE_INIT
3958
3959 @hook TARGET_EMIT_CALL_BUILTIN___CLEAR_CACHE
3960
3961 @hook TARGET_TRAMPOLINE_ADJUST_ADDRESS
3962
3963 Implementing trampolines is difficult on many machines because they have
3964 separate instruction and data caches. Writing into a stack location
3965 fails to clear the memory in the instruction cache, so when the program
3966 jumps to that location, it executes the old contents.
3967
3968 Here are two possible solutions. One is to clear the relevant parts of
3969 the instruction cache whenever a trampoline is set up. The other is to
3970 make all trampolines identical, by having them jump to a standard
3971 subroutine. The former technique makes trampoline execution faster; the
3972 latter makes initialization faster.
3973
3974 To clear the instruction cache when a trampoline is initialized, define
3975 the following macro.
3976
3977 @defmac CLEAR_INSN_CACHE (@var{beg}, @var{end})
3978 If defined, expands to a C expression clearing the @emph{instruction
3979 cache} in the specified interval. The definition of this macro would
3980 typically be a series of @code{asm} statements. Both @var{beg} and
3981 @var{end} are pointer expressions.
3982 @end defmac
3983
3984 To use a standard subroutine, define the following macro. In addition,
3985 you must make sure that the instructions in a trampoline fill an entire
3986 cache line with identical instructions, or else ensure that the
3987 beginning of the trampoline code is always aligned at the same point in
3988 its cache line. Look in @file{m68k.h} as a guide.
3989
3990 @defmac TRANSFER_FROM_TRAMPOLINE
3991 Define this macro if trampolines need a special subroutine to do their
3992 work. The macro should expand to a series of @code{asm} statements
3993 which will be compiled with GCC@. They go in a library function named
3994 @code{__transfer_from_trampoline}.
3995
3996 If you need to avoid executing the ordinary prologue code of a compiled
3997 C function when you jump to the subroutine, you can do so by placing a
3998 special label of your own in the assembler code. Use one @code{asm}
3999 statement to generate an assembler label, and another to make the label
4000 global. Then trampolines can use that label to jump directly to your
4001 special assembler code.
4002 @end defmac
4003
4004 @node Library Calls
4005 @section Implicit Calls to Library Routines
4006 @cindex library subroutine names
4007 @cindex @file{libgcc.a}
4008
4009 @c prevent bad page break with this line
4010 Here is an explanation of implicit calls to library routines.
4011
4012 @defmac DECLARE_LIBRARY_RENAMES
4013 This macro, if defined, should expand to a piece of C code that will get
4014 expanded when compiling functions for libgcc.a. It can be used to
4015 provide alternate names for GCC's internal library functions if there
4016 are ABI-mandated names that the compiler should provide.
4017 @end defmac
4018
4019 @findex set_optab_libfunc
4020 @findex init_one_libfunc
4021 @hook TARGET_INIT_LIBFUNCS
4022
4023 @hook TARGET_LIBFUNC_GNU_PREFIX
4024
4025 @defmac FLOAT_LIB_COMPARE_RETURNS_BOOL (@var{mode}, @var{comparison})
4026 This macro should return @code{true} if the library routine that
4027 implements the floating point comparison operator @var{comparison} in
4028 mode @var{mode} will return a boolean, and @var{false} if it will
4029 return a tristate.
4030
4031 GCC's own floating point libraries return tristates from the
4032 comparison operators, so the default returns false always. Most ports
4033 don't need to define this macro.
4034 @end defmac
4035
4036 @defmac TARGET_LIB_INT_CMP_BIASED
4037 This macro should evaluate to @code{true} if the integer comparison
4038 functions (like @code{__cmpdi2}) return 0 to indicate that the first
4039 operand is smaller than the second, 1 to indicate that they are equal,
4040 and 2 to indicate that the first operand is greater than the second.
4041 If this macro evaluates to @code{false} the comparison functions return
4042 @minus{}1, 0, and 1 instead of 0, 1, and 2. If the target uses the routines
4043 in @file{libgcc.a}, you do not need to define this macro.
4044 @end defmac
4045
4046 @defmac TARGET_HAS_NO_HW_DIVIDE
4047 This macro should be defined if the target has no hardware divide
4048 instructions. If this macro is defined, GCC will use an algorithm which
4049 make use of simple logical and arithmetic operations for 64-bit
4050 division. If the macro is not defined, GCC will use an algorithm which
4051 make use of a 64-bit by 32-bit divide primitive.
4052 @end defmac
4053
4054 @cindex @code{EDOM}, implicit usage
4055 @findex matherr
4056 @defmac TARGET_EDOM
4057 The value of @code{EDOM} on the target machine, as a C integer constant
4058 expression. If you don't define this macro, GCC does not attempt to
4059 deposit the value of @code{EDOM} into @code{errno} directly. Look in
4060 @file{/usr/include/errno.h} to find the value of @code{EDOM} on your
4061 system.
4062
4063 If you do not define @code{TARGET_EDOM}, then compiled code reports
4064 domain errors by calling the library function and letting it report the
4065 error. If mathematical functions on your system use @code{matherr} when
4066 there is an error, then you should leave @code{TARGET_EDOM} undefined so
4067 that @code{matherr} is used normally.
4068 @end defmac
4069
4070 @cindex @code{errno}, implicit usage
4071 @defmac GEN_ERRNO_RTX
4072 Define this macro as a C expression to create an rtl expression that
4073 refers to the global ``variable'' @code{errno}. (On certain systems,
4074 @code{errno} may not actually be a variable.) If you don't define this
4075 macro, a reasonable default is used.
4076 @end defmac
4077
4078 @hook TARGET_LIBC_HAS_FUNCTION
4079
4080 @hook TARGET_LIBC_HAS_FAST_FUNCTION
4081
4082 @hook TARGET_FORTIFY_SOURCE_DEFAULT_LEVEL
4083
4084 @hook TARGET_LIBM_FUNCTION_MAX_ERROR
4085
4086 @defmac NEXT_OBJC_RUNTIME
4087 Set this macro to 1 to use the "NeXT" Objective-C message sending conventions
4088 by default. This calling convention involves passing the object, the selector
4089 and the method arguments all at once to the method-lookup library function.
4090 This is the usual setting when targeting Darwin / macOS systems, which have
4091 the NeXT runtime installed.
4092
4093 If the macro is set to 0, the "GNU" Objective-C message sending convention
4094 will be used by default. This convention passes just the object and the
4095 selector to the method-lookup function, which returns a pointer to the method.
4096
4097 In either case, it remains possible to select code-generation for the alternate
4098 scheme, by means of compiler command line switches.
4099 @end defmac
4100
4101 @node Addressing Modes
4102 @section Addressing Modes
4103 @cindex addressing modes
4104
4105 @c prevent bad page break with this line
4106 This is about addressing modes.
4107
4108 @defmac HAVE_PRE_INCREMENT
4109 @defmacx HAVE_PRE_DECREMENT
4110 @defmacx HAVE_POST_INCREMENT
4111 @defmacx HAVE_POST_DECREMENT
4112 A C expression that is nonzero if the machine supports pre-increment,
4113 pre-decrement, post-increment, or post-decrement addressing respectively.
4114 @end defmac
4115
4116 @defmac HAVE_PRE_MODIFY_DISP
4117 @defmacx HAVE_POST_MODIFY_DISP
4118 A C expression that is nonzero if the machine supports pre- or
4119 post-address side-effect generation involving constants other than
4120 the size of the memory operand.
4121 @end defmac
4122
4123 @defmac HAVE_PRE_MODIFY_REG
4124 @defmacx HAVE_POST_MODIFY_REG
4125 A C expression that is nonzero if the machine supports pre- or
4126 post-address side-effect generation involving a register displacement.
4127 @end defmac
4128
4129 @defmac CONSTANT_ADDRESS_P (@var{x})
4130 A C expression that is 1 if the RTX @var{x} is a constant which
4131 is a valid address. On most machines the default definition of
4132 @code{(CONSTANT_P (@var{x}) && GET_CODE (@var{x}) != CONST_DOUBLE)}
4133 is acceptable, but a few machines are more restrictive as to which
4134 constant addresses are supported.
4135 @end defmac
4136
4137 @defmac CONSTANT_P (@var{x})
4138 @code{CONSTANT_P}, which is defined by target-independent code,
4139 accepts integer-values expressions whose values are not explicitly
4140 known, such as @code{symbol_ref}, @code{label_ref}, and @code{high}
4141 expressions and @code{const} arithmetic expressions, in addition to
4142 @code{const_int} and @code{const_double} expressions.
4143 @end defmac
4144
4145 @defmac MAX_REGS_PER_ADDRESS
4146 A number, the maximum number of registers that can appear in a valid
4147 memory address. Note that it is up to you to specify a value equal to
4148 the maximum number that @code{TARGET_LEGITIMATE_ADDRESS_P} would ever
4149 accept.
4150 @end defmac
4151
4152 @hook TARGET_LEGITIMATE_ADDRESS_P
4153
4154 @defmac TARGET_MEM_CONSTRAINT
4155 A single character to be used instead of the default @code{'m'}
4156 character for general memory addresses. This defines the constraint
4157 letter which matches the memory addresses accepted by
4158 @code{TARGET_LEGITIMATE_ADDRESS_P}. Define this macro if you want to
4159 support new address formats in your back end without changing the
4160 semantics of the @code{'m'} constraint. This is necessary in order to
4161 preserve functionality of inline assembly constructs using the
4162 @code{'m'} constraint.
4163 @end defmac
4164
4165 @defmac FIND_BASE_TERM (@var{x})
4166 A C expression to determine the base term of address @var{x},
4167 or to provide a simplified version of @var{x} from which @file{alias.cc}
4168 can easily find the base term. This macro is used in only two places:
4169 @code{find_base_value} and @code{find_base_term} in @file{alias.cc}.
4170
4171 It is always safe for this macro to not be defined. It exists so
4172 that alias analysis can understand machine-dependent addresses.
4173
4174 The typical use of this macro is to handle addresses containing
4175 a label_ref or symbol_ref within an UNSPEC@.
4176 @end defmac
4177
4178 @hook TARGET_LEGITIMIZE_ADDRESS
4179
4180 @defmac LEGITIMIZE_RELOAD_ADDRESS (@var{x}, @var{mode}, @var{opnum}, @var{type}, @var{ind_levels}, @var{win})
4181 A C compound statement that attempts to replace @var{x}, which is an address
4182 that needs reloading, with a valid memory address for an operand of mode
4183 @var{mode}. @var{win} will be a C statement label elsewhere in the code.
4184 It is not necessary to define this macro, but it might be useful for
4185 performance reasons.
4186
4187 For example, on the i386, it is sometimes possible to use a single
4188 reload register instead of two by reloading a sum of two pseudo
4189 registers into a register. On the other hand, for number of RISC
4190 processors offsets are limited so that often an intermediate address
4191 needs to be generated in order to address a stack slot. By defining
4192 @code{LEGITIMIZE_RELOAD_ADDRESS} appropriately, the intermediate addresses
4193 generated for adjacent some stack slots can be made identical, and thus
4194 be shared.
4195
4196 @emph{Note}: This macro should be used with caution. It is necessary
4197 to know something of how reload works in order to effectively use this,
4198 and it is quite easy to produce macros that build in too much knowledge
4199 of reload internals.
4200
4201 @emph{Note}: This macro must be able to reload an address created by a
4202 previous invocation of this macro. If it fails to handle such addresses
4203 then the compiler may generate incorrect code or abort.
4204
4205 @findex push_reload
4206 The macro definition should use @code{push_reload} to indicate parts that
4207 need reloading; @var{opnum}, @var{type} and @var{ind_levels} are usually
4208 suitable to be passed unaltered to @code{push_reload}.
4209
4210 The code generated by this macro must not alter the substructure of
4211 @var{x}. If it transforms @var{x} into a more legitimate form, it
4212 should assign @var{x} (which will always be a C variable) a new value.
4213 This also applies to parts that you change indirectly by calling
4214 @code{push_reload}.
4215
4216 @findex strict_memory_address_p
4217 The macro definition may use @code{strict_memory_address_p} to test if
4218 the address has become legitimate.
4219
4220 @findex copy_rtx
4221 If you want to change only a part of @var{x}, one standard way of doing
4222 this is to use @code{copy_rtx}. Note, however, that it unshares only a
4223 single level of rtl. Thus, if the part to be changed is not at the
4224 top level, you'll need to replace first the top level.
4225 It is not necessary for this macro to come up with a legitimate
4226 address; but often a machine-dependent strategy can generate better code.
4227 @end defmac
4228
4229 @hook TARGET_MODE_DEPENDENT_ADDRESS_P
4230
4231 @hook TARGET_LEGITIMATE_CONSTANT_P
4232
4233 @hook TARGET_PRECOMPUTE_TLS_P
4234
4235 @hook TARGET_DELEGITIMIZE_ADDRESS
4236
4237 @hook TARGET_CONST_NOT_OK_FOR_DEBUG_P
4238
4239 @hook TARGET_CANNOT_FORCE_CONST_MEM
4240
4241 @hook TARGET_USE_BLOCKS_FOR_CONSTANT_P
4242
4243 @hook TARGET_USE_BLOCKS_FOR_DECL_P
4244
4245 @hook TARGET_BUILTIN_RECIPROCAL
4246
4247 @hook TARGET_VECTORIZE_BUILTIN_MASK_FOR_LOAD
4248
4249 @hook TARGET_VECTORIZE_BUILTIN_VECTORIZATION_COST
4250
4251 @hook TARGET_VECTORIZE_PREFERRED_VECTOR_ALIGNMENT
4252
4253 @hook TARGET_VECTORIZE_VECTOR_ALIGNMENT_REACHABLE
4254
4255 @hook TARGET_VECTORIZE_VEC_PERM_CONST
4256
4257 @hook TARGET_VECTORIZE_PREFERRED_DIV_AS_SHIFTS_OVER_MULT
4258
4259 @hook TARGET_VECTORIZE_BUILTIN_VECTORIZED_FUNCTION
4260
4261 @hook TARGET_VECTORIZE_BUILTIN_MD_VECTORIZED_FUNCTION
4262
4263 @hook TARGET_VECTORIZE_SUPPORT_VECTOR_MISALIGNMENT
4264
4265 @hook TARGET_VECTORIZE_PREFERRED_SIMD_MODE
4266
4267 @hook TARGET_VECTORIZE_SPLIT_REDUCTION
4268
4269 @hook TARGET_VECTORIZE_AUTOVECTORIZE_VECTOR_MODES
4270
4271 @hook TARGET_VECTORIZE_RELATED_MODE
4272
4273 @hook TARGET_VECTORIZE_GET_MASK_MODE
4274
4275 @hook TARGET_VECTORIZE_EMPTY_MASK_IS_EXPENSIVE
4276
4277 @hook TARGET_VECTORIZE_CREATE_COSTS
4278
4279 @hook TARGET_VECTORIZE_BUILTIN_GATHER
4280
4281 @hook TARGET_VECTORIZE_BUILTIN_SCATTER
4282
4283 @hook TARGET_SIMD_CLONE_COMPUTE_VECSIZE_AND_SIMDLEN
4284
4285 @hook TARGET_SIMD_CLONE_ADJUST
4286
4287 @hook TARGET_SIMD_CLONE_USABLE
4288
4289 @hook TARGET_SIMT_VF
4290
4291 @hook TARGET_OMP_DEVICE_KIND_ARCH_ISA
4292
4293 @hook TARGET_GOACC_VALIDATE_DIMS
4294
4295 @hook TARGET_GOACC_DIM_LIMIT
4296
4297 @hook TARGET_GOACC_FORK_JOIN
4298
4299 @hook TARGET_GOACC_REDUCTION
4300
4301 @hook TARGET_PREFERRED_ELSE_VALUE
4302
4303 @hook TARGET_GOACC_ADJUST_PRIVATE_DECL
4304
4305 @hook TARGET_GOACC_EXPAND_VAR_DECL
4306
4307 @hook TARGET_GOACC_CREATE_WORKER_BROADCAST_RECORD
4308
4309 @hook TARGET_GOACC_SHARED_MEM_LAYOUT
4310
4311 @node Anchored Addresses
4312 @section Anchored Addresses
4313 @cindex anchored addresses
4314 @cindex @option{-fsection-anchors}
4315
4316 GCC usually addresses every static object as a separate entity.
4317 For example, if we have:
4318
4319 @smallexample
4320 static int a, b, c;
4321 int foo (void) @{ return a + b + c; @}
4322 @end smallexample
4323
4324 the code for @code{foo} will usually calculate three separate symbolic
4325 addresses: those of @code{a}, @code{b} and @code{c}. On some targets,
4326 it would be better to calculate just one symbolic address and access
4327 the three variables relative to it. The equivalent pseudocode would
4328 be something like:
4329
4330 @smallexample
4331 int foo (void)
4332 @{
4333 register int *xr = &x;
4334 return xr[&a - &x] + xr[&b - &x] + xr[&c - &x];
4335 @}
4336 @end smallexample
4337
4338 (which isn't valid C). We refer to shared addresses like @code{x} as
4339 ``section anchors''. Their use is controlled by @option{-fsection-anchors}.
4340
4341 The hooks below describe the target properties that GCC needs to know
4342 in order to make effective use of section anchors. It won't use
4343 section anchors at all unless either @code{TARGET_MIN_ANCHOR_OFFSET}
4344 or @code{TARGET_MAX_ANCHOR_OFFSET} is set to a nonzero value.
4345
4346 @hook TARGET_MIN_ANCHOR_OFFSET
4347
4348 @hook TARGET_MAX_ANCHOR_OFFSET
4349
4350 @hook TARGET_ASM_OUTPUT_ANCHOR
4351
4352 @hook TARGET_USE_ANCHORS_FOR_SYMBOL_P
4353
4354 @node Condition Code
4355 @section Condition Code Status
4356 @cindex condition code status
4357
4358 Condition codes in GCC are represented as registers,
4359 which provides better schedulability for
4360 architectures that do have a condition code register, but on which
4361 most instructions do not affect it. The latter category includes
4362 most RISC machines.
4363
4364 Implicit clobbering would pose a strong restriction on the placement of
4365 the definition and use of the condition code. In the past the definition
4366 and use were always adjacent. However, recent changes to support trapping
4367 arithmetic may result in the definition and user being in different blocks.
4368 Thus, there may be a @code{NOTE_INSN_BASIC_BLOCK} between them. Additionally,
4369 the definition may be the source of exception handling edges.
4370
4371 These restrictions can prevent important
4372 optimizations on some machines. For example, on the IBM RS/6000, there
4373 is a delay for taken branches unless the condition code register is set
4374 three instructions earlier than the conditional branch. The instruction
4375 scheduler cannot perform this optimization if it is not permitted to
4376 separate the definition and use of the condition code register.
4377
4378 If there is a specific
4379 condition code register in the machine, use a hard register. If the
4380 condition code or comparison result can be placed in any general register,
4381 or if there are multiple condition registers, use a pseudo register.
4382 Registers used to store the condition code value will usually have a mode
4383 that is in class @code{MODE_CC}.
4384
4385 Alternatively, you can use @code{BImode} if the comparison operator is
4386 specified already in the compare instruction. In this case, you are not
4387 interested in most macros in this section.
4388
4389 @menu
4390 * MODE_CC Condition Codes:: Modern representation of condition codes.
4391 @end menu
4392
4393 @node MODE_CC Condition Codes
4394 @subsection Representation of condition codes using registers
4395 @findex CCmode
4396 @findex MODE_CC
4397
4398 @defmac SELECT_CC_MODE (@var{op}, @var{x}, @var{y})
4399 On many machines, the condition code may be produced by other instructions
4400 than compares, for example the branch can use directly the condition
4401 code set by a subtract instruction. However, on some machines
4402 when the condition code is set this way some bits (such as the overflow
4403 bit) are not set in the same way as a test instruction, so that a different
4404 branch instruction must be used for some conditional branches. When
4405 this happens, use the machine mode of the condition code register to
4406 record different formats of the condition code register. Modes can
4407 also be used to record which compare instruction (e.g.@: a signed or an
4408 unsigned comparison) produced the condition codes.
4409
4410 If other modes than @code{CCmode} are required, add them to
4411 @file{@var{machine}-modes.def} and define @code{SELECT_CC_MODE} to choose
4412 a mode given an operand of a compare. This is needed because the modes
4413 have to be chosen not only during RTL generation but also, for example,
4414 by instruction combination. The result of @code{SELECT_CC_MODE} should
4415 be consistent with the mode used in the patterns; for example to support
4416 the case of the add on the SPARC discussed above, we have the pattern
4417
4418 @smallexample
4419 (define_insn ""
4420 [(set (reg:CCNZ 0)
4421 (compare:CCNZ
4422 (plus:SI (match_operand:SI 0 "register_operand" "%r")
4423 (match_operand:SI 1 "arith_operand" "rI"))
4424 (const_int 0)))]
4425 ""
4426 "@dots{}")
4427 @end smallexample
4428
4429 @noindent
4430 together with a @code{SELECT_CC_MODE} that returns @code{CCNZmode}
4431 for comparisons whose argument is a @code{plus}:
4432
4433 @smallexample
4434 #define SELECT_CC_MODE(OP,X,Y) \
4435 (GET_MODE_CLASS (GET_MODE (X)) == MODE_FLOAT \
4436 ? ((OP == LT || OP == LE || OP == GT || OP == GE) \
4437 ? CCFPEmode : CCFPmode) \
4438 : ((GET_CODE (X) == PLUS || GET_CODE (X) == MINUS \
4439 || GET_CODE (X) == NEG || GET_CODE (x) == ASHIFT) \
4440 ? CCNZmode : CCmode))
4441 @end smallexample
4442
4443 Another reason to use modes is to retain information on which operands
4444 were used by the comparison; see @code{REVERSIBLE_CC_MODE} later in
4445 this section.
4446
4447 You should define this macro if and only if you define extra CC modes
4448 in @file{@var{machine}-modes.def}.
4449 @end defmac
4450
4451 @hook TARGET_CANONICALIZE_COMPARISON
4452
4453 @defmac REVERSIBLE_CC_MODE (@var{mode})
4454 A C expression whose value is one if it is always safe to reverse a
4455 comparison whose mode is @var{mode}. If @code{SELECT_CC_MODE}
4456 can ever return @var{mode} for a floating-point inequality comparison,
4457 then @code{REVERSIBLE_CC_MODE (@var{mode})} must be zero.
4458
4459 You need not define this macro if it would always returns zero or if the
4460 floating-point format is anything other than @code{IEEE_FLOAT_FORMAT}.
4461 For example, here is the definition used on the SPARC, where floating-point
4462 inequality comparisons are given either @code{CCFPEmode} or @code{CCFPmode}:
4463
4464 @smallexample
4465 #define REVERSIBLE_CC_MODE(MODE) \
4466 ((MODE) != CCFPEmode && (MODE) != CCFPmode)
4467 @end smallexample
4468 @end defmac
4469
4470 @defmac REVERSE_CONDITION (@var{code}, @var{mode})
4471 A C expression whose value is reversed condition code of the @var{code} for
4472 comparison done in CC_MODE @var{mode}. The macro is used only in case
4473 @code{REVERSIBLE_CC_MODE (@var{mode})} is nonzero. Define this macro in case
4474 machine has some non-standard way how to reverse certain conditionals. For
4475 instance in case all floating point conditions are non-trapping, compiler may
4476 freely convert unordered compares to ordered ones. Then definition may look
4477 like:
4478
4479 @smallexample
4480 #define REVERSE_CONDITION(CODE, MODE) \
4481 ((MODE) != CCFPmode ? reverse_condition (CODE) \
4482 : reverse_condition_maybe_unordered (CODE))
4483 @end smallexample
4484 @end defmac
4485
4486 @hook TARGET_FIXED_CONDITION_CODE_REGS
4487
4488 @hook TARGET_CC_MODES_COMPATIBLE
4489
4490 @hook TARGET_FLAGS_REGNUM
4491
4492 @node Costs
4493 @section Describing Relative Costs of Operations
4494 @cindex costs of instructions
4495 @cindex relative costs
4496 @cindex speed of instructions
4497
4498 These macros let you describe the relative speed of various operations
4499 on the target machine.
4500
4501 @defmac REGISTER_MOVE_COST (@var{mode}, @var{from}, @var{to})
4502 A C expression for the cost of moving data of mode @var{mode} from a
4503 register in class @var{from} to one in class @var{to}. The classes are
4504 expressed using the enumeration values such as @code{GENERAL_REGS}. A
4505 value of 2 is the default; other values are interpreted relative to
4506 that.
4507
4508 It is not required that the cost always equal 2 when @var{from} is the
4509 same as @var{to}; on some machines it is expensive to move between
4510 registers if they are not general registers.
4511
4512 If reload sees an insn consisting of a single @code{set} between two
4513 hard registers, and if @code{REGISTER_MOVE_COST} applied to their
4514 classes returns a value of 2, reload does not check to ensure that the
4515 constraints of the insn are met. Setting a cost of other than 2 will
4516 allow reload to verify that the constraints are met. You should do this
4517 if the @samp{mov@var{m}} pattern's constraints do not allow such copying.
4518
4519 These macros are obsolete, new ports should use the target hook
4520 @code{TARGET_REGISTER_MOVE_COST} instead.
4521 @end defmac
4522
4523 @hook TARGET_REGISTER_MOVE_COST
4524
4525 @defmac MEMORY_MOVE_COST (@var{mode}, @var{class}, @var{in})
4526 A C expression for the cost of moving data of mode @var{mode} between a
4527 register of class @var{class} and memory; @var{in} is zero if the value
4528 is to be written to memory, nonzero if it is to be read in. This cost
4529 is relative to those in @code{REGISTER_MOVE_COST}. If moving between
4530 registers and memory is more expensive than between two registers, you
4531 should define this macro to express the relative cost.
4532
4533 If you do not define this macro, GCC uses a default cost of 4 plus
4534 the cost of copying via a secondary reload register, if one is
4535 needed. If your machine requires a secondary reload register to copy
4536 between memory and a register of @var{class} but the reload mechanism is
4537 more complex than copying via an intermediate, define this macro to
4538 reflect the actual cost of the move.
4539
4540 GCC defines the function @code{memory_move_secondary_cost} if
4541 secondary reloads are needed. It computes the costs due to copying via
4542 a secondary register. If your machine copies from memory using a
4543 secondary register in the conventional way but the default base value of
4544 4 is not correct for your machine, define this macro to add some other
4545 value to the result of that function. The arguments to that function
4546 are the same as to this macro.
4547
4548 These macros are obsolete, new ports should use the target hook
4549 @code{TARGET_MEMORY_MOVE_COST} instead.
4550 @end defmac
4551
4552 @hook TARGET_MEMORY_MOVE_COST
4553
4554 @defmac BRANCH_COST (@var{speed_p}, @var{predictable_p})
4555 A C expression for the cost of a branch instruction. A value of 1 is
4556 the default; other values are interpreted relative to that. Parameter
4557 @var{speed_p} is true when the branch in question should be optimized
4558 for speed. When it is false, @code{BRANCH_COST} should return a value
4559 optimal for code size rather than performance. @var{predictable_p} is
4560 true for well-predicted branches. On many architectures the
4561 @code{BRANCH_COST} can be reduced then.
4562 @end defmac
4563
4564 Here are additional macros which do not specify precise relative costs,
4565 but only that certain actions are more expensive than GCC would
4566 ordinarily expect.
4567
4568 @defmac SLOW_BYTE_ACCESS
4569 Define this macro as a C expression which is nonzero if accessing less
4570 than a word of memory (i.e.@: a @code{char} or a @code{short}) is no
4571 faster than accessing a word of memory, i.e., if such access
4572 require more than one instruction or if there is no difference in cost
4573 between byte and (aligned) word loads.
4574
4575 When this macro is not defined, the compiler will access a field by
4576 finding the smallest containing object; when it is defined, a fullword
4577 load will be used if alignment permits. Unless bytes accesses are
4578 faster than word accesses, using word accesses is preferable since it
4579 may eliminate subsequent memory access if subsequent accesses occur to
4580 other fields in the same word of the structure, but to different bytes.
4581 @end defmac
4582
4583 @hook TARGET_SLOW_UNALIGNED_ACCESS
4584
4585 @defmac MOVE_RATIO (@var{speed})
4586 The threshold of number of scalar memory-to-memory move insns, @emph{below}
4587 which a sequence of insns should be generated instead of a
4588 string move insn or a library call. Increasing the value will always
4589 make code faster, but eventually incurs high cost in increased code size.
4590
4591 Note that on machines where the corresponding move insn is a
4592 @code{define_expand} that emits a sequence of insns, this macro counts
4593 the number of such sequences.
4594
4595 The parameter @var{speed} is true if the code is currently being
4596 optimized for speed rather than size.
4597
4598 If you don't define this, a reasonable default is used.
4599 @end defmac
4600
4601 @hook TARGET_USE_BY_PIECES_INFRASTRUCTURE_P
4602
4603 @hook TARGET_OVERLAP_OP_BY_PIECES_P
4604
4605 @hook TARGET_COMPARE_BY_PIECES_BRANCH_RATIO
4606
4607 @defmac MOVE_MAX_PIECES
4608 A C expression used by @code{move_by_pieces} to determine the largest unit
4609 a load or store used to copy memory is. Defaults to @code{MOVE_MAX}.
4610 @end defmac
4611
4612 @defmac STORE_MAX_PIECES
4613 A C expression used by @code{store_by_pieces} to determine the largest unit
4614 a store used to memory is. Defaults to @code{MOVE_MAX_PIECES}, or two times
4615 the size of @code{HOST_WIDE_INT}, whichever is smaller.
4616 @end defmac
4617
4618 @defmac COMPARE_MAX_PIECES
4619 A C expression used by @code{compare_by_pieces} to determine the largest unit
4620 a load or store used to compare memory is. Defaults to
4621 @code{MOVE_MAX_PIECES}.
4622 @end defmac
4623
4624 @defmac CLEAR_RATIO (@var{speed})
4625 The threshold of number of scalar move insns, @emph{below} which a sequence
4626 of insns should be generated to clear memory instead of a string clear insn
4627 or a library call. Increasing the value will always make code faster, but
4628 eventually incurs high cost in increased code size.
4629
4630 The parameter @var{speed} is true if the code is currently being
4631 optimized for speed rather than size.
4632
4633 If you don't define this, a reasonable default is used.
4634 @end defmac
4635
4636 @defmac SET_RATIO (@var{speed})
4637 The threshold of number of scalar move insns, @emph{below} which a sequence
4638 of insns should be generated to set memory to a constant value, instead of
4639 a block set insn or a library call.
4640 Increasing the value will always make code faster, but
4641 eventually incurs high cost in increased code size.
4642
4643 The parameter @var{speed} is true if the code is currently being
4644 optimized for speed rather than size.
4645
4646 If you don't define this, it defaults to the value of @code{MOVE_RATIO}.
4647 @end defmac
4648
4649 @defmac USE_LOAD_POST_INCREMENT (@var{mode})
4650 A C expression used to determine whether a load postincrement is a good
4651 thing to use for a given mode. Defaults to the value of
4652 @code{HAVE_POST_INCREMENT}.
4653 @end defmac
4654
4655 @defmac USE_LOAD_POST_DECREMENT (@var{mode})
4656 A C expression used to determine whether a load postdecrement is a good
4657 thing to use for a given mode. Defaults to the value of
4658 @code{HAVE_POST_DECREMENT}.
4659 @end defmac
4660
4661 @defmac USE_LOAD_PRE_INCREMENT (@var{mode})
4662 A C expression used to determine whether a load preincrement is a good
4663 thing to use for a given mode. Defaults to the value of
4664 @code{HAVE_PRE_INCREMENT}.
4665 @end defmac
4666
4667 @defmac USE_LOAD_PRE_DECREMENT (@var{mode})
4668 A C expression used to determine whether a load predecrement is a good
4669 thing to use for a given mode. Defaults to the value of
4670 @code{HAVE_PRE_DECREMENT}.
4671 @end defmac
4672
4673 @defmac USE_STORE_POST_INCREMENT (@var{mode})
4674 A C expression used to determine whether a store postincrement is a good
4675 thing to use for a given mode. Defaults to the value of
4676 @code{HAVE_POST_INCREMENT}.
4677 @end defmac
4678
4679 @defmac USE_STORE_POST_DECREMENT (@var{mode})
4680 A C expression used to determine whether a store postdecrement is a good
4681 thing to use for a given mode. Defaults to the value of
4682 @code{HAVE_POST_DECREMENT}.
4683 @end defmac
4684
4685 @defmac USE_STORE_PRE_INCREMENT (@var{mode})
4686 This macro is used to determine whether a store preincrement is a good
4687 thing to use for a given mode. Defaults to the value of
4688 @code{HAVE_PRE_INCREMENT}.
4689 @end defmac
4690
4691 @defmac USE_STORE_PRE_DECREMENT (@var{mode})
4692 This macro is used to determine whether a store predecrement is a good
4693 thing to use for a given mode. Defaults to the value of
4694 @code{HAVE_PRE_DECREMENT}.
4695 @end defmac
4696
4697 @defmac NO_FUNCTION_CSE
4698 Define this macro to be true if it is as good or better to call a constant
4699 function address than to call an address kept in a register.
4700 @end defmac
4701
4702 @defmac LOGICAL_OP_NON_SHORT_CIRCUIT
4703 Define this macro if a non-short-circuit operation produced by
4704 @samp{fold_range_test ()} is optimal. This macro defaults to true if
4705 @code{BRANCH_COST} is greater than or equal to the value 2.
4706 @end defmac
4707
4708 @hook TARGET_OPTAB_SUPPORTED_P
4709
4710 @hook TARGET_RTX_COSTS
4711
4712 @hook TARGET_ADDRESS_COST
4713
4714 @hook TARGET_INSN_COST
4715
4716 @hook TARGET_MAX_NOCE_IFCVT_SEQ_COST
4717
4718 @hook TARGET_NOCE_CONVERSION_PROFITABLE_P
4719
4720 @hook TARGET_NEW_ADDRESS_PROFITABLE_P
4721
4722 @hook TARGET_NO_SPECULATION_IN_DELAY_SLOTS_P
4723
4724 @hook TARGET_ESTIMATED_POLY_VALUE
4725
4726 @node Scheduling
4727 @section Adjusting the Instruction Scheduler
4728
4729 The instruction scheduler may need a fair amount of machine-specific
4730 adjustment in order to produce good code. GCC provides several target
4731 hooks for this purpose. It is usually enough to define just a few of
4732 them: try the first ones in this list first.
4733
4734 @hook TARGET_SCHED_ISSUE_RATE
4735
4736 @hook TARGET_SCHED_VARIABLE_ISSUE
4737
4738 @hook TARGET_SCHED_ADJUST_COST
4739
4740 @hook TARGET_SCHED_ADJUST_PRIORITY
4741
4742 @hook TARGET_SCHED_REORDER
4743
4744 @hook TARGET_SCHED_REORDER2
4745
4746 @hook TARGET_SCHED_MACRO_FUSION_P
4747
4748 @hook TARGET_SCHED_MACRO_FUSION_PAIR_P
4749
4750 @hook TARGET_SCHED_DEPENDENCIES_EVALUATION_HOOK
4751
4752 @hook TARGET_SCHED_INIT
4753
4754 @hook TARGET_SCHED_FINISH
4755
4756 @hook TARGET_SCHED_INIT_GLOBAL
4757
4758 @hook TARGET_SCHED_FINISH_GLOBAL
4759
4760 @hook TARGET_SCHED_DFA_PRE_CYCLE_INSN
4761
4762 @hook TARGET_SCHED_INIT_DFA_PRE_CYCLE_INSN
4763
4764 @hook TARGET_SCHED_DFA_POST_CYCLE_INSN
4765
4766 @hook TARGET_SCHED_INIT_DFA_POST_CYCLE_INSN
4767
4768 @hook TARGET_SCHED_DFA_PRE_ADVANCE_CYCLE
4769
4770 @hook TARGET_SCHED_DFA_POST_ADVANCE_CYCLE
4771
4772 @hook TARGET_SCHED_FIRST_CYCLE_MULTIPASS_DFA_LOOKAHEAD
4773
4774 @hook TARGET_SCHED_FIRST_CYCLE_MULTIPASS_DFA_LOOKAHEAD_GUARD
4775
4776 @hook TARGET_SCHED_FIRST_CYCLE_MULTIPASS_BEGIN
4777
4778 @hook TARGET_SCHED_FIRST_CYCLE_MULTIPASS_ISSUE
4779
4780 @hook TARGET_SCHED_FIRST_CYCLE_MULTIPASS_BACKTRACK
4781
4782 @hook TARGET_SCHED_FIRST_CYCLE_MULTIPASS_END
4783
4784 @hook TARGET_SCHED_FIRST_CYCLE_MULTIPASS_INIT
4785
4786 @hook TARGET_SCHED_FIRST_CYCLE_MULTIPASS_FINI
4787
4788 @hook TARGET_SCHED_DFA_NEW_CYCLE
4789
4790 @hook TARGET_SCHED_IS_COSTLY_DEPENDENCE
4791
4792 @hook TARGET_SCHED_H_I_D_EXTENDED
4793
4794 @hook TARGET_SCHED_ALLOC_SCHED_CONTEXT
4795
4796 @hook TARGET_SCHED_INIT_SCHED_CONTEXT
4797
4798 @hook TARGET_SCHED_SET_SCHED_CONTEXT
4799
4800 @hook TARGET_SCHED_CLEAR_SCHED_CONTEXT
4801
4802 @hook TARGET_SCHED_FREE_SCHED_CONTEXT
4803
4804 @hook TARGET_SCHED_SPECULATE_INSN
4805
4806 @hook TARGET_SCHED_NEEDS_BLOCK_P
4807
4808 @hook TARGET_SCHED_GEN_SPEC_CHECK
4809
4810 @hook TARGET_SCHED_SET_SCHED_FLAGS
4811
4812 @hook TARGET_SCHED_CAN_SPECULATE_INSN
4813
4814 @hook TARGET_SCHED_SMS_RES_MII
4815
4816 @hook TARGET_SCHED_DISPATCH
4817
4818 @hook TARGET_SCHED_DISPATCH_DO
4819
4820 @hook TARGET_SCHED_EXPOSED_PIPELINE
4821
4822 @hook TARGET_SCHED_REASSOCIATION_WIDTH
4823
4824 @hook TARGET_SCHED_FUSION_PRIORITY
4825
4826 @hook TARGET_EXPAND_DIVMOD_LIBFUNC
4827
4828 @node Sections
4829 @section Dividing the Output into Sections (Texts, Data, @dots{})
4830 @c the above section title is WAY too long. maybe cut the part between
4831 @c the (...)? --mew 10feb93
4832
4833 An object file is divided into sections containing different types of
4834 data. In the most common case, there are three sections: the @dfn{text
4835 section}, which holds instructions and read-only data; the @dfn{data
4836 section}, which holds initialized writable data; and the @dfn{bss
4837 section}, which holds uninitialized data. Some systems have other kinds
4838 of sections.
4839
4840 @file{varasm.cc} provides several well-known sections, such as
4841 @code{text_section}, @code{data_section} and @code{bss_section}.
4842 The normal way of controlling a @code{@var{foo}_section} variable
4843 is to define the associated @code{@var{FOO}_SECTION_ASM_OP} macro,
4844 as described below. The macros are only read once, when @file{varasm.cc}
4845 initializes itself, so their values must be run-time constants.
4846 They may however depend on command-line flags.
4847
4848 @emph{Note:} Some run-time files, such @file{crtstuff.c}, also make
4849 use of the @code{@var{FOO}_SECTION_ASM_OP} macros, and expect them
4850 to be string literals.
4851
4852 Some assemblers require a different string to be written every time a
4853 section is selected. If your assembler falls into this category, you
4854 should define the @code{TARGET_ASM_INIT_SECTIONS} hook and use
4855 @code{get_unnamed_section} to set up the sections.
4856
4857 You must always create a @code{text_section}, either by defining
4858 @code{TEXT_SECTION_ASM_OP} or by initializing @code{text_section}
4859 in @code{TARGET_ASM_INIT_SECTIONS}. The same is true of
4860 @code{data_section} and @code{DATA_SECTION_ASM_OP}. If you do not
4861 create a distinct @code{readonly_data_section}, the default is to
4862 reuse @code{text_section}.
4863
4864 All the other @file{varasm.cc} sections are optional, and are null
4865 if the target does not provide them.
4866
4867 @defmac TEXT_SECTION_ASM_OP
4868 A C expression whose value is a string, including spacing, containing the
4869 assembler operation that should precede instructions and read-only data.
4870 Normally @code{"\t.text"} is right.
4871 @end defmac
4872
4873 @defmac HOT_TEXT_SECTION_NAME
4874 If defined, a C string constant for the name of the section containing most
4875 frequently executed functions of the program. If not defined, GCC will provide
4876 a default definition if the target supports named sections.
4877 @end defmac
4878
4879 @defmac UNLIKELY_EXECUTED_TEXT_SECTION_NAME
4880 If defined, a C string constant for the name of the section containing unlikely
4881 executed functions in the program.
4882 @end defmac
4883
4884 @defmac DATA_SECTION_ASM_OP
4885 A C expression whose value is a string, including spacing, containing the
4886 assembler operation to identify the following data as writable initialized
4887 data. Normally @code{"\t.data"} is right.
4888 @end defmac
4889
4890 @defmac SDATA_SECTION_ASM_OP
4891 If defined, a C expression whose value is a string, including spacing,
4892 containing the assembler operation to identify the following data as
4893 initialized, writable small data.
4894 @end defmac
4895
4896 @defmac READONLY_DATA_SECTION_ASM_OP
4897 A C expression whose value is a string, including spacing, containing the
4898 assembler operation to identify the following data as read-only initialized
4899 data.
4900 @end defmac
4901
4902 @defmac BSS_SECTION_ASM_OP
4903 If defined, a C expression whose value is a string, including spacing,
4904 containing the assembler operation to identify the following data as
4905 uninitialized global data. If not defined, and
4906 @code{ASM_OUTPUT_ALIGNED_BSS} not defined,
4907 uninitialized global data will be output in the data section if
4908 @option{-fno-common} is passed, otherwise @code{ASM_OUTPUT_COMMON} will be
4909 used.
4910 @end defmac
4911
4912 @defmac SBSS_SECTION_ASM_OP
4913 If defined, a C expression whose value is a string, including spacing,
4914 containing the assembler operation to identify the following data as
4915 uninitialized, writable small data.
4916 @end defmac
4917
4918 @defmac TLS_COMMON_ASM_OP
4919 If defined, a C expression whose value is a string containing the
4920 assembler operation to identify the following data as thread-local
4921 common data. The default is @code{".tls_common"}.
4922 @end defmac
4923
4924 @defmac TLS_SECTION_ASM_FLAG
4925 If defined, a C expression whose value is a character constant
4926 containing the flag used to mark a section as a TLS section. The
4927 default is @code{'T'}.
4928 @end defmac
4929
4930 @defmac INIT_SECTION_ASM_OP
4931 If defined, a C expression whose value is a string, including spacing,
4932 containing the assembler operation to identify the following data as
4933 initialization code. If not defined, GCC will assume such a section does
4934 not exist. This section has no corresponding @code{init_section}
4935 variable; it is used entirely in runtime code.
4936 @end defmac
4937
4938 @defmac FINI_SECTION_ASM_OP
4939 If defined, a C expression whose value is a string, including spacing,
4940 containing the assembler operation to identify the following data as
4941 finalization code. If not defined, GCC will assume such a section does
4942 not exist. This section has no corresponding @code{fini_section}
4943 variable; it is used entirely in runtime code.
4944 @end defmac
4945
4946 @defmac INIT_ARRAY_SECTION_ASM_OP
4947 If defined, a C expression whose value is a string, including spacing,
4948 containing the assembler operation to identify the following data as
4949 part of the @code{.init_array} (or equivalent) section. If not
4950 defined, GCC will assume such a section does not exist. Do not define
4951 both this macro and @code{INIT_SECTION_ASM_OP}.
4952 @end defmac
4953
4954 @defmac FINI_ARRAY_SECTION_ASM_OP
4955 If defined, a C expression whose value is a string, including spacing,
4956 containing the assembler operation to identify the following data as
4957 part of the @code{.fini_array} (or equivalent) section. If not
4958 defined, GCC will assume such a section does not exist. Do not define
4959 both this macro and @code{FINI_SECTION_ASM_OP}.
4960 @end defmac
4961
4962 @defmac MACH_DEP_SECTION_ASM_FLAG
4963 If defined, a C expression whose value is a character constant
4964 containing the flag used to mark a machine-dependent section. This
4965 corresponds to the @code{SECTION_MACH_DEP} section flag.
4966 @end defmac
4967
4968 @defmac CRT_CALL_STATIC_FUNCTION (@var{section_op}, @var{function})
4969 If defined, an ASM statement that switches to a different section
4970 via @var{section_op}, calls @var{function}, and switches back to
4971 the text section. This is used in @file{crtstuff.c} if
4972 @code{INIT_SECTION_ASM_OP} or @code{FINI_SECTION_ASM_OP} to calls
4973 to initialization and finalization functions from the init and fini
4974 sections. By default, this macro uses a simple function call. Some
4975 ports need hand-crafted assembly code to avoid dependencies on
4976 registers initialized in the function prologue or to ensure that
4977 constant pools don't end up too far way in the text section.
4978 @end defmac
4979
4980 @defmac TARGET_LIBGCC_SDATA_SECTION
4981 If defined, a string which names the section into which small
4982 variables defined in crtstuff and libgcc should go. This is useful
4983 when the target has options for optimizing access to small data, and
4984 you want the crtstuff and libgcc routines to be conservative in what
4985 they expect of your application yet liberal in what your application
4986 expects. For example, for targets with a @code{.sdata} section (like
4987 MIPS), you could compile crtstuff with @code{-G 0} so that it doesn't
4988 require small data support from your application, but use this macro
4989 to put small data into @code{.sdata} so that your application can
4990 access these variables whether it uses small data or not.
4991 @end defmac
4992
4993 @defmac FORCE_CODE_SECTION_ALIGN
4994 If defined, an ASM statement that aligns a code section to some
4995 arbitrary boundary. This is used to force all fragments of the
4996 @code{.init} and @code{.fini} sections to have to same alignment
4997 and thus prevent the linker from having to add any padding.
4998 @end defmac
4999
5000 @defmac JUMP_TABLES_IN_TEXT_SECTION
5001 Define this macro to be an expression with a nonzero value if jump
5002 tables (for @code{tablejump} insns) should be output in the text
5003 section, along with the assembler instructions. Otherwise, the
5004 readonly data section is used.
5005
5006 This macro is irrelevant if there is no separate readonly data section.
5007 @end defmac
5008
5009 @hook TARGET_ASM_INIT_SECTIONS
5010
5011 @hook TARGET_ASM_RELOC_RW_MASK
5012
5013 @hook TARGET_ASM_GENERATE_PIC_ADDR_DIFF_VEC
5014
5015 @hook TARGET_ASM_SELECT_SECTION
5016
5017 @defmac USE_SELECT_SECTION_FOR_FUNCTIONS
5018 Define this macro if you wish TARGET_ASM_SELECT_SECTION to be called
5019 for @code{FUNCTION_DECL}s as well as for variables and constants.
5020
5021 In the case of a @code{FUNCTION_DECL}, @var{reloc} will be zero if the
5022 function has been determined to be likely to be called, and nonzero if
5023 it is unlikely to be called.
5024 @end defmac
5025
5026 @hook TARGET_ASM_UNIQUE_SECTION
5027
5028 @hook TARGET_ASM_FUNCTION_RODATA_SECTION
5029
5030 @hook TARGET_ASM_MERGEABLE_RODATA_PREFIX
5031
5032 @hook TARGET_ASM_TM_CLONE_TABLE_SECTION
5033
5034 @hook TARGET_ASM_SELECT_RTX_SECTION
5035
5036 @hook TARGET_MANGLE_DECL_ASSEMBLER_NAME
5037
5038 @hook TARGET_ENCODE_SECTION_INFO
5039
5040 @hook TARGET_STRIP_NAME_ENCODING
5041
5042 @hook TARGET_IN_SMALL_DATA_P
5043
5044 @hook TARGET_HAVE_SRODATA_SECTION
5045
5046 @hook TARGET_PROFILE_BEFORE_PROLOGUE
5047
5048 @hook TARGET_BINDS_LOCAL_P
5049
5050 @hook TARGET_HAVE_TLS
5051
5052
5053 @node PIC
5054 @section Position Independent Code
5055 @cindex position independent code
5056 @cindex PIC
5057
5058 This section describes macros that help implement generation of position
5059 independent code. Simply defining these macros is not enough to
5060 generate valid PIC; you must also add support to the hook
5061 @code{TARGET_LEGITIMATE_ADDRESS_P} and to the macro
5062 @code{PRINT_OPERAND_ADDRESS}, as well as @code{LEGITIMIZE_ADDRESS}. You
5063 must modify the definition of @samp{movsi} to do something appropriate
5064 when the source operand contains a symbolic address. You may also
5065 need to alter the handling of switch statements so that they use
5066 relative addresses.
5067 @c i rearranged the order of the macros above to try to force one of
5068 @c them to the next line, to eliminate an overfull hbox. --mew 10feb93
5069
5070 @defmac PIC_OFFSET_TABLE_REGNUM
5071 The register number of the register used to address a table of static
5072 data addresses in memory. In some cases this register is defined by a
5073 processor's ``application binary interface'' (ABI)@. When this macro
5074 is defined, RTL is generated for this register once, as with the stack
5075 pointer and frame pointer registers. If this macro is not defined, it
5076 is up to the machine-dependent files to allocate such a register (if
5077 necessary). Note that this register must be fixed when in use (e.g.@:
5078 when @code{flag_pic} is true).
5079 @end defmac
5080
5081 @defmac PIC_OFFSET_TABLE_REG_CALL_CLOBBERED
5082 A C expression that is nonzero if the register defined by
5083 @code{PIC_OFFSET_TABLE_REGNUM} is clobbered by calls. If not defined,
5084 the default is zero. Do not define
5085 this macro if @code{PIC_OFFSET_TABLE_REGNUM} is not defined.
5086 @end defmac
5087
5088 @defmac LEGITIMATE_PIC_OPERAND_P (@var{x})
5089 A C expression that is nonzero if @var{x} is a legitimate immediate
5090 operand on the target machine when generating position independent code.
5091 You can assume that @var{x} satisfies @code{CONSTANT_P}, so you need not
5092 check this. You can also assume @var{flag_pic} is true, so you need not
5093 check it either. You need not define this macro if all constants
5094 (including @code{SYMBOL_REF}) can be immediate operands when generating
5095 position independent code.
5096 @end defmac
5097
5098 @node Assembler Format
5099 @section Defining the Output Assembler Language
5100
5101 This section describes macros whose principal purpose is to describe how
5102 to write instructions in assembler language---rather than what the
5103 instructions do.
5104
5105 @menu
5106 * File Framework:: Structural information for the assembler file.
5107 * Data Output:: Output of constants (numbers, strings, addresses).
5108 * Uninitialized Data:: Output of uninitialized variables.
5109 * Label Output:: Output and generation of labels.
5110 * Initialization:: General principles of initialization
5111 and termination routines.
5112 * Macros for Initialization::
5113 Specific macros that control the handling of
5114 initialization and termination routines.
5115 * Instruction Output:: Output of actual instructions.
5116 * Dispatch Tables:: Output of jump tables.
5117 * Exception Region Output:: Output of exception region code.
5118 * Alignment Output:: Pseudo ops for alignment and skipping data.
5119 @end menu
5120
5121 @node File Framework
5122 @subsection The Overall Framework of an Assembler File
5123 @cindex assembler format
5124 @cindex output of assembler code
5125
5126 @c prevent bad page break with this line
5127 This describes the overall framework of an assembly file.
5128
5129 @findex default_file_start
5130 @hook TARGET_ASM_FILE_START
5131
5132 @hook TARGET_ASM_FILE_START_APP_OFF
5133
5134 @hook TARGET_ASM_FILE_START_FILE_DIRECTIVE
5135
5136 @hook TARGET_ASM_FILE_END
5137
5138 @deftypefun void file_end_indicate_exec_stack ()
5139 Some systems use a common convention, the @samp{.note.GNU-stack}
5140 special section, to indicate whether or not an object file relies on
5141 the stack being executable. If your system uses this convention, you
5142 should define @code{TARGET_ASM_FILE_END} to this function. If you
5143 need to do other things in that hook, have your hook function call
5144 this function.
5145 @end deftypefun
5146
5147 @hook TARGET_ASM_LTO_START
5148
5149 @hook TARGET_ASM_LTO_END
5150
5151 @hook TARGET_ASM_CODE_END
5152
5153 @defmac ASM_COMMENT_START
5154 A C string constant describing how to begin a comment in the target
5155 assembler language. The compiler assumes that the comment will end at
5156 the end of the line.
5157 @end defmac
5158
5159 @defmac ASM_APP_ON
5160 A C string constant for text to be output before each @code{asm}
5161 statement or group of consecutive ones. Normally this is
5162 @code{"#APP"}, which is a comment that has no effect on most
5163 assemblers but tells the GNU assembler that it must check the lines
5164 that follow for all valid assembler constructs.
5165 @end defmac
5166
5167 @defmac ASM_APP_OFF
5168 A C string constant for text to be output after each @code{asm}
5169 statement or group of consecutive ones. Normally this is
5170 @code{"#NO_APP"}, which tells the GNU assembler to resume making the
5171 time-saving assumptions that are valid for ordinary compiler output.
5172 @end defmac
5173
5174 @defmac ASM_OUTPUT_SOURCE_FILENAME (@var{stream}, @var{name})
5175 A C statement to output COFF information or DWARF debugging information
5176 which indicates that filename @var{name} is the current source file to
5177 the stdio stream @var{stream}.
5178
5179 This macro need not be defined if the standard form of output
5180 for the file format in use is appropriate.
5181 @end defmac
5182
5183 @hook TARGET_ASM_OUTPUT_SOURCE_FILENAME
5184
5185 @hook TARGET_ASM_OUTPUT_IDENT
5186
5187 @defmac OUTPUT_QUOTED_STRING (@var{stream}, @var{string})
5188 A C statement to output the string @var{string} to the stdio stream
5189 @var{stream}. If you do not call the function @code{output_quoted_string}
5190 in your config files, GCC will only call it to output filenames to
5191 the assembler source. So you can use it to canonicalize the format
5192 of the filename using this macro.
5193 @end defmac
5194
5195 @hook TARGET_ASM_NAMED_SECTION
5196
5197 @hook TARGET_ASM_ELF_FLAGS_NUMERIC
5198
5199 @hook TARGET_ASM_FUNCTION_SECTION
5200
5201 @hook TARGET_ASM_FUNCTION_SWITCHED_TEXT_SECTIONS
5202
5203 @hook TARGET_HAVE_NAMED_SECTIONS
5204 This flag is true if the target supports @code{TARGET_ASM_NAMED_SECTION}.
5205 It must not be modified by command-line option processing.
5206 @end deftypevr
5207
5208 @anchor{TARGET_HAVE_SWITCHABLE_BSS_SECTIONS}
5209 @hook TARGET_HAVE_SWITCHABLE_BSS_SECTIONS
5210
5211 @hook TARGET_SECTION_TYPE_FLAGS
5212
5213 @hook TARGET_ASM_RECORD_GCC_SWITCHES
5214
5215 @hook TARGET_ASM_RECORD_GCC_SWITCHES_SECTION
5216
5217 @need 2000
5218 @node Data Output
5219 @subsection Output of Data
5220
5221
5222 @hook TARGET_ASM_BYTE_OP
5223
5224 @hook TARGET_ASM_INTEGER
5225
5226 @hook TARGET_ASM_DECL_END
5227
5228 @hook TARGET_ASM_OUTPUT_ADDR_CONST_EXTRA
5229
5230 @defmac ASM_OUTPUT_ASCII (@var{stream}, @var{ptr}, @var{len})
5231 A C statement to output to the stdio stream @var{stream} an assembler
5232 instruction to assemble a string constant containing the @var{len}
5233 bytes at @var{ptr}. @var{ptr} will be a C expression of type
5234 @code{char *} and @var{len} a C expression of type @code{int}.
5235
5236 If the assembler has a @code{.ascii} pseudo-op as found in the
5237 Berkeley Unix assembler, do not define the macro
5238 @code{ASM_OUTPUT_ASCII}.
5239 @end defmac
5240
5241 @defmac ASM_OUTPUT_FDESC (@var{stream}, @var{decl}, @var{n})
5242 A C statement to output word @var{n} of a function descriptor for
5243 @var{decl}. This must be defined if @code{TARGET_VTABLE_USES_DESCRIPTORS}
5244 is defined, and is otherwise unused.
5245 @end defmac
5246
5247 @defmac CONSTANT_POOL_BEFORE_FUNCTION
5248 You may define this macro as a C expression. You should define the
5249 expression to have a nonzero value if GCC should output the constant
5250 pool for a function before the code for the function, or a zero value if
5251 GCC should output the constant pool after the function. If you do
5252 not define this macro, the usual case, GCC will output the constant
5253 pool before the function.
5254 @end defmac
5255
5256 @defmac ASM_OUTPUT_POOL_PROLOGUE (@var{file}, @var{funname}, @var{fundecl}, @var{size})
5257 A C statement to output assembler commands to define the start of the
5258 constant pool for a function. @var{funname} is a string giving
5259 the name of the function. Should the return type of the function
5260 be required, it can be obtained via @var{fundecl}. @var{size}
5261 is the size, in bytes, of the constant pool that will be written
5262 immediately after this call.
5263
5264 If no constant-pool prefix is required, the usual case, this macro need
5265 not be defined.
5266 @end defmac
5267
5268 @defmac ASM_OUTPUT_SPECIAL_POOL_ENTRY (@var{file}, @var{x}, @var{mode}, @var{align}, @var{labelno}, @var{jumpto})
5269 A C statement (with or without semicolon) to output a constant in the
5270 constant pool, if it needs special treatment. (This macro need not do
5271 anything for RTL expressions that can be output normally.)
5272
5273 The argument @var{file} is the standard I/O stream to output the
5274 assembler code on. @var{x} is the RTL expression for the constant to
5275 output, and @var{mode} is the machine mode (in case @var{x} is a
5276 @samp{const_int}). @var{align} is the required alignment for the value
5277 @var{x}; you should output an assembler directive to force this much
5278 alignment.
5279
5280 The argument @var{labelno} is a number to use in an internal label for
5281 the address of this pool entry. The definition of this macro is
5282 responsible for outputting the label definition at the proper place.
5283 Here is how to do this:
5284
5285 @smallexample
5286 @code{(*targetm.asm_out.internal_label)} (@var{file}, "LC", @var{labelno});
5287 @end smallexample
5288
5289 When you output a pool entry specially, you should end with a
5290 @code{goto} to the label @var{jumpto}. This will prevent the same pool
5291 entry from being output a second time in the usual manner.
5292
5293 You need not define this macro if it would do nothing.
5294 @end defmac
5295
5296 @defmac ASM_OUTPUT_POOL_EPILOGUE (@var{file} @var{funname} @var{fundecl} @var{size})
5297 A C statement to output assembler commands to at the end of the constant
5298 pool for a function. @var{funname} is a string giving the name of the
5299 function. Should the return type of the function be required, you can
5300 obtain it via @var{fundecl}. @var{size} is the size, in bytes, of the
5301 constant pool that GCC wrote immediately before this call.
5302
5303 If no constant-pool epilogue is required, the usual case, you need not
5304 define this macro.
5305 @end defmac
5306
5307 @defmac IS_ASM_LOGICAL_LINE_SEPARATOR (@var{C}, @var{STR})
5308 Define this macro as a C expression which is nonzero if @var{C} is
5309 used as a logical line separator by the assembler. @var{STR} points
5310 to the position in the string where @var{C} was found; this can be used if
5311 a line separator uses multiple characters.
5312
5313 If you do not define this macro, the default is that only
5314 the character @samp{;} is treated as a logical line separator.
5315 @end defmac
5316
5317 @hook TARGET_ASM_OPEN_PAREN
5318
5319 These macros are provided by @file{real.h} for writing the definitions
5320 of @code{ASM_OUTPUT_DOUBLE} and the like:
5321
5322 @defmac REAL_VALUE_TO_TARGET_SINGLE (@var{x}, @var{l})
5323 @defmacx REAL_VALUE_TO_TARGET_DOUBLE (@var{x}, @var{l})
5324 @defmacx REAL_VALUE_TO_TARGET_LONG_DOUBLE (@var{x}, @var{l})
5325 @defmacx REAL_VALUE_TO_TARGET_DECIMAL32 (@var{x}, @var{l})
5326 @defmacx REAL_VALUE_TO_TARGET_DECIMAL64 (@var{x}, @var{l})
5327 @defmacx REAL_VALUE_TO_TARGET_DECIMAL128 (@var{x}, @var{l})
5328 These translate @var{x}, of type @code{REAL_VALUE_TYPE}, to the
5329 target's floating point representation, and store its bit pattern in
5330 the variable @var{l}. For @code{REAL_VALUE_TO_TARGET_SINGLE} and
5331 @code{REAL_VALUE_TO_TARGET_DECIMAL32}, this variable should be a
5332 simple @code{long int}. For the others, it should be an array of
5333 @code{long int}. The number of elements in this array is determined
5334 by the size of the desired target floating point data type: 32 bits of
5335 it go in each @code{long int} array element. Each array element holds
5336 32 bits of the result, even if @code{long int} is wider than 32 bits
5337 on the host machine.
5338
5339 The array element values are designed so that you can print them out
5340 using @code{fprintf} in the order they should appear in the target
5341 machine's memory.
5342 @end defmac
5343
5344 @node Uninitialized Data
5345 @subsection Output of Uninitialized Variables
5346
5347 Each of the macros in this section is used to do the whole job of
5348 outputting a single uninitialized variable.
5349
5350 @defmac ASM_OUTPUT_COMMON (@var{stream}, @var{name}, @var{size}, @var{rounded})
5351 A C statement (sans semicolon) to output to the stdio stream
5352 @var{stream} the assembler definition of a common-label named
5353 @var{name} whose size is @var{size} bytes. The variable @var{rounded}
5354 is the size rounded up to whatever alignment the caller wants. It is
5355 possible that @var{size} may be zero, for instance if a struct with no
5356 other member than a zero-length array is defined. In this case, the
5357 backend must output a symbol definition that allocates at least one
5358 byte, both so that the address of the resulting object does not compare
5359 equal to any other, and because some object formats cannot even express
5360 the concept of a zero-sized common symbol, as that is how they represent
5361 an ordinary undefined external.
5362
5363 Use the expression @code{assemble_name (@var{stream}, @var{name})} to
5364 output the name itself; before and after that, output the additional
5365 assembler syntax for defining the name, and a newline.
5366
5367 This macro controls how the assembler definitions of uninitialized
5368 common global variables are output.
5369 @end defmac
5370
5371 @defmac ASM_OUTPUT_ALIGNED_COMMON (@var{stream}, @var{name}, @var{size}, @var{alignment})
5372 Like @code{ASM_OUTPUT_COMMON} except takes the required alignment as a
5373 separate, explicit argument. If you define this macro, it is used in
5374 place of @code{ASM_OUTPUT_COMMON}, and gives you more flexibility in
5375 handling the required alignment of the variable. The alignment is specified
5376 as the number of bits.
5377 @end defmac
5378
5379 @defmac ASM_OUTPUT_ALIGNED_DECL_COMMON (@var{stream}, @var{decl}, @var{name}, @var{size}, @var{alignment})
5380 Like @code{ASM_OUTPUT_ALIGNED_COMMON} except that @var{decl} of the
5381 variable to be output, if there is one, or @code{NULL_TREE} if there
5382 is no corresponding variable. If you define this macro, GCC will use it
5383 in place of both @code{ASM_OUTPUT_COMMON} and
5384 @code{ASM_OUTPUT_ALIGNED_COMMON}. Define this macro when you need to see
5385 the variable's decl in order to chose what to output.
5386 @end defmac
5387
5388 @defmac ASM_OUTPUT_ALIGNED_BSS (@var{stream}, @var{decl}, @var{name}, @var{size}, @var{alignment})
5389 A C statement (sans semicolon) to output to the stdio stream
5390 @var{stream} the assembler definition of uninitialized global @var{decl} named
5391 @var{name} whose size is @var{size} bytes. The variable @var{alignment}
5392 is the alignment specified as the number of bits.
5393
5394 Try to use function @code{asm_output_aligned_bss} defined in file
5395 @file{varasm.cc} when defining this macro. If unable, use the expression
5396 @code{assemble_name (@var{stream}, @var{name})} to output the name itself;
5397 before and after that, output the additional assembler syntax for defining
5398 the name, and a newline.
5399
5400 There are two ways of handling global BSS@. One is to define this macro.
5401 The other is to have @code{TARGET_ASM_SELECT_SECTION} return a
5402 switchable BSS section (@pxref{TARGET_HAVE_SWITCHABLE_BSS_SECTIONS}).
5403 You do not need to do both.
5404
5405 Some languages do not have @code{common} data, and require a
5406 non-common form of global BSS in order to handle uninitialized globals
5407 efficiently. C++ is one example of this. However, if the target does
5408 not support global BSS, the front end may choose to make globals
5409 common in order to save space in the object file.
5410 @end defmac
5411
5412 @defmac ASM_OUTPUT_LOCAL (@var{stream}, @var{name}, @var{size}, @var{rounded})
5413 A C statement (sans semicolon) to output to the stdio stream
5414 @var{stream} the assembler definition of a local-common-label named
5415 @var{name} whose size is @var{size} bytes. The variable @var{rounded}
5416 is the size rounded up to whatever alignment the caller wants.
5417
5418 Use the expression @code{assemble_name (@var{stream}, @var{name})} to
5419 output the name itself; before and after that, output the additional
5420 assembler syntax for defining the name, and a newline.
5421
5422 This macro controls how the assembler definitions of uninitialized
5423 static variables are output.
5424 @end defmac
5425
5426 @defmac ASM_OUTPUT_ALIGNED_LOCAL (@var{stream}, @var{name}, @var{size}, @var{alignment})
5427 Like @code{ASM_OUTPUT_LOCAL} except takes the required alignment as a
5428 separate, explicit argument. If you define this macro, it is used in
5429 place of @code{ASM_OUTPUT_LOCAL}, and gives you more flexibility in
5430 handling the required alignment of the variable. The alignment is specified
5431 as the number of bits.
5432 @end defmac
5433
5434 @defmac ASM_OUTPUT_ALIGNED_DECL_LOCAL (@var{stream}, @var{decl}, @var{name}, @var{size}, @var{alignment})
5435 Like @code{ASM_OUTPUT_ALIGNED_LOCAL} except that @var{decl} of the
5436 variable to be output, if there is one, or @code{NULL_TREE} if there
5437 is no corresponding variable. If you define this macro, GCC will use it
5438 in place of both @code{ASM_OUTPUT_LOCAL} and
5439 @code{ASM_OUTPUT_ALIGNED_LOCAL}. Define this macro when you need to see
5440 the variable's decl in order to chose what to output.
5441 @end defmac
5442
5443 @node Label Output
5444 @subsection Output and Generation of Labels
5445
5446 @c prevent bad page break with this line
5447 This is about outputting labels.
5448
5449 @findex assemble_name
5450 @defmac ASM_OUTPUT_LABEL (@var{stream}, @var{name})
5451 A C statement (sans semicolon) to output to the stdio stream
5452 @var{stream} the assembler definition of a label named @var{name}.
5453 Use the expression @code{assemble_name (@var{stream}, @var{name})} to
5454 output the name itself; before and after that, output the additional
5455 assembler syntax for defining the name, and a newline. A default
5456 definition of this macro is provided which is correct for most systems.
5457 @end defmac
5458
5459 @defmac ASM_OUTPUT_FUNCTION_LABEL (@var{stream}, @var{name}, @var{decl})
5460 A C statement (sans semicolon) to output to the stdio stream
5461 @var{stream} the assembler definition of a label named @var{name} of
5462 a function.
5463 Use the expression @code{assemble_name (@var{stream}, @var{name})} to
5464 output the name itself; before and after that, output the additional
5465 assembler syntax for defining the name, and a newline. A default
5466 definition of this macro is provided which is correct for most systems.
5467
5468 If this macro is not defined, then the function name is defined in the
5469 usual manner as a label (by means of @code{ASM_OUTPUT_LABEL}).
5470 @end defmac
5471
5472 @findex assemble_name_raw
5473 @defmac ASM_OUTPUT_INTERNAL_LABEL (@var{stream}, @var{name})
5474 Identical to @code{ASM_OUTPUT_LABEL}, except that @var{name} is known
5475 to refer to a compiler-generated label. The default definition uses
5476 @code{assemble_name_raw}, which is like @code{assemble_name} except
5477 that it is more efficient.
5478 @end defmac
5479
5480 @defmac SIZE_ASM_OP
5481 A C string containing the appropriate assembler directive to specify the
5482 size of a symbol, without any arguments. On systems that use ELF, the
5483 default (in @file{config/elfos.h}) is @samp{"\t.size\t"}; on other
5484 systems, the default is not to define this macro.
5485
5486 Define this macro only if it is correct to use the default definitions
5487 of @code{ASM_OUTPUT_SIZE_DIRECTIVE} and @code{ASM_OUTPUT_MEASURED_SIZE}
5488 for your system. If you need your own custom definitions of those
5489 macros, or if you do not need explicit symbol sizes at all, do not
5490 define this macro.
5491 @end defmac
5492
5493 @defmac ASM_OUTPUT_SIZE_DIRECTIVE (@var{stream}, @var{name}, @var{size})
5494 A C statement (sans semicolon) to output to the stdio stream
5495 @var{stream} a directive telling the assembler that the size of the
5496 symbol @var{name} is @var{size}. @var{size} is a @code{HOST_WIDE_INT}.
5497 If you define @code{SIZE_ASM_OP}, a default definition of this macro is
5498 provided.
5499 @end defmac
5500
5501 @defmac ASM_OUTPUT_MEASURED_SIZE (@var{stream}, @var{name})
5502 A C statement (sans semicolon) to output to the stdio stream
5503 @var{stream} a directive telling the assembler to calculate the size of
5504 the symbol @var{name} by subtracting its address from the current
5505 address.
5506
5507 If you define @code{SIZE_ASM_OP}, a default definition of this macro is
5508 provided. The default assumes that the assembler recognizes a special
5509 @samp{.} symbol as referring to the current address, and can calculate
5510 the difference between this and another symbol. If your assembler does
5511 not recognize @samp{.} or cannot do calculations with it, you will need
5512 to redefine @code{ASM_OUTPUT_MEASURED_SIZE} to use some other technique.
5513 @end defmac
5514
5515 @defmac NO_DOLLAR_IN_LABEL
5516 Define this macro if the assembler does not accept the character
5517 @samp{$} in label names. By default constructors and destructors in
5518 G++ have @samp{$} in the identifiers. If this macro is defined,
5519 @samp{.} is used instead.
5520 @end defmac
5521
5522 @defmac NO_DOT_IN_LABEL
5523 Define this macro if the assembler does not accept the character
5524 @samp{.} in label names. By default constructors and destructors in G++
5525 have names that use @samp{.}. If this macro is defined, these names
5526 are rewritten to avoid @samp{.}.
5527 @end defmac
5528
5529 @defmac TYPE_ASM_OP
5530 A C string containing the appropriate assembler directive to specify the
5531 type of a symbol, without any arguments. On systems that use ELF, the
5532 default (in @file{config/elfos.h}) is @samp{"\t.type\t"}; on other
5533 systems, the default is not to define this macro.
5534
5535 Define this macro only if it is correct to use the default definition of
5536 @code{ASM_OUTPUT_TYPE_DIRECTIVE} for your system. If you need your own
5537 custom definition of this macro, or if you do not need explicit symbol
5538 types at all, do not define this macro.
5539 @end defmac
5540
5541 @defmac TYPE_OPERAND_FMT
5542 A C string which specifies (using @code{printf} syntax) the format of
5543 the second operand to @code{TYPE_ASM_OP}. On systems that use ELF, the
5544 default (in @file{config/elfos.h}) is @samp{"@@%s"}; on other systems,
5545 the default is not to define this macro.
5546
5547 Define this macro only if it is correct to use the default definition of
5548 @code{ASM_OUTPUT_TYPE_DIRECTIVE} for your system. If you need your own
5549 custom definition of this macro, or if you do not need explicit symbol
5550 types at all, do not define this macro.
5551 @end defmac
5552
5553 @defmac ASM_OUTPUT_TYPE_DIRECTIVE (@var{stream}, @var{type})
5554 A C statement (sans semicolon) to output to the stdio stream
5555 @var{stream} a directive telling the assembler that the type of the
5556 symbol @var{name} is @var{type}. @var{type} is a C string; currently,
5557 that string is always either @samp{"function"} or @samp{"object"}, but
5558 you should not count on this.
5559
5560 If you define @code{TYPE_ASM_OP} and @code{TYPE_OPERAND_FMT}, a default
5561 definition of this macro is provided.
5562 @end defmac
5563
5564 @defmac ASM_DECLARE_FUNCTION_NAME (@var{stream}, @var{name}, @var{decl})
5565 A C statement (sans semicolon) to output to the stdio stream
5566 @var{stream} any text necessary for declaring the name @var{name} of a
5567 function which is being defined. This macro is responsible for
5568 outputting the label definition (perhaps using
5569 @code{ASM_OUTPUT_FUNCTION_LABEL}). The argument @var{decl} is the
5570 @code{FUNCTION_DECL} tree node representing the function.
5571
5572 If this macro is not defined, then the function name is defined in the
5573 usual manner as a label (by means of @code{ASM_OUTPUT_FUNCTION_LABEL}).
5574
5575 You may wish to use @code{ASM_OUTPUT_TYPE_DIRECTIVE} in the definition
5576 of this macro.
5577 @end defmac
5578
5579 @defmac ASM_DECLARE_FUNCTION_SIZE (@var{stream}, @var{name}, @var{decl})
5580 A C statement (sans semicolon) to output to the stdio stream
5581 @var{stream} any text necessary for declaring the size of a function
5582 which is being defined. The argument @var{name} is the name of the
5583 function. The argument @var{decl} is the @code{FUNCTION_DECL} tree node
5584 representing the function.
5585
5586 If this macro is not defined, then the function size is not defined.
5587
5588 You may wish to use @code{ASM_OUTPUT_MEASURED_SIZE} in the definition
5589 of this macro.
5590 @end defmac
5591
5592 @defmac ASM_DECLARE_COLD_FUNCTION_NAME (@var{stream}, @var{name}, @var{decl})
5593 A C statement (sans semicolon) to output to the stdio stream
5594 @var{stream} any text necessary for declaring the name @var{name} of a
5595 cold function partition which is being defined. This macro is responsible
5596 for outputting the label definition (perhaps using
5597 @code{ASM_OUTPUT_FUNCTION_LABEL}). The argument @var{decl} is the
5598 @code{FUNCTION_DECL} tree node representing the function.
5599
5600 If this macro is not defined, then the cold partition name is defined in the
5601 usual manner as a label (by means of @code{ASM_OUTPUT_LABEL}).
5602
5603 You may wish to use @code{ASM_OUTPUT_TYPE_DIRECTIVE} in the definition
5604 of this macro.
5605 @end defmac
5606
5607 @defmac ASM_DECLARE_COLD_FUNCTION_SIZE (@var{stream}, @var{name}, @var{decl})
5608 A C statement (sans semicolon) to output to the stdio stream
5609 @var{stream} any text necessary for declaring the size of a cold function
5610 partition which is being defined. The argument @var{name} is the name of the
5611 cold partition of the function. The argument @var{decl} is the
5612 @code{FUNCTION_DECL} tree node representing the function.
5613
5614 If this macro is not defined, then the partition size is not defined.
5615
5616 You may wish to use @code{ASM_OUTPUT_MEASURED_SIZE} in the definition
5617 of this macro.
5618 @end defmac
5619
5620 @defmac ASM_DECLARE_OBJECT_NAME (@var{stream}, @var{name}, @var{decl})
5621 A C statement (sans semicolon) to output to the stdio stream
5622 @var{stream} any text necessary for declaring the name @var{name} of an
5623 initialized variable which is being defined. This macro must output the
5624 label definition (perhaps using @code{ASM_OUTPUT_LABEL}). The argument
5625 @var{decl} is the @code{VAR_DECL} tree node representing the variable.
5626
5627 If this macro is not defined, then the variable name is defined in the
5628 usual manner as a label (by means of @code{ASM_OUTPUT_LABEL}).
5629
5630 You may wish to use @code{ASM_OUTPUT_TYPE_DIRECTIVE} and/or
5631 @code{ASM_OUTPUT_SIZE_DIRECTIVE} in the definition of this macro.
5632 @end defmac
5633
5634 @hook TARGET_ASM_DECLARE_CONSTANT_NAME
5635
5636 @defmac ASM_DECLARE_REGISTER_GLOBAL (@var{stream}, @var{decl}, @var{regno}, @var{name})
5637 A C statement (sans semicolon) to output to the stdio stream
5638 @var{stream} any text necessary for claiming a register @var{regno}
5639 for a global variable @var{decl} with name @var{name}.
5640
5641 If you don't define this macro, that is equivalent to defining it to do
5642 nothing.
5643 @end defmac
5644
5645 @defmac ASM_FINISH_DECLARE_OBJECT (@var{stream}, @var{decl}, @var{toplevel}, @var{atend})
5646 A C statement (sans semicolon) to finish up declaring a variable name
5647 once the compiler has processed its initializer fully and thus has had a
5648 chance to determine the size of an array when controlled by an
5649 initializer. This is used on systems where it's necessary to declare
5650 something about the size of the object.
5651
5652 If you don't define this macro, that is equivalent to defining it to do
5653 nothing.
5654
5655 You may wish to use @code{ASM_OUTPUT_SIZE_DIRECTIVE} and/or
5656 @code{ASM_OUTPUT_MEASURED_SIZE} in the definition of this macro.
5657 @end defmac
5658
5659 @hook TARGET_ASM_GLOBALIZE_LABEL
5660
5661 @hook TARGET_ASM_GLOBALIZE_DECL_NAME
5662
5663 @hook TARGET_ASM_ASSEMBLE_UNDEFINED_DECL
5664
5665 @defmac ASM_WEAKEN_LABEL (@var{stream}, @var{name})
5666 A C statement (sans semicolon) to output to the stdio stream
5667 @var{stream} some commands that will make the label @var{name} weak;
5668 that is, available for reference from other files but only used if
5669 no other definition is available. Use the expression
5670 @code{assemble_name (@var{stream}, @var{name})} to output the name
5671 itself; before and after that, output the additional assembler syntax
5672 for making that name weak, and a newline.
5673
5674 If you don't define this macro or @code{ASM_WEAKEN_DECL}, GCC will not
5675 support weak symbols and you should not define the @code{SUPPORTS_WEAK}
5676 macro.
5677 @end defmac
5678
5679 @defmac ASM_WEAKEN_DECL (@var{stream}, @var{decl}, @var{name}, @var{value})
5680 Combines (and replaces) the function of @code{ASM_WEAKEN_LABEL} and
5681 @code{ASM_OUTPUT_WEAK_ALIAS}, allowing access to the associated function
5682 or variable decl. If @var{value} is not @code{NULL}, this C statement
5683 should output to the stdio stream @var{stream} assembler code which
5684 defines (equates) the weak symbol @var{name} to have the value
5685 @var{value}. If @var{value} is @code{NULL}, it should output commands
5686 to make @var{name} weak.
5687 @end defmac
5688
5689 @defmac ASM_OUTPUT_WEAKREF (@var{stream}, @var{decl}, @var{name}, @var{value})
5690 Outputs a directive that enables @var{name} to be used to refer to
5691 symbol @var{value} with weak-symbol semantics. @code{decl} is the
5692 declaration of @code{name}.
5693 @end defmac
5694
5695 @defmac SUPPORTS_WEAK
5696 A preprocessor constant expression which evaluates to true if the target
5697 supports weak symbols.
5698
5699 If you don't define this macro, @file{defaults.h} provides a default
5700 definition. If either @code{ASM_WEAKEN_LABEL} or @code{ASM_WEAKEN_DECL}
5701 is defined, the default definition is @samp{1}; otherwise, it is @samp{0}.
5702 @end defmac
5703
5704 @defmac TARGET_SUPPORTS_WEAK
5705 A C expression which evaluates to true if the target supports weak symbols.
5706
5707 If you don't define this macro, @file{defaults.h} provides a default
5708 definition. The default definition is @samp{(SUPPORTS_WEAK)}. Define
5709 this macro if you want to control weak symbol support with a compiler
5710 flag such as @option{-melf}.
5711 @end defmac
5712
5713 @defmac MAKE_DECL_ONE_ONLY (@var{decl})
5714 A C statement (sans semicolon) to mark @var{decl} to be emitted as a
5715 public symbol such that extra copies in multiple translation units will
5716 be discarded by the linker. Define this macro if your object file
5717 format provides support for this concept, such as the @samp{COMDAT}
5718 section flags in the Microsoft Windows PE/COFF format, and this support
5719 requires changes to @var{decl}, such as putting it in a separate section.
5720 @end defmac
5721
5722 @defmac SUPPORTS_ONE_ONLY
5723 A C expression which evaluates to true if the target supports one-only
5724 semantics.
5725
5726 If you don't define this macro, @file{varasm.cc} provides a default
5727 definition. If @code{MAKE_DECL_ONE_ONLY} is defined, the default
5728 definition is @samp{1}; otherwise, it is @samp{0}. Define this macro if
5729 you want to control one-only symbol support with a compiler flag, or if
5730 setting the @code{DECL_ONE_ONLY} flag is enough to mark a declaration to
5731 be emitted as one-only.
5732 @end defmac
5733
5734 @hook TARGET_ASM_ASSEMBLE_VISIBILITY
5735
5736 @defmac TARGET_WEAK_NOT_IN_ARCHIVE_TOC
5737 A C expression that evaluates to true if the target's linker expects
5738 that weak symbols do not appear in a static archive's table of contents.
5739 The default is @code{0}.
5740
5741 Leaving weak symbols out of an archive's table of contents means that,
5742 if a symbol will only have a definition in one translation unit and
5743 will have undefined references from other translation units, that
5744 symbol should not be weak. Defining this macro to be nonzero will
5745 thus have the effect that certain symbols that would normally be weak
5746 (explicit template instantiations, and vtables for polymorphic classes
5747 with noninline key methods) will instead be nonweak.
5748
5749 The C++ ABI requires this macro to be zero. Define this macro for
5750 targets where full C++ ABI compliance is impossible and where linker
5751 restrictions require weak symbols to be left out of a static archive's
5752 table of contents.
5753 @end defmac
5754
5755 @defmac ASM_OUTPUT_EXTERNAL (@var{stream}, @var{decl}, @var{name})
5756 A C statement (sans semicolon) to output to the stdio stream
5757 @var{stream} any text necessary for declaring the name of an external
5758 symbol named @var{name} which is referenced in this compilation but
5759 not defined. The value of @var{decl} is the tree node for the
5760 declaration.
5761
5762 This macro need not be defined if it does not need to output anything.
5763 The GNU assembler and most Unix assemblers don't require anything.
5764 @end defmac
5765
5766 @hook TARGET_ASM_EXTERNAL_LIBCALL
5767
5768 @hook TARGET_ASM_MARK_DECL_PRESERVED
5769
5770 @defmac ASM_OUTPUT_LABELREF (@var{stream}, @var{name})
5771 A C statement (sans semicolon) to output to the stdio stream
5772 @var{stream} a reference in assembler syntax to a label named
5773 @var{name}. This should add @samp{_} to the front of the name, if that
5774 is customary on your operating system, as it is in most Berkeley Unix
5775 systems. This macro is used in @code{assemble_name}.
5776 @end defmac
5777
5778 @hook TARGET_MANGLE_ASSEMBLER_NAME
5779
5780 @defmac ASM_OUTPUT_SYMBOL_REF (@var{stream}, @var{sym})
5781 A C statement (sans semicolon) to output a reference to
5782 @code{SYMBOL_REF} @var{sym}. If not defined, @code{assemble_name}
5783 will be used to output the name of the symbol. This macro may be used
5784 to modify the way a symbol is referenced depending on information
5785 encoded by @code{TARGET_ENCODE_SECTION_INFO}.
5786 @end defmac
5787
5788 @defmac ASM_OUTPUT_LABEL_REF (@var{stream}, @var{buf})
5789 A C statement (sans semicolon) to output a reference to @var{buf}, the
5790 result of @code{ASM_GENERATE_INTERNAL_LABEL}. If not defined,
5791 @code{assemble_name} will be used to output the name of the symbol.
5792 This macro is not used by @code{output_asm_label}, or the @code{%l}
5793 specifier that calls it; the intention is that this macro should be set
5794 when it is necessary to output a label differently when its address is
5795 being taken.
5796 @end defmac
5797
5798 @hook TARGET_ASM_INTERNAL_LABEL
5799
5800 @defmac ASM_OUTPUT_DEBUG_LABEL (@var{stream}, @var{prefix}, @var{num})
5801 A C statement to output to the stdio stream @var{stream} a debug info
5802 label whose name is made from the string @var{prefix} and the number
5803 @var{num}. This is useful for VLIW targets, where debug info labels
5804 may need to be treated differently than branch target labels. On some
5805 systems, branch target labels must be at the beginning of instruction
5806 bundles, but debug info labels can occur in the middle of instruction
5807 bundles.
5808
5809 If this macro is not defined, then @code{(*targetm.asm_out.internal_label)} will be
5810 used.
5811 @end defmac
5812
5813 @defmac ASM_GENERATE_INTERNAL_LABEL (@var{string}, @var{prefix}, @var{num})
5814 A C statement to store into the string @var{string} a label whose name
5815 is made from the string @var{prefix} and the number @var{num}.
5816
5817 This string, when output subsequently by @code{assemble_name}, should
5818 produce the output that @code{(*targetm.asm_out.internal_label)} would produce
5819 with the same @var{prefix} and @var{num}.
5820
5821 If the string begins with @samp{*}, then @code{assemble_name} will
5822 output the rest of the string unchanged. It is often convenient for
5823 @code{ASM_GENERATE_INTERNAL_LABEL} to use @samp{*} in this way. If the
5824 string doesn't start with @samp{*}, then @code{ASM_OUTPUT_LABELREF} gets
5825 to output the string, and may change it. (Of course,
5826 @code{ASM_OUTPUT_LABELREF} is also part of your machine description, so
5827 you should know what it does on your machine.)
5828 @end defmac
5829
5830 @defmac ASM_FORMAT_PRIVATE_NAME (@var{outvar}, @var{name}, @var{number})
5831 A C expression to assign to @var{outvar} (which is a variable of type
5832 @code{char *}) a newly allocated string made from the string
5833 @var{name} and the number @var{number}, with some suitable punctuation
5834 added. Use @code{alloca} to get space for the string.
5835
5836 The string will be used as an argument to @code{ASM_OUTPUT_LABELREF} to
5837 produce an assembler label for an internal static variable whose name is
5838 @var{name}. Therefore, the string must be such as to result in valid
5839 assembler code. The argument @var{number} is different each time this
5840 macro is executed; it prevents conflicts between similarly-named
5841 internal static variables in different scopes.
5842
5843 Ideally this string should not be a valid C identifier, to prevent any
5844 conflict with the user's own symbols. Most assemblers allow periods
5845 or percent signs in assembler symbols; putting at least one of these
5846 between the name and the number will suffice.
5847
5848 If this macro is not defined, a default definition will be provided
5849 which is correct for most systems.
5850 @end defmac
5851
5852 @defmac ASM_OUTPUT_DEF (@var{stream}, @var{name}, @var{value})
5853 A C statement to output to the stdio stream @var{stream} assembler code
5854 which defines (equates) the symbol @var{name} to have the value @var{value}.
5855
5856 @findex SET_ASM_OP
5857 If @code{SET_ASM_OP} is defined, a default definition is provided which is
5858 correct for most systems.
5859 @end defmac
5860
5861 @defmac ASM_OUTPUT_DEF_FROM_DECLS (@var{stream}, @var{decl_of_name}, @var{decl_of_value})
5862 A C statement to output to the stdio stream @var{stream} assembler code
5863 which defines (equates) the symbol whose tree node is @var{decl_of_name}
5864 to have the value of the tree node @var{decl_of_value}. This macro will
5865 be used in preference to @samp{ASM_OUTPUT_DEF} if it is defined and if
5866 the tree nodes are available.
5867
5868 @findex SET_ASM_OP
5869 If @code{SET_ASM_OP} is defined, a default definition is provided which is
5870 correct for most systems.
5871 @end defmac
5872
5873 @defmac TARGET_DEFERRED_OUTPUT_DEFS (@var{decl_of_name}, @var{decl_of_value})
5874 A C statement that evaluates to true if the assembler code which defines
5875 (equates) the symbol whose tree node is @var{decl_of_name} to have the value
5876 of the tree node @var{decl_of_value} should be emitted near the end of the
5877 current compilation unit. The default is to not defer output of defines.
5878 This macro affects defines output by @samp{ASM_OUTPUT_DEF} and
5879 @samp{ASM_OUTPUT_DEF_FROM_DECLS}.
5880 @end defmac
5881
5882 @defmac ASM_OUTPUT_WEAK_ALIAS (@var{stream}, @var{name}, @var{value})
5883 A C statement to output to the stdio stream @var{stream} assembler code
5884 which defines (equates) the weak symbol @var{name} to have the value
5885 @var{value}. If @var{value} is @code{NULL}, it defines @var{name} as
5886 an undefined weak symbol.
5887
5888 Define this macro if the target only supports weak aliases; define
5889 @code{ASM_OUTPUT_DEF} instead if possible.
5890 @end defmac
5891
5892 @defmac OBJC_GEN_METHOD_LABEL (@var{buf}, @var{is_inst}, @var{class_name}, @var{cat_name}, @var{sel_name})
5893 Define this macro to override the default assembler names used for
5894 Objective-C methods.
5895
5896 The default name is a unique method number followed by the name of the
5897 class (e.g.@: @samp{_1_Foo}). For methods in categories, the name of
5898 the category is also included in the assembler name (e.g.@:
5899 @samp{_1_Foo_Bar}).
5900
5901 These names are safe on most systems, but make debugging difficult since
5902 the method's selector is not present in the name. Therefore, particular
5903 systems define other ways of computing names.
5904
5905 @var{buf} is an expression of type @code{char *} which gives you a
5906 buffer in which to store the name; its length is as long as
5907 @var{class_name}, @var{cat_name} and @var{sel_name} put together, plus
5908 50 characters extra.
5909
5910 The argument @var{is_inst} specifies whether the method is an instance
5911 method or a class method; @var{class_name} is the name of the class;
5912 @var{cat_name} is the name of the category (or @code{NULL} if the method is not
5913 in a category); and @var{sel_name} is the name of the selector.
5914
5915 On systems where the assembler can handle quoted names, you can use this
5916 macro to provide more human-readable names.
5917 @end defmac
5918
5919 @node Initialization
5920 @subsection How Initialization Functions Are Handled
5921 @cindex initialization routines
5922 @cindex termination routines
5923 @cindex constructors, output of
5924 @cindex destructors, output of
5925
5926 The compiled code for certain languages includes @dfn{constructors}
5927 (also called @dfn{initialization routines})---functions to initialize
5928 data in the program when the program is started. These functions need
5929 to be called before the program is ``started''---that is to say, before
5930 @code{main} is called.
5931
5932 Compiling some languages generates @dfn{destructors} (also called
5933 @dfn{termination routines}) that should be called when the program
5934 terminates.
5935
5936 To make the initialization and termination functions work, the compiler
5937 must output something in the assembler code to cause those functions to
5938 be called at the appropriate time. When you port the compiler to a new
5939 system, you need to specify how to do this.
5940
5941 There are two major ways that GCC currently supports the execution of
5942 initialization and termination functions. Each way has two variants.
5943 Much of the structure is common to all four variations.
5944
5945 @findex __CTOR_LIST__
5946 @findex __DTOR_LIST__
5947 The linker must build two lists of these functions---a list of
5948 initialization functions, called @code{__CTOR_LIST__}, and a list of
5949 termination functions, called @code{__DTOR_LIST__}.
5950
5951 Each list always begins with an ignored function pointer (which may hold
5952 0, @minus{}1, or a count of the function pointers after it, depending on
5953 the environment). This is followed by a series of zero or more function
5954 pointers to constructors (or destructors), followed by a function
5955 pointer containing zero.
5956
5957 Depending on the operating system and its executable file format, either
5958 @file{crtstuff.c} or @file{libgcc2.c} traverses these lists at startup
5959 time and exit time. Constructors are called in reverse order of the
5960 list; destructors in forward order.
5961
5962 The best way to handle static constructors works only for object file
5963 formats which provide arbitrarily-named sections. A section is set
5964 aside for a list of constructors, and another for a list of destructors.
5965 Traditionally these are called @samp{.ctors} and @samp{.dtors}. Each
5966 object file that defines an initialization function also puts a word in
5967 the constructor section to point to that function. The linker
5968 accumulates all these words into one contiguous @samp{.ctors} section.
5969 Termination functions are handled similarly.
5970
5971 This method will be chosen as the default by @file{target-def.h} if
5972 @code{TARGET_ASM_NAMED_SECTION} is defined. A target that does not
5973 support arbitrary sections, but does support special designated
5974 constructor and destructor sections may define @code{CTORS_SECTION_ASM_OP}
5975 and @code{DTORS_SECTION_ASM_OP} to achieve the same effect.
5976
5977 When arbitrary sections are available, there are two variants, depending
5978 upon how the code in @file{crtstuff.c} is called. On systems that
5979 support a @dfn{.init} section which is executed at program startup,
5980 parts of @file{crtstuff.c} are compiled into that section. The
5981 program is linked by the @command{gcc} driver like this:
5982
5983 @smallexample
5984 ld -o @var{output_file} crti.o crtbegin.o @dots{} -lgcc crtend.o crtn.o
5985 @end smallexample
5986
5987 The prologue of a function (@code{__init}) appears in the @code{.init}
5988 section of @file{crti.o}; the epilogue appears in @file{crtn.o}. Likewise
5989 for the function @code{__fini} in the @dfn{.fini} section. Normally these
5990 files are provided by the operating system or by the GNU C library, but
5991 are provided by GCC for a few targets.
5992
5993 The objects @file{crtbegin.o} and @file{crtend.o} are (for most targets)
5994 compiled from @file{crtstuff.c}. They contain, among other things, code
5995 fragments within the @code{.init} and @code{.fini} sections that branch
5996 to routines in the @code{.text} section. The linker will pull all parts
5997 of a section together, which results in a complete @code{__init} function
5998 that invokes the routines we need at startup.
5999
6000 To use this variant, you must define the @code{INIT_SECTION_ASM_OP}
6001 macro properly.
6002
6003 If no init section is available, when GCC compiles any function called
6004 @code{main} (or more accurately, any function designated as a program
6005 entry point by the language front end calling @code{expand_main_function}),
6006 it inserts a procedure call to @code{__main} as the first executable code
6007 after the function prologue. The @code{__main} function is defined
6008 in @file{libgcc2.c} and runs the global constructors.
6009
6010 In file formats that don't support arbitrary sections, there are again
6011 two variants. In the simplest variant, the GNU linker (GNU @code{ld})
6012 and an `a.out' format must be used. In this case,
6013 @code{TARGET_ASM_CONSTRUCTOR} is defined to produce a @code{.stabs}
6014 entry of type @samp{N_SETT}, referencing the name @code{__CTOR_LIST__},
6015 and with the address of the void function containing the initialization
6016 code as its value. The GNU linker recognizes this as a request to add
6017 the value to a @dfn{set}; the values are accumulated, and are eventually
6018 placed in the executable as a vector in the format described above, with
6019 a leading (ignored) count and a trailing zero element.
6020 @code{TARGET_ASM_DESTRUCTOR} is handled similarly. Since no init
6021 section is available, the absence of @code{INIT_SECTION_ASM_OP} causes
6022 the compilation of @code{main} to call @code{__main} as above, starting
6023 the initialization process.
6024
6025 The last variant uses neither arbitrary sections nor the GNU linker.
6026 This is preferable when you want to do dynamic linking and when using
6027 file formats which the GNU linker does not support, such as `ECOFF'@. In
6028 this case, @code{TARGET_HAVE_CTORS_DTORS} is false, initialization and
6029 termination functions are recognized simply by their names. This requires
6030 an extra program in the linkage step, called @command{collect2}. This program
6031 pretends to be the linker, for use with GCC; it does its job by running
6032 the ordinary linker, but also arranges to include the vectors of
6033 initialization and termination functions. These functions are called
6034 via @code{__main} as described above. In order to use this method,
6035 @code{use_collect2} must be defined in the target in @file{config.gcc}.
6036
6037 @ifinfo
6038 The following section describes the specific macros that control and
6039 customize the handling of initialization and termination functions.
6040 @end ifinfo
6041
6042 @node Macros for Initialization
6043 @subsection Macros Controlling Initialization Routines
6044
6045 Here are the macros that control how the compiler handles initialization
6046 and termination functions:
6047
6048 @defmac INIT_SECTION_ASM_OP
6049 If defined, a C string constant, including spacing, for the assembler
6050 operation to identify the following data as initialization code. If not
6051 defined, GCC will assume such a section does not exist. When you are
6052 using special sections for initialization and termination functions, this
6053 macro also controls how @file{crtstuff.c} and @file{libgcc2.c} arrange to
6054 run the initialization functions.
6055 @end defmac
6056
6057 @defmac HAS_INIT_SECTION
6058 If defined, @code{main} will not call @code{__main} as described above.
6059 This macro should be defined for systems that control start-up code
6060 on a symbol-by-symbol basis, such as OSF/1, and should not
6061 be defined explicitly for systems that support @code{INIT_SECTION_ASM_OP}.
6062 @end defmac
6063
6064 @defmac LD_INIT_SWITCH
6065 If defined, a C string constant for a switch that tells the linker that
6066 the following symbol is an initialization routine.
6067 @end defmac
6068
6069 @defmac LD_FINI_SWITCH
6070 If defined, a C string constant for a switch that tells the linker that
6071 the following symbol is a finalization routine.
6072 @end defmac
6073
6074 @defmac COLLECT_SHARED_INIT_FUNC (@var{stream}, @var{func})
6075 If defined, a C statement that will write a function that can be
6076 automatically called when a shared library is loaded. The function
6077 should call @var{func}, which takes no arguments. If not defined, and
6078 the object format requires an explicit initialization function, then a
6079 function called @code{_GLOBAL__DI} will be generated.
6080
6081 This function and the following one are used by collect2 when linking a
6082 shared library that needs constructors or destructors, or has DWARF2
6083 exception tables embedded in the code.
6084 @end defmac
6085
6086 @defmac COLLECT_SHARED_FINI_FUNC (@var{stream}, @var{func})
6087 If defined, a C statement that will write a function that can be
6088 automatically called when a shared library is unloaded. The function
6089 should call @var{func}, which takes no arguments. If not defined, and
6090 the object format requires an explicit finalization function, then a
6091 function called @code{_GLOBAL__DD} will be generated.
6092 @end defmac
6093
6094 @defmac INVOKE__main
6095 If defined, @code{main} will call @code{__main} despite the presence of
6096 @code{INIT_SECTION_ASM_OP}. This macro should be defined for systems
6097 where the init section is not actually run automatically, but is still
6098 useful for collecting the lists of constructors and destructors.
6099 @end defmac
6100
6101 @defmac SUPPORTS_INIT_PRIORITY
6102 If nonzero, the C++ @code{init_priority} attribute is supported and the
6103 compiler should emit instructions to control the order of initialization
6104 of objects. If zero, the compiler will issue an error message upon
6105 encountering an @code{init_priority} attribute.
6106 @end defmac
6107
6108 @hook TARGET_HAVE_CTORS_DTORS
6109
6110 @hook TARGET_DTORS_FROM_CXA_ATEXIT
6111
6112 @hook TARGET_ASM_CONSTRUCTOR
6113
6114 @hook TARGET_ASM_DESTRUCTOR
6115
6116 If @code{TARGET_HAVE_CTORS_DTORS} is true, the initialization routine
6117 generated for the generated object file will have static linkage.
6118
6119 If your system uses @command{collect2} as the means of processing
6120 constructors, then that program normally uses @command{nm} to scan
6121 an object file for constructor functions to be called.
6122
6123 On certain kinds of systems, you can define this macro to make
6124 @command{collect2} work faster (and, in some cases, make it work at all):
6125
6126 @defmac OBJECT_FORMAT_COFF
6127 Define this macro if the system uses COFF (Common Object File Format)
6128 object files, so that @command{collect2} can assume this format and scan
6129 object files directly for dynamic constructor/destructor functions.
6130
6131 This macro is effective only in a native compiler; @command{collect2} as
6132 part of a cross compiler always uses @command{nm} for the target machine.
6133 @end defmac
6134
6135 @defmac REAL_NM_FILE_NAME
6136 Define this macro as a C string constant containing the file name to use
6137 to execute @command{nm}. The default is to search the path normally for
6138 @command{nm}.
6139 @end defmac
6140
6141 @defmac NM_FLAGS
6142 @command{collect2} calls @command{nm} to scan object files for static
6143 constructors and destructors and LTO info. By default, @option{-n} is
6144 passed. Define @code{NM_FLAGS} to a C string constant if other options
6145 are needed to get the same output format as GNU @command{nm -n}
6146 produces.
6147 @end defmac
6148
6149 If your system supports shared libraries and has a program to list the
6150 dynamic dependencies of a given library or executable, you can define
6151 these macros to enable support for running initialization and
6152 termination functions in shared libraries:
6153
6154 @defmac LDD_SUFFIX
6155 Define this macro to a C string constant containing the name of the program
6156 which lists dynamic dependencies, like @command{ldd} under SunOS 4.
6157 @end defmac
6158
6159 @defmac PARSE_LDD_OUTPUT (@var{ptr})
6160 Define this macro to be C code that extracts filenames from the output
6161 of the program denoted by @code{LDD_SUFFIX}. @var{ptr} is a variable
6162 of type @code{char *} that points to the beginning of a line of output
6163 from @code{LDD_SUFFIX}. If the line lists a dynamic dependency, the
6164 code must advance @var{ptr} to the beginning of the filename on that
6165 line. Otherwise, it must set @var{ptr} to @code{NULL}.
6166 @end defmac
6167
6168 @defmac SHLIB_SUFFIX
6169 Define this macro to a C string constant containing the default shared
6170 library extension of the target (e.g., @samp{".so"}). @command{collect2}
6171 strips version information after this suffix when generating global
6172 constructor and destructor names. This define is only needed on targets
6173 that use @command{collect2} to process constructors and destructors.
6174 @end defmac
6175
6176 @node Instruction Output
6177 @subsection Output of Assembler Instructions
6178
6179 @c prevent bad page break with this line
6180 This describes assembler instruction output.
6181
6182 @defmac REGISTER_NAMES
6183 A C initializer containing the assembler's names for the machine
6184 registers, each one as a C string constant. This is what translates
6185 register numbers in the compiler into assembler language.
6186 @end defmac
6187
6188 @defmac ADDITIONAL_REGISTER_NAMES
6189 If defined, a C initializer for an array of structures containing a name
6190 and a register number. This macro defines additional names for hard
6191 registers, thus allowing the @code{asm} option in declarations to refer
6192 to registers using alternate names.
6193 @end defmac
6194
6195 @defmac OVERLAPPING_REGISTER_NAMES
6196 If defined, a C initializer for an array of structures containing a
6197 name, a register number and a count of the number of consecutive
6198 machine registers the name overlaps. This macro defines additional
6199 names for hard registers, thus allowing the @code{asm} option in
6200 declarations to refer to registers using alternate names. Unlike
6201 @code{ADDITIONAL_REGISTER_NAMES}, this macro should be used when the
6202 register name implies multiple underlying registers.
6203
6204 This macro should be used when it is important that a clobber in an
6205 @code{asm} statement clobbers all the underlying values implied by the
6206 register name. For example, on ARM, clobbering the double-precision
6207 VFP register ``d0'' implies clobbering both single-precision registers
6208 ``s0'' and ``s1''.
6209 @end defmac
6210
6211 @defmac ASM_OUTPUT_OPCODE (@var{stream}, @var{ptr})
6212 Define this macro if you are using an unusual assembler that
6213 requires different names for the machine instructions.
6214
6215 The definition is a C statement or statements which output an
6216 assembler instruction opcode to the stdio stream @var{stream}. The
6217 macro-operand @var{ptr} is a variable of type @code{char *} which
6218 points to the opcode name in its ``internal'' form---the form that is
6219 written in the machine description. The definition should output the
6220 opcode name to @var{stream}, performing any translation you desire, and
6221 increment the variable @var{ptr} to point at the end of the opcode
6222 so that it will not be output twice.
6223
6224 In fact, your macro definition may process less than the entire opcode
6225 name, or more than the opcode name; but if you want to process text
6226 that includes @samp{%}-sequences to substitute operands, you must take
6227 care of the substitution yourself. Just be sure to increment
6228 @var{ptr} over whatever text should not be output normally.
6229
6230 @findex recog_data.operand
6231 If you need to look at the operand values, they can be found as the
6232 elements of @code{recog_data.operand}.
6233
6234 If the macro definition does nothing, the instruction is output
6235 in the usual way.
6236 @end defmac
6237
6238 @defmac FINAL_PRESCAN_INSN (@var{insn}, @var{opvec}, @var{noperands})
6239 If defined, a C statement to be executed just prior to the output of
6240 assembler code for @var{insn}, to modify the extracted operands so
6241 they will be output differently.
6242
6243 Here the argument @var{opvec} is the vector containing the operands
6244 extracted from @var{insn}, and @var{noperands} is the number of
6245 elements of the vector which contain meaningful data for this insn.
6246 The contents of this vector are what will be used to convert the insn
6247 template into assembler code, so you can change the assembler output
6248 by changing the contents of the vector.
6249
6250 This macro is useful when various assembler syntaxes share a single
6251 file of instruction patterns; by defining this macro differently, you
6252 can cause a large class of instructions to be output differently (such
6253 as with rearranged operands). Naturally, variations in assembler
6254 syntax affecting individual insn patterns ought to be handled by
6255 writing conditional output routines in those patterns.
6256
6257 If this macro is not defined, it is equivalent to a null statement.
6258 @end defmac
6259
6260 @hook TARGET_ASM_FINAL_POSTSCAN_INSN
6261
6262 @defmac PRINT_OPERAND (@var{stream}, @var{x}, @var{code})
6263 A C compound statement to output to stdio stream @var{stream} the
6264 assembler syntax for an instruction operand @var{x}. @var{x} is an
6265 RTL expression.
6266
6267 @var{code} is a value that can be used to specify one of several ways
6268 of printing the operand. It is used when identical operands must be
6269 printed differently depending on the context. @var{code} comes from
6270 the @samp{%} specification that was used to request printing of the
6271 operand. If the specification was just @samp{%@var{digit}} then
6272 @var{code} is 0; if the specification was @samp{%@var{ltr}
6273 @var{digit}} then @var{code} is the ASCII code for @var{ltr}.
6274
6275 @findex reg_names
6276 If @var{x} is a register, this macro should print the register's name.
6277 The names can be found in an array @code{reg_names} whose type is
6278 @code{char *[]}. @code{reg_names} is initialized from
6279 @code{REGISTER_NAMES}.
6280
6281 When the machine description has a specification @samp{%@var{punct}}
6282 (a @samp{%} followed by a punctuation character), this macro is called
6283 with a null pointer for @var{x} and the punctuation character for
6284 @var{code}.
6285 @end defmac
6286
6287 @defmac PRINT_OPERAND_PUNCT_VALID_P (@var{code})
6288 A C expression which evaluates to true if @var{code} is a valid
6289 punctuation character for use in the @code{PRINT_OPERAND} macro. If
6290 @code{PRINT_OPERAND_PUNCT_VALID_P} is not defined, it means that no
6291 punctuation characters (except for the standard one, @samp{%}) are used
6292 in this way.
6293 @end defmac
6294
6295 @defmac PRINT_OPERAND_ADDRESS (@var{stream}, @var{x})
6296 A C compound statement to output to stdio stream @var{stream} the
6297 assembler syntax for an instruction operand that is a memory reference
6298 whose address is @var{x}. @var{x} is an RTL expression.
6299
6300 @cindex @code{TARGET_ENCODE_SECTION_INFO} usage
6301 On some machines, the syntax for a symbolic address depends on the
6302 section that the address refers to. On these machines, define the hook
6303 @code{TARGET_ENCODE_SECTION_INFO} to store the information into the
6304 @code{symbol_ref}, and then check for it here. @xref{Assembler
6305 Format}.
6306 @end defmac
6307
6308 @findex dbr_sequence_length
6309 @defmac DBR_OUTPUT_SEQEND (@var{file})
6310 A C statement, to be executed after all slot-filler instructions have
6311 been output. If necessary, call @code{dbr_sequence_length} to
6312 determine the number of slots filled in a sequence (zero if not
6313 currently outputting a sequence), to decide how many no-ops to output,
6314 or whatever.
6315
6316 Don't define this macro if it has nothing to do, but it is helpful in
6317 reading assembly output if the extent of the delay sequence is made
6318 explicit (e.g.@: with white space).
6319 @end defmac
6320
6321 @findex final_sequence
6322 Note that output routines for instructions with delay slots must be
6323 prepared to deal with not being output as part of a sequence
6324 (i.e.@: when the scheduling pass is not run, or when no slot fillers could be
6325 found.) The variable @code{final_sequence} is null when not
6326 processing a sequence, otherwise it contains the @code{sequence} rtx
6327 being output.
6328
6329 @findex asm_fprintf
6330 @defmac REGISTER_PREFIX
6331 @defmacx LOCAL_LABEL_PREFIX
6332 @defmacx USER_LABEL_PREFIX
6333 @defmacx IMMEDIATE_PREFIX
6334 If defined, C string expressions to be used for the @samp{%R}, @samp{%L},
6335 @samp{%U}, and @samp{%I} options of @code{asm_fprintf} (see
6336 @file{final.cc}). These are useful when a single @file{md} file must
6337 support multiple assembler formats. In that case, the various @file{tm.h}
6338 files can define these macros differently.
6339 @end defmac
6340
6341 @defmac ASM_FPRINTF_EXTENSIONS (@var{file}, @var{argptr}, @var{format})
6342 If defined this macro should expand to a series of @code{case}
6343 statements which will be parsed inside the @code{switch} statement of
6344 the @code{asm_fprintf} function. This allows targets to define extra
6345 printf formats which may useful when generating their assembler
6346 statements. Note that uppercase letters are reserved for future
6347 generic extensions to asm_fprintf, and so are not available to target
6348 specific code. The output file is given by the parameter @var{file}.
6349 The varargs input pointer is @var{argptr} and the rest of the format
6350 string, starting the character after the one that is being switched
6351 upon, is pointed to by @var{format}.
6352 @end defmac
6353
6354 @defmac ASSEMBLER_DIALECT
6355 If your target supports multiple dialects of assembler language (such as
6356 different opcodes), define this macro as a C expression that gives the
6357 numeric index of the assembler language dialect to use, with zero as the
6358 first variant.
6359
6360 If this macro is defined, you may use constructs of the form
6361 @smallexample
6362 @samp{@{option0|option1|option2@dots{}@}}
6363 @end smallexample
6364 @noindent
6365 in the output templates of patterns (@pxref{Output Template}) or in the
6366 first argument of @code{asm_fprintf}. This construct outputs
6367 @samp{option0}, @samp{option1}, @samp{option2}, etc., if the value of
6368 @code{ASSEMBLER_DIALECT} is zero, one, two, etc. Any special characters
6369 within these strings retain their usual meaning. If there are fewer
6370 alternatives within the braces than the value of
6371 @code{ASSEMBLER_DIALECT}, the construct outputs nothing. If it's needed
6372 to print curly braces or @samp{|} character in assembler output directly,
6373 @samp{%@{}, @samp{%@}} and @samp{%|} can be used.
6374
6375 If you do not define this macro, the characters @samp{@{}, @samp{|} and
6376 @samp{@}} do not have any special meaning when used in templates or
6377 operands to @code{asm_fprintf}.
6378
6379 Define the macros @code{REGISTER_PREFIX}, @code{LOCAL_LABEL_PREFIX},
6380 @code{USER_LABEL_PREFIX} and @code{IMMEDIATE_PREFIX} if you can express
6381 the variations in assembler language syntax with that mechanism. Define
6382 @code{ASSEMBLER_DIALECT} and use the @samp{@{option0|option1@}} syntax
6383 if the syntax variant are larger and involve such things as different
6384 opcodes or operand order.
6385 @end defmac
6386
6387 @defmac ASM_OUTPUT_REG_PUSH (@var{stream}, @var{regno})
6388 A C expression to output to @var{stream} some assembler code
6389 which will push hard register number @var{regno} onto the stack.
6390 The code need not be optimal, since this macro is used only when
6391 profiling.
6392 @end defmac
6393
6394 @defmac ASM_OUTPUT_REG_POP (@var{stream}, @var{regno})
6395 A C expression to output to @var{stream} some assembler code
6396 which will pop hard register number @var{regno} off of the stack.
6397 The code need not be optimal, since this macro is used only when
6398 profiling.
6399 @end defmac
6400
6401 @node Dispatch Tables
6402 @subsection Output of Dispatch Tables
6403
6404 @c prevent bad page break with this line
6405 This concerns dispatch tables.
6406
6407 @cindex dispatch table
6408 @defmac ASM_OUTPUT_ADDR_DIFF_ELT (@var{stream}, @var{body}, @var{value}, @var{rel})
6409 A C statement to output to the stdio stream @var{stream} an assembler
6410 pseudo-instruction to generate a difference between two labels.
6411 @var{value} and @var{rel} are the numbers of two internal labels. The
6412 definitions of these labels are output using
6413 @code{(*targetm.asm_out.internal_label)}, and they must be printed in the same
6414 way here. For example,
6415
6416 @smallexample
6417 fprintf (@var{stream}, "\t.word L%d-L%d\n",
6418 @var{value}, @var{rel})
6419 @end smallexample
6420
6421 You must provide this macro on machines where the addresses in a
6422 dispatch table are relative to the table's own address. If defined, GCC
6423 will also use this macro on all machines when producing PIC@.
6424 @var{body} is the body of the @code{ADDR_DIFF_VEC}; it is provided so that the
6425 mode and flags can be read.
6426 @end defmac
6427
6428 @defmac ASM_OUTPUT_ADDR_VEC_ELT (@var{stream}, @var{value})
6429 This macro should be provided on machines where the addresses
6430 in a dispatch table are absolute.
6431
6432 The definition should be a C statement to output to the stdio stream
6433 @var{stream} an assembler pseudo-instruction to generate a reference to
6434 a label. @var{value} is the number of an internal label whose
6435 definition is output using @code{(*targetm.asm_out.internal_label)}.
6436 For example,
6437
6438 @smallexample
6439 fprintf (@var{stream}, "\t.word L%d\n", @var{value})
6440 @end smallexample
6441 @end defmac
6442
6443 @defmac ASM_OUTPUT_CASE_LABEL (@var{stream}, @var{prefix}, @var{num}, @var{table})
6444 Define this if the label before a jump-table needs to be output
6445 specially. The first three arguments are the same as for
6446 @code{(*targetm.asm_out.internal_label)}; the fourth argument is the
6447 jump-table which follows (a @code{jump_table_data} containing an
6448 @code{addr_vec} or @code{addr_diff_vec}).
6449
6450 This feature is used on system V to output a @code{swbeg} statement
6451 for the table.
6452
6453 If this macro is not defined, these labels are output with
6454 @code{(*targetm.asm_out.internal_label)}.
6455 @end defmac
6456
6457 @defmac ASM_OUTPUT_CASE_END (@var{stream}, @var{num}, @var{table})
6458 Define this if something special must be output at the end of a
6459 jump-table. The definition should be a C statement to be executed
6460 after the assembler code for the table is written. It should write
6461 the appropriate code to stdio stream @var{stream}. The argument
6462 @var{table} is the jump-table insn, and @var{num} is the label-number
6463 of the preceding label.
6464
6465 If this macro is not defined, nothing special is output at the end of
6466 the jump-table.
6467 @end defmac
6468
6469 @hook TARGET_ASM_POST_CFI_STARTPROC
6470
6471 @hook TARGET_ASM_EMIT_UNWIND_LABEL
6472
6473 @hook TARGET_ASM_EMIT_EXCEPT_TABLE_LABEL
6474
6475 @hook TARGET_ASM_EMIT_EXCEPT_PERSONALITY
6476
6477 @hook TARGET_ASM_UNWIND_EMIT
6478
6479 @hook TARGET_ASM_MAKE_EH_SYMBOL_INDIRECT
6480
6481 @hook TARGET_ASM_UNWIND_EMIT_BEFORE_INSN
6482
6483 @hook TARGET_ASM_SHOULD_RESTORE_CFA_STATE
6484
6485 @node Exception Region Output
6486 @subsection Assembler Commands for Exception Regions
6487
6488 @c prevent bad page break with this line
6489
6490 This describes commands marking the start and the end of an exception
6491 region.
6492
6493 @defmac EH_FRAME_SECTION_NAME
6494 If defined, a C string constant for the name of the section containing
6495 exception handling frame unwind information. If not defined, GCC will
6496 provide a default definition if the target supports named sections.
6497 @file{crtstuff.c} uses this macro to switch to the appropriate section.
6498
6499 You should define this symbol if your target supports DWARF 2 frame
6500 unwind information and the default definition does not work.
6501 @end defmac
6502
6503 @defmac EH_FRAME_THROUGH_COLLECT2
6504 If defined, DWARF 2 frame unwind information will identified by
6505 specially named labels. The collect2 process will locate these
6506 labels and generate code to register the frames.
6507
6508 This might be necessary, for instance, if the system linker will not
6509 place the eh_frames in-between the sentinals from @file{crtstuff.c},
6510 or if the system linker does garbage collection and sections cannot
6511 be marked as not to be collected.
6512 @end defmac
6513
6514 @defmac EH_TABLES_CAN_BE_READ_ONLY
6515 Define this macro to 1 if your target is such that no frame unwind
6516 information encoding used with non-PIC code will ever require a
6517 runtime relocation, but the linker may not support merging read-only
6518 and read-write sections into a single read-write section.
6519 @end defmac
6520
6521 @defmac MASK_RETURN_ADDR
6522 An rtx used to mask the return address found via @code{RETURN_ADDR_RTX}, so
6523 that it does not contain any extraneous set bits in it.
6524 @end defmac
6525
6526 @defmac DWARF2_UNWIND_INFO
6527 Define this macro to 0 if your target supports DWARF 2 frame unwind
6528 information, but it does not yet work with exception handling.
6529 Otherwise, if your target supports this information (if it defines
6530 @code{INCOMING_RETURN_ADDR_RTX} and @code{OBJECT_FORMAT_ELF}),
6531 GCC will provide a default definition of 1.
6532 @end defmac
6533
6534 @hook TARGET_EXCEPT_UNWIND_INFO
6535 This hook defines the mechanism that will be used for exception handling
6536 by the target. If the target has ABI specified unwind tables, the hook
6537 should return @code{UI_TARGET}. If the target is to use the
6538 @code{setjmp}/@code{longjmp}-based exception handling scheme, the hook
6539 should return @code{UI_SJLJ}. If the target supports DWARF 2 frame unwind
6540 information, the hook should return @code{UI_DWARF2}.
6541
6542 A target may, if exceptions are disabled, choose to return @code{UI_NONE}.
6543 This may end up simplifying other parts of target-specific code. The
6544 default implementation of this hook never returns @code{UI_NONE}.
6545
6546 Note that the value returned by this hook should be constant. It should
6547 not depend on anything except the command-line switches described by
6548 @var{opts}. In particular, the
6549 setting @code{UI_SJLJ} must be fixed at compiler start-up as C pre-processor
6550 macros and builtin functions related to exception handling are set up
6551 depending on this setting.
6552
6553 The default implementation of the hook first honors the
6554 @option{--enable-sjlj-exceptions} configure option, then
6555 @code{DWARF2_UNWIND_INFO}, and finally defaults to @code{UI_SJLJ}. If
6556 @code{DWARF2_UNWIND_INFO} depends on command-line options, the target
6557 must define this hook so that @var{opts} is used correctly.
6558 @end deftypefn
6559
6560 @hook TARGET_UNWIND_TABLES_DEFAULT
6561 This variable should be set to @code{true} if the target ABI requires unwinding
6562 tables even when exceptions are not used. It must not be modified by
6563 command-line option processing.
6564 @end deftypevr
6565
6566 @defmac DONT_USE_BUILTIN_SETJMP
6567 Define this macro to 1 if the @code{setjmp}/@code{longjmp}-based scheme
6568 should use the @code{setjmp}/@code{longjmp} functions from the C library
6569 instead of the @code{__builtin_setjmp}/@code{__builtin_longjmp} machinery.
6570 @end defmac
6571
6572 @defmac JMP_BUF_SIZE
6573 This macro has no effect unless @code{DONT_USE_BUILTIN_SETJMP} is also
6574 defined. Define this macro if the default size of @code{jmp_buf} buffer
6575 for the @code{setjmp}/@code{longjmp}-based exception handling mechanism
6576 is not large enough, or if it is much too large.
6577 The default size is @code{FIRST_PSEUDO_REGISTER * sizeof(void *)}.
6578 @end defmac
6579
6580 @defmac DWARF_CIE_DATA_ALIGNMENT
6581 This macro need only be defined if the target might save registers in the
6582 function prologue at an offset to the stack pointer that is not aligned to
6583 @code{UNITS_PER_WORD}. The definition should be the negative minimum
6584 alignment if @code{STACK_GROWS_DOWNWARD} is true, and the positive
6585 minimum alignment otherwise. @xref{DWARF}. Only applicable if
6586 the target supports DWARF 2 frame unwind information.
6587 @end defmac
6588
6589 @hook TARGET_TERMINATE_DW2_EH_FRAME_INFO
6590
6591 @hook TARGET_DWARF_REGISTER_SPAN
6592
6593 @hook TARGET_DWARF_FRAME_REG_MODE
6594
6595 @hook TARGET_INIT_DWARF_REG_SIZES_EXTRA
6596
6597 @hook TARGET_ASM_TTYPE
6598
6599 @hook TARGET_ARM_EABI_UNWINDER
6600
6601 @node Alignment Output
6602 @subsection Assembler Commands for Alignment
6603
6604 @c prevent bad page break with this line
6605 This describes commands for alignment.
6606
6607 @defmac JUMP_ALIGN (@var{label})
6608 The alignment (log base 2) to put in front of @var{label}, which is
6609 a common destination of jumps and has no fallthru incoming edge.
6610
6611 This macro need not be defined if you don't want any special alignment
6612 to be done at such a time. Most machine descriptions do not currently
6613 define the macro.
6614
6615 Unless it's necessary to inspect the @var{label} parameter, it is better
6616 to set the variable @var{align_jumps} in the target's
6617 @code{TARGET_OPTION_OVERRIDE}. Otherwise, you should try to honor the user's
6618 selection in @var{align_jumps} in a @code{JUMP_ALIGN} implementation.
6619 @end defmac
6620
6621 @defmac LABEL_ALIGN_AFTER_BARRIER (@var{label})
6622 The alignment (log base 2) to put in front of @var{label}, which follows
6623 a @code{BARRIER}.
6624
6625 This macro need not be defined if you don't want any special alignment
6626 to be done at such a time. Most machine descriptions do not currently
6627 define the macro.
6628 @end defmac
6629
6630 @defmac LOOP_ALIGN (@var{label})
6631 The alignment (log base 2) to put in front of @var{label} that heads
6632 a frequently executed basic block (usually the header of a loop).
6633
6634 This macro need not be defined if you don't want any special alignment
6635 to be done at such a time. Most machine descriptions do not currently
6636 define the macro.
6637
6638 Unless it's necessary to inspect the @var{label} parameter, it is better
6639 to set the variable @code{align_loops} in the target's
6640 @code{TARGET_OPTION_OVERRIDE}. Otherwise, you should try to honor the user's
6641 selection in @code{align_loops} in a @code{LOOP_ALIGN} implementation.
6642 @end defmac
6643
6644 @defmac LABEL_ALIGN (@var{label})
6645 The alignment (log base 2) to put in front of @var{label}.
6646 If @code{LABEL_ALIGN_AFTER_BARRIER} / @code{LOOP_ALIGN} specify a different alignment,
6647 the maximum of the specified values is used.
6648
6649 Unless it's necessary to inspect the @var{label} parameter, it is better
6650 to set the variable @code{align_labels} in the target's
6651 @code{TARGET_OPTION_OVERRIDE}. Otherwise, you should try to honor the user's
6652 selection in @code{align_labels} in a @code{LABEL_ALIGN} implementation.
6653 @end defmac
6654
6655 @defmac ASM_OUTPUT_SKIP (@var{stream}, @var{nbytes})
6656 A C statement to output to the stdio stream @var{stream} an assembler
6657 instruction to advance the location counter by @var{nbytes} bytes.
6658 Those bytes should be zero when loaded. @var{nbytes} will be a C
6659 expression of type @code{unsigned HOST_WIDE_INT}.
6660 @end defmac
6661
6662 @defmac ASM_NO_SKIP_IN_TEXT
6663 Define this macro if @code{ASM_OUTPUT_SKIP} should not be used in the
6664 text section because it fails to put zeros in the bytes that are skipped.
6665 This is true on many Unix systems, where the pseudo--op to skip bytes
6666 produces no-op instructions rather than zeros when used in the text
6667 section.
6668 @end defmac
6669
6670 @defmac ASM_OUTPUT_ALIGN (@var{stream}, @var{power})
6671 A C statement to output to the stdio stream @var{stream} an assembler
6672 command to advance the location counter to a multiple of 2 to the
6673 @var{power} bytes. @var{power} will be a C expression of type @code{int}.
6674 @end defmac
6675
6676 @defmac ASM_OUTPUT_ALIGN_WITH_NOP (@var{stream}, @var{power})
6677 Like @code{ASM_OUTPUT_ALIGN}, except that the ``nop'' instruction is used
6678 for padding, if necessary.
6679 @end defmac
6680
6681 @defmac ASM_OUTPUT_MAX_SKIP_ALIGN (@var{stream}, @var{power}, @var{max_skip})
6682 A C statement to output to the stdio stream @var{stream} an assembler
6683 command to advance the location counter to a multiple of 2 to the
6684 @var{power} bytes, but only if @var{max_skip} or fewer bytes are needed to
6685 satisfy the alignment request. @var{power} and @var{max_skip} will be
6686 a C expression of type @code{int}.
6687 @end defmac
6688
6689 @need 3000
6690 @node Debugging Info
6691 @section Controlling Debugging Information Format
6692
6693 @c prevent bad page break with this line
6694 This describes how to specify debugging information.
6695
6696 @menu
6697 * All Debuggers:: Macros that affect all debugging formats uniformly.
6698 * DWARF:: Macros for DWARF format.
6699 * VMS Debug:: Macros for VMS debug format.
6700 * CTF Debug:: Macros for CTF debug format.
6701 * BTF Debug:: Macros for BTF debug format.
6702 @end menu
6703
6704 @node All Debuggers
6705 @subsection Macros Affecting All Debugging Formats
6706
6707 @c prevent bad page break with this line
6708 These macros affect all debugging formats.
6709
6710 @defmac DEBUGGER_REGNO (@var{regno})
6711 A C expression that returns the debugger register number for the compiler
6712 register number @var{regno}. In the default macro provided, the value
6713 of this expression will be @var{regno} itself. But sometimes there are
6714 some registers that the compiler knows about and debugger does not, or vice
6715 versa. In such cases, some register may need to have one number in the
6716 compiler and another for debugger@.
6717
6718 If two registers have consecutive numbers inside GCC, and they can be
6719 used as a pair to hold a multiword value, then they @emph{must} have
6720 consecutive numbers after renumbering with @code{DEBUGGER_REGNO}.
6721 Otherwise, debuggers will be unable to access such a pair, because they
6722 expect register pairs to be consecutive in their own numbering scheme.
6723
6724 If you find yourself defining @code{DEBUGGER_REGNO} in way that
6725 does not preserve register pairs, then what you must do instead is
6726 redefine the actual register numbering scheme.
6727 @end defmac
6728
6729 @defmac DEBUGGER_AUTO_OFFSET (@var{x})
6730 A C expression that returns the integer offset value for an automatic
6731 variable having address @var{x} (an RTL expression). The default
6732 computation assumes that @var{x} is based on the frame-pointer and
6733 gives the offset from the frame-pointer. This is required for targets
6734 that produce debugging output for debugger and allow the frame-pointer to be
6735 eliminated when the @option{-g} option is used.
6736 @end defmac
6737
6738 @defmac DEBUGGER_ARG_OFFSET (@var{offset}, @var{x})
6739 A C expression that returns the integer offset value for an argument
6740 having address @var{x} (an RTL expression). The nominal offset is
6741 @var{offset}.
6742 @end defmac
6743
6744 @defmac PREFERRED_DEBUGGING_TYPE
6745 A C expression that returns the type of debugging output GCC should
6746 produce when the user specifies just @option{-g}. Define
6747 this if you have arranged for GCC to support more than one format of
6748 debugging output. Currently, the allowable values are
6749 @code{DWARF2_DEBUG}, @code{VMS_DEBUG},
6750 and @code{VMS_AND_DWARF2_DEBUG}.
6751
6752 When the user specifies @option{-ggdb}, GCC normally also uses the
6753 value of this macro to select the debugging output format, but with two
6754 exceptions. If @code{DWARF2_DEBUGGING_INFO} is defined, GCC uses the
6755 value @code{DWARF2_DEBUG}.
6756
6757 The value of this macro only affects the default debugging output; the
6758 user can always get a specific type of output by using @option{-gdwarf-2},
6759 or @option{-gvms}.
6760 @end defmac
6761
6762 @defmac DEFAULT_GDB_EXTENSIONS
6763 Define this macro to control whether GCC should by default generate
6764 GDB's extended version of debugging information. If you don't define the
6765 macro, the default is 1: always generate the extended information
6766 if there is any occasion to.
6767 @end defmac
6768
6769 @need 2000
6770 @node DWARF
6771 @subsection Macros for DWARF Output
6772
6773 @c prevent bad page break with this line
6774 Here are macros for DWARF output.
6775
6776 @defmac DWARF2_DEBUGGING_INFO
6777 Define this macro if GCC should produce dwarf version 2 format
6778 debugging output in response to the @option{-g} option.
6779
6780 To support optional call frame debugging information, you must also
6781 define @code{INCOMING_RETURN_ADDR_RTX} and either set
6782 @code{RTX_FRAME_RELATED_P} on the prologue insns if you use RTL for the
6783 prologue, or call @code{dwarf2out_def_cfa} and @code{dwarf2out_reg_save}
6784 as appropriate from @code{TARGET_ASM_FUNCTION_PROLOGUE} if you don't.
6785 @end defmac
6786
6787 @hook TARGET_DWARF_CALLING_CONVENTION
6788
6789 @defmac DWARF2_FRAME_INFO
6790 Define this macro to a nonzero value if GCC should always output
6791 Dwarf 2 frame information. If @code{TARGET_EXCEPT_UNWIND_INFO}
6792 (@pxref{Exception Region Output}) returns @code{UI_DWARF2}, and
6793 exceptions are enabled, GCC will output this information not matter
6794 how you define @code{DWARF2_FRAME_INFO}.
6795 @end defmac
6796
6797 @hook TARGET_DEBUG_UNWIND_INFO
6798
6799 @defmac DWARF2_ASM_LINE_DEBUG_INFO
6800 Define this macro to be a nonzero value if the assembler can generate Dwarf 2
6801 line debug info sections. This will result in much more compact line number
6802 tables, and hence is desirable if it works.
6803 @end defmac
6804
6805 @defmac DWARF2_ASM_VIEW_DEBUG_INFO
6806 Define this macro to be a nonzero value if the assembler supports view
6807 assignment and verification in @code{.loc}. If it does not, but the
6808 user enables location views, the compiler may have to fallback to
6809 internal line number tables.
6810 @end defmac
6811
6812 @hook TARGET_RESET_LOCATION_VIEW
6813
6814 @hook TARGET_WANT_DEBUG_PUB_SECTIONS
6815
6816 @hook TARGET_DELAY_SCHED2
6817
6818 @hook TARGET_DELAY_VARTRACK
6819
6820 @hook TARGET_NO_REGISTER_ALLOCATION
6821
6822 @defmac ASM_OUTPUT_DWARF_DELTA (@var{stream}, @var{size}, @var{label1}, @var{label2})
6823 A C statement to issue assembly directives that create a difference
6824 @var{lab1} minus @var{lab2}, using an integer of the given @var{size}.
6825 @end defmac
6826
6827 @defmac ASM_OUTPUT_DWARF_VMS_DELTA (@var{stream}, @var{size}, @var{label1}, @var{label2})
6828 A C statement to issue assembly directives that create a difference
6829 between the two given labels in system defined units, e.g.@: instruction
6830 slots on IA64 VMS, using an integer of the given size.
6831 @end defmac
6832
6833 @defmac ASM_OUTPUT_DWARF_OFFSET (@var{stream}, @var{size}, @var{label}, @var{offset}, @var{section})
6834 A C statement to issue assembly directives that create a
6835 section-relative reference to the given @var{label} plus @var{offset}, using
6836 an integer of the given @var{size}. The label is known to be defined in the
6837 given @var{section}.
6838 @end defmac
6839
6840 @defmac ASM_OUTPUT_DWARF_PCREL (@var{stream}, @var{size}, @var{label})
6841 A C statement to issue assembly directives that create a self-relative
6842 reference to the given @var{label}, using an integer of the given @var{size}.
6843 @end defmac
6844
6845 @defmac ASM_OUTPUT_DWARF_DATAREL (@var{stream}, @var{size}, @var{label})
6846 A C statement to issue assembly directives that create a reference to the
6847 given @var{label} relative to the dbase, using an integer of the given @var{size}.
6848 @end defmac
6849
6850 @defmac ASM_OUTPUT_DWARF_TABLE_REF (@var{label})
6851 A C statement to issue assembly directives that create a reference to
6852 the DWARF table identifier @var{label} from the current section. This
6853 is used on some systems to avoid garbage collecting a DWARF table which
6854 is referenced by a function.
6855 @end defmac
6856
6857 @hook TARGET_ASM_OUTPUT_DWARF_DTPREL
6858
6859 @need 2000
6860 @node VMS Debug
6861 @subsection Macros for VMS Debug Format
6862
6863 @c prevent bad page break with this line
6864 Here are macros for VMS debug format.
6865
6866 @defmac VMS_DEBUGGING_INFO
6867 Define this macro if GCC should produce debugging output for VMS
6868 in response to the @option{-g} option. The default behavior for VMS
6869 is to generate minimal debug info for a traceback in the absence of
6870 @option{-g} unless explicitly overridden with @option{-g0}. This
6871 behavior is controlled by @code{TARGET_OPTION_OPTIMIZATION} and
6872 @code{TARGET_OPTION_OVERRIDE}.
6873 @end defmac
6874
6875 @need 2000
6876 @node CTF Debug
6877 @subsection Macros for CTF Debug Format
6878
6879 @c prevent bad page break with this line
6880 Here are macros for CTF debug format.
6881
6882 @defmac CTF_DEBUGGING_INFO
6883 Define this macro if GCC should produce debugging output in CTF debug
6884 format in response to the @option{-gctf} option.
6885 @end defmac
6886
6887 @need 2000
6888 @node BTF Debug
6889 @subsection Macros for BTF Debug Format
6890
6891 @c prevent bad page break with this line
6892 Here are macros for BTF debug format.
6893
6894 @defmac BTF_DEBUGGING_INFO
6895 Define this macro if GCC should produce debugging output in BTF debug
6896 format in response to the @option{-gbtf} option.
6897 @end defmac
6898
6899 @node Floating Point
6900 @section Cross Compilation and Floating Point
6901 @cindex cross compilation and floating point
6902 @cindex floating point and cross compilation
6903
6904 While all modern machines use twos-complement representation for integers,
6905 there are a variety of representations for floating point numbers. This
6906 means that in a cross-compiler the representation of floating point numbers
6907 in the compiled program may be different from that used in the machine
6908 doing the compilation.
6909
6910 Because different representation systems may offer different amounts of
6911 range and precision, all floating point constants must be represented in
6912 the target machine's format. Therefore, the cross compiler cannot
6913 safely use the host machine's floating point arithmetic; it must emulate
6914 the target's arithmetic. To ensure consistency, GCC always uses
6915 emulation to work with floating point values, even when the host and
6916 target floating point formats are identical.
6917
6918 The following macros are provided by @file{real.h} for the compiler to
6919 use. All parts of the compiler which generate or optimize
6920 floating-point calculations must use these macros. They may evaluate
6921 their operands more than once, so operands must not have side effects.
6922
6923 @defmac REAL_VALUE_TYPE
6924 The C data type to be used to hold a floating point value in the target
6925 machine's format. Typically this is a @code{struct} containing an
6926 array of @code{HOST_WIDE_INT}, but all code should treat it as an opaque
6927 quantity.
6928 @end defmac
6929
6930 @deftypefn Macro HOST_WIDE_INT REAL_VALUE_FIX (REAL_VALUE_TYPE @var{x})
6931 Truncates @var{x} to a signed integer, rounding toward zero.
6932 @end deftypefn
6933
6934 @deftypefn Macro {unsigned HOST_WIDE_INT} REAL_VALUE_UNSIGNED_FIX (REAL_VALUE_TYPE @var{x})
6935 Truncates @var{x} to an unsigned integer, rounding toward zero. If
6936 @var{x} is negative, returns zero.
6937 @end deftypefn
6938
6939 @deftypefn Macro REAL_VALUE_TYPE REAL_VALUE_ATOF (const char *@var{string}, machine_mode @var{mode})
6940 Converts @var{string} into a floating point number in the target machine's
6941 representation for mode @var{mode}. This routine can handle both
6942 decimal and hexadecimal floating point constants, using the syntax
6943 defined by the C language for both.
6944 @end deftypefn
6945
6946 @deftypefn Macro int REAL_VALUE_NEGATIVE (REAL_VALUE_TYPE @var{x})
6947 Returns 1 if @var{x} is negative (including negative zero), 0 otherwise.
6948 @end deftypefn
6949
6950 @deftypefn Macro int REAL_VALUE_ISINF (REAL_VALUE_TYPE @var{x})
6951 Determines whether @var{x} represents infinity (positive or negative).
6952 @end deftypefn
6953
6954 @deftypefn Macro int REAL_VALUE_ISNAN (REAL_VALUE_TYPE @var{x})
6955 Determines whether @var{x} represents a ``NaN'' (not-a-number).
6956 @end deftypefn
6957
6958 @deftypefn Macro REAL_VALUE_TYPE REAL_VALUE_NEGATE (REAL_VALUE_TYPE @var{x})
6959 Returns the negative of the floating point value @var{x}.
6960 @end deftypefn
6961
6962 @deftypefn Macro REAL_VALUE_TYPE REAL_VALUE_ABS (REAL_VALUE_TYPE @var{x})
6963 Returns the absolute value of @var{x}.
6964 @end deftypefn
6965
6966 @node Mode Switching
6967 @section Mode Switching Instructions
6968 @cindex mode switching
6969 The following macros control mode switching optimizations:
6970
6971 @defmac OPTIMIZE_MODE_SWITCHING (@var{entity})
6972 Define this macro if the port needs extra instructions inserted for mode
6973 switching.
6974
6975 For an example, the SH4 can perform both single and double precision
6976 floating point operations, but to perform a single precision operation,
6977 the FPSCR PR bit has to be cleared, while for a double precision
6978 operation, this bit has to be set. Changing the PR bit requires a general
6979 purpose register as a scratch register, hence these FPSCR sets have to
6980 be inserted before reload, i.e.@: you cannot put this into instruction emitting
6981 or @code{TARGET_MACHINE_DEPENDENT_REORG}.
6982
6983 You can have multiple entities that are mode-switched, some of which might
6984 only be needed conditionally. The entities are identified by their index
6985 into the @code{NUM_MODES_FOR_MODE_SWITCHING} initializer, with the length
6986 of the initializer determining the number of entities.
6987
6988 @code{OPTIMIZE_MODE_SWITCHING} should return nonzero for any @var{entity}
6989 that needs mode-switching.
6990
6991 If you define this macro, you also have to define
6992 @code{NUM_MODES_FOR_MODE_SWITCHING}, @code{TARGET_MODE_NEEDED},
6993 @code{TARGET_MODE_PRIORITY} and @code{TARGET_MODE_EMIT}.
6994 The other macros in this section are optional.
6995 @end defmac
6996
6997 @defmac NUM_MODES_FOR_MODE_SWITCHING
6998 If you define @code{OPTIMIZE_MODE_SWITCHING}, you have to define this as
6999 initializer for an array of integers. Each initializer element
7000 N refers to an entity that needs mode switching, and specifies the number
7001 of different modes that are defined for that entity.
7002 The position of the element in the initializer---starting counting at
7003 zero---determines the integer that is used to refer to the mode-switched
7004 entity in question.
7005 Modes are represented as numbers 0 @dots{} N @minus{} 1.
7006 In mode arguments and return values, N either represents an unknown
7007 mode or ``no mode'', depending on context.
7008 @end defmac
7009
7010 @hook TARGET_MODE_EMIT
7011
7012 @hook TARGET_MODE_NEEDED
7013
7014 @hook TARGET_MODE_AFTER
7015
7016 @hook TARGET_MODE_CONFLUENCE
7017
7018 @hook TARGET_MODE_BACKPROP
7019
7020 @hook TARGET_MODE_ENTRY
7021
7022 @hook TARGET_MODE_EXIT
7023
7024 @hook TARGET_MODE_EH_HANDLER
7025
7026 @hook TARGET_MODE_PRIORITY
7027
7028 @node Target Attributes
7029 @section Defining target-specific uses of @code{__attribute__}
7030 @cindex target attributes
7031 @cindex machine attributes
7032 @cindex attributes, target-specific
7033
7034 Target-specific attributes may be defined for functions, data and types.
7035 These are described using the following target hooks; they also need to
7036 be documented in @file{extend.texi}.
7037
7038 @hook TARGET_ATTRIBUTE_TABLE
7039
7040 @hook TARGET_ATTRIBUTE_TAKES_IDENTIFIER_P
7041
7042 @hook TARGET_COMP_TYPE_ATTRIBUTES
7043
7044 @hook TARGET_SET_DEFAULT_TYPE_ATTRIBUTES
7045
7046 @hook TARGET_MERGE_TYPE_ATTRIBUTES
7047
7048 @hook TARGET_MERGE_DECL_ATTRIBUTES
7049
7050 @hook TARGET_VALID_DLLIMPORT_ATTRIBUTE_P
7051
7052 @defmac TARGET_DECLSPEC
7053 Define this macro to a nonzero value if you want to treat
7054 @code{__declspec(X)} as equivalent to @code{__attribute((X))}. By
7055 default, this behavior is enabled only for targets that define
7056 @code{TARGET_DLLIMPORT_DECL_ATTRIBUTES}. The current implementation
7057 of @code{__declspec} is via a built-in macro, but you should not rely
7058 on this implementation detail.
7059 @end defmac
7060
7061 @hook TARGET_INSERT_ATTRIBUTES
7062
7063 @hook TARGET_HANDLE_GENERIC_ATTRIBUTE
7064
7065 @hook TARGET_FUNCTION_ATTRIBUTE_INLINABLE_P
7066
7067 @hook TARGET_OPTION_VALID_ATTRIBUTE_P
7068
7069 @hook TARGET_OPTION_VALID_VERSION_ATTRIBUTE_P
7070
7071 @hook TARGET_OPTION_SAVE
7072
7073 @hook TARGET_OPTION_RESTORE
7074
7075 @hook TARGET_OPTION_POST_STREAM_IN
7076
7077 @hook TARGET_OPTION_PRINT
7078
7079 @hook TARGET_OPTION_PRAGMA_PARSE
7080
7081 @hook TARGET_OPTION_OVERRIDE
7082
7083 @hook TARGET_OPTION_FUNCTION_VERSIONS
7084
7085 @hook TARGET_CAN_INLINE_P
7086
7087 @hook TARGET_UPDATE_IPA_FN_TARGET_INFO
7088
7089 @hook TARGET_NEED_IPA_FN_TARGET_INFO
7090
7091 @hook TARGET_RELAYOUT_FUNCTION
7092
7093 @node Emulated TLS
7094 @section Emulating TLS
7095 @cindex Emulated TLS
7096
7097 For targets whose psABI does not provide Thread Local Storage via
7098 specific relocations and instruction sequences, an emulation layer is
7099 used. A set of target hooks allows this emulation layer to be
7100 configured for the requirements of a particular target. For instance
7101 the psABI may in fact specify TLS support in terms of an emulation
7102 layer.
7103
7104 The emulation layer works by creating a control object for every TLS
7105 object. To access the TLS object, a lookup function is provided
7106 which, when given the address of the control object, will return the
7107 address of the current thread's instance of the TLS object.
7108
7109 @hook TARGET_EMUTLS_GET_ADDRESS
7110
7111 @hook TARGET_EMUTLS_REGISTER_COMMON
7112
7113 @hook TARGET_EMUTLS_VAR_SECTION
7114
7115 @hook TARGET_EMUTLS_TMPL_SECTION
7116
7117 @hook TARGET_EMUTLS_VAR_PREFIX
7118
7119 @hook TARGET_EMUTLS_TMPL_PREFIX
7120
7121 @hook TARGET_EMUTLS_VAR_FIELDS
7122
7123 @hook TARGET_EMUTLS_VAR_INIT
7124
7125 @hook TARGET_EMUTLS_VAR_ALIGN_FIXED
7126
7127 @hook TARGET_EMUTLS_DEBUG_FORM_TLS_ADDRESS
7128
7129 @node MIPS Coprocessors
7130 @section Defining coprocessor specifics for MIPS targets.
7131 @cindex MIPS coprocessor-definition macros
7132
7133 The MIPS specification allows MIPS implementations to have as many as 4
7134 coprocessors, each with as many as 32 private registers. GCC supports
7135 accessing these registers and transferring values between the registers
7136 and memory using asm-ized variables. For example:
7137
7138 @smallexample
7139 register unsigned int cp0count asm ("c0r1");
7140 unsigned int d;
7141
7142 d = cp0count + 3;
7143 @end smallexample
7144
7145 (``c0r1'' is the default name of register 1 in coprocessor 0; alternate
7146 names may be added as described below, or the default names may be
7147 overridden entirely in @code{SUBTARGET_CONDITIONAL_REGISTER_USAGE}.)
7148
7149 Coprocessor registers are assumed to be epilogue-used; sets to them will
7150 be preserved even if it does not appear that the register is used again
7151 later in the function.
7152
7153 Another note: according to the MIPS spec, coprocessor 1 (if present) is
7154 the FPU@. One accesses COP1 registers through standard mips
7155 floating-point support; they are not included in this mechanism.
7156
7157 @node PCH Target
7158 @section Parameters for Precompiled Header Validity Checking
7159 @cindex parameters, precompiled headers
7160
7161 @hook TARGET_GET_PCH_VALIDITY
7162
7163 @hook TARGET_PCH_VALID_P
7164
7165 @hook TARGET_CHECK_PCH_TARGET_FLAGS
7166
7167 @hook TARGET_PREPARE_PCH_SAVE
7168
7169 @node C++ ABI
7170 @section C++ ABI parameters
7171 @cindex parameters, c++ abi
7172
7173 @hook TARGET_CXX_GUARD_TYPE
7174
7175 @hook TARGET_CXX_GUARD_MASK_BIT
7176
7177 @hook TARGET_CXX_GET_COOKIE_SIZE
7178
7179 @hook TARGET_CXX_COOKIE_HAS_SIZE
7180
7181 @hook TARGET_CXX_IMPORT_EXPORT_CLASS
7182
7183 @hook TARGET_CXX_CDTOR_RETURNS_THIS
7184
7185 @hook TARGET_CXX_KEY_METHOD_MAY_BE_INLINE
7186
7187 @hook TARGET_CXX_DETERMINE_CLASS_DATA_VISIBILITY
7188
7189 @hook TARGET_CXX_CLASS_DATA_ALWAYS_COMDAT
7190
7191 @hook TARGET_CXX_LIBRARY_RTTI_COMDAT
7192
7193 @hook TARGET_CXX_USE_AEABI_ATEXIT
7194
7195 @hook TARGET_CXX_USE_ATEXIT_FOR_CXA_ATEXIT
7196
7197 @hook TARGET_CXX_ADJUST_CLASS_AT_DEFINITION
7198
7199 @hook TARGET_CXX_DECL_MANGLING_CONTEXT
7200
7201 @node D Language and ABI
7202 @section D ABI parameters
7203 @cindex parameters, d abi
7204
7205 @hook TARGET_D_CPU_VERSIONS
7206
7207 @hook TARGET_D_OS_VERSIONS
7208
7209 @hook TARGET_D_REGISTER_CPU_TARGET_INFO
7210
7211 @hook TARGET_D_REGISTER_OS_TARGET_INFO
7212
7213 @hook TARGET_D_MINFO_SECTION
7214
7215 @hook TARGET_D_MINFO_SECTION_START
7216
7217 @hook TARGET_D_MINFO_SECTION_END
7218
7219 @hook TARGET_D_HAS_STDCALL_CONVENTION
7220
7221 @hook TARGET_D_TEMPLATES_ALWAYS_COMDAT
7222
7223 @node Rust Language and ABI
7224 @section Rust ABI parameters
7225 @cindex parameters, rust abi
7226
7227 @hook TARGET_RUST_CPU_INFO
7228
7229 @hook TARGET_RUST_OS_INFO
7230
7231 @node Named Address Spaces
7232 @section Adding support for named address spaces
7233 @cindex named address spaces
7234
7235 The draft technical report of the ISO/IEC JTC1 S22 WG14 N1275
7236 standards committee, @cite{Programming Languages - C - Extensions to
7237 support embedded processors}, specifies a syntax for embedded
7238 processors to specify alternate address spaces. You can configure a
7239 GCC port to support section 5.1 of the draft report to add support for
7240 address spaces other than the default address space. These address
7241 spaces are new keywords that are similar to the @code{volatile} and
7242 @code{const} type attributes.
7243
7244 Pointers to named address spaces can have a different size than
7245 pointers to the generic address space.
7246
7247 For example, the SPU port uses the @code{__ea} address space to refer
7248 to memory in the host processor, rather than memory local to the SPU
7249 processor. Access to memory in the @code{__ea} address space involves
7250 issuing DMA operations to move data between the host processor and the
7251 local processor memory address space. Pointers in the @code{__ea}
7252 address space are either 32 bits or 64 bits based on the
7253 @option{-mea32} or @option{-mea64} switches (native SPU pointers are
7254 always 32 bits).
7255
7256 Internally, address spaces are represented as a small integer in the
7257 range 0 to 15 with address space 0 being reserved for the generic
7258 address space.
7259
7260 To register a named address space qualifier keyword with the C front end,
7261 the target may call the @code{c_register_addr_space} routine. For example,
7262 the SPU port uses the following to declare @code{__ea} as the keyword for
7263 named address space #1:
7264 @smallexample
7265 #define ADDR_SPACE_EA 1
7266 c_register_addr_space ("__ea", ADDR_SPACE_EA);
7267 @end smallexample
7268
7269 @hook TARGET_ADDR_SPACE_POINTER_MODE
7270
7271 @hook TARGET_ADDR_SPACE_ADDRESS_MODE
7272
7273 @hook TARGET_ADDR_SPACE_VALID_POINTER_MODE
7274
7275 @hook TARGET_ADDR_SPACE_LEGITIMATE_ADDRESS_P
7276
7277 @hook TARGET_ADDR_SPACE_LEGITIMIZE_ADDRESS
7278
7279 @hook TARGET_ADDR_SPACE_SUBSET_P
7280
7281 @hook TARGET_ADDR_SPACE_ZERO_ADDRESS_VALID
7282
7283 @hook TARGET_ADDR_SPACE_CONVERT
7284
7285 @hook TARGET_ADDR_SPACE_DEBUG
7286
7287 @hook TARGET_ADDR_SPACE_DIAGNOSE_USAGE
7288
7289 @node Misc
7290 @section Miscellaneous Parameters
7291 @cindex parameters, miscellaneous
7292
7293 @c prevent bad page break with this line
7294 Here are several miscellaneous parameters.
7295
7296 @defmac HAS_LONG_COND_BRANCH
7297 Define this boolean macro to indicate whether or not your architecture
7298 has conditional branches that can span all of memory. It is used in
7299 conjunction with an optimization that partitions hot and cold basic
7300 blocks into separate sections of the executable. If this macro is
7301 set to false, gcc will convert any conditional branches that attempt
7302 to cross between sections into unconditional branches or indirect jumps.
7303 @end defmac
7304
7305 @defmac HAS_LONG_UNCOND_BRANCH
7306 Define this boolean macro to indicate whether or not your architecture
7307 has unconditional branches that can span all of memory. It is used in
7308 conjunction with an optimization that partitions hot and cold basic
7309 blocks into separate sections of the executable. If this macro is
7310 set to false, gcc will convert any unconditional branches that attempt
7311 to cross between sections into indirect jumps.
7312 @end defmac
7313
7314 @defmac CASE_VECTOR_MODE
7315 An alias for a machine mode name. This is the machine mode that
7316 elements of a jump-table should have.
7317 @end defmac
7318
7319 @defmac CASE_VECTOR_SHORTEN_MODE (@var{min_offset}, @var{max_offset}, @var{body})
7320 Optional: return the preferred mode for an @code{addr_diff_vec}
7321 when the minimum and maximum offset are known. If you define this,
7322 it enables extra code in branch shortening to deal with @code{addr_diff_vec}.
7323 To make this work, you also have to define @code{INSN_ALIGN} and
7324 make the alignment for @code{addr_diff_vec} explicit.
7325 The @var{body} argument is provided so that the offset_unsigned and scale
7326 flags can be updated.
7327 @end defmac
7328
7329 @defmac CASE_VECTOR_PC_RELATIVE
7330 Define this macro to be a C expression to indicate when jump-tables
7331 should contain relative addresses. You need not define this macro if
7332 jump-tables never contain relative addresses, or jump-tables should
7333 contain relative addresses only when @option{-fPIC} or @option{-fPIC}
7334 is in effect.
7335 @end defmac
7336
7337 @hook TARGET_CASE_VALUES_THRESHOLD
7338
7339 @defmac WORD_REGISTER_OPERATIONS
7340 Define this macro to 1 if operations between registers with integral mode
7341 smaller than a word are always performed on the entire register. To be
7342 more explicit, if you start with a pair of @code{word_mode} registers with
7343 known values and you do a subword, for example @code{QImode}, addition on
7344 the low part of the registers, then the compiler may consider that the
7345 result has a known value in @code{word_mode} too if the macro is defined
7346 to 1. Most RISC machines have this property and most CISC machines do not.
7347 @end defmac
7348
7349 @hook TARGET_MIN_ARITHMETIC_PRECISION
7350
7351 @defmac LOAD_EXTEND_OP (@var{mem_mode})
7352 Define this macro to be a C expression indicating when insns that read
7353 memory in @var{mem_mode}, an integral mode narrower than a word, set the
7354 bits outside of @var{mem_mode} to be either the sign-extension or the
7355 zero-extension of the data read. Return @code{SIGN_EXTEND} for values
7356 of @var{mem_mode} for which the
7357 insn sign-extends, @code{ZERO_EXTEND} for which it zero-extends, and
7358 @code{UNKNOWN} for other modes.
7359
7360 This macro is not called with @var{mem_mode} non-integral or with a width
7361 greater than or equal to @code{BITS_PER_WORD}, so you may return any
7362 value in this case. Do not define this macro if it would always return
7363 @code{UNKNOWN}. On machines where this macro is defined, you will normally
7364 define it as the constant @code{SIGN_EXTEND} or @code{ZERO_EXTEND}.
7365
7366 You may return a non-@code{UNKNOWN} value even if for some hard registers
7367 the sign extension is not performed, if for the @code{REGNO_REG_CLASS}
7368 of these hard registers @code{TARGET_CAN_CHANGE_MODE_CLASS} returns false
7369 when the @var{from} mode is @var{mem_mode} and the @var{to} mode is any
7370 integral mode larger than this but not larger than @code{word_mode}.
7371
7372 You must return @code{UNKNOWN} if for some hard registers that allow this
7373 mode, @code{TARGET_CAN_CHANGE_MODE_CLASS} says that they cannot change to
7374 @code{word_mode}, but that they can change to another integral mode that
7375 is larger then @var{mem_mode} but still smaller than @code{word_mode}.
7376 @end defmac
7377
7378 @defmac SHORT_IMMEDIATES_SIGN_EXTEND
7379 Define this macro to 1 if loading short immediate values into registers sign
7380 extends.
7381 @end defmac
7382
7383 @hook TARGET_MIN_DIVISIONS_FOR_RECIP_MUL
7384
7385 @defmac MOVE_MAX
7386 The maximum number of bytes that a single instruction can move quickly
7387 between memory and registers or between two memory locations.
7388 @end defmac
7389
7390 @defmac MAX_MOVE_MAX
7391 The maximum number of bytes that a single instruction can move quickly
7392 between memory and registers or between two memory locations. If this
7393 is undefined, the default is @code{MOVE_MAX}. Otherwise, it is the
7394 constant value that is the largest value that @code{MOVE_MAX} can have
7395 at run-time.
7396 @end defmac
7397
7398 @defmac SHIFT_COUNT_TRUNCATED
7399 A C expression that is nonzero if on this machine the number of bits
7400 actually used for the count of a shift operation is equal to the number
7401 of bits needed to represent the size of the object being shifted. When
7402 this macro is nonzero, the compiler will assume that it is safe to omit
7403 a sign-extend, zero-extend, and certain bitwise `and' instructions that
7404 truncates the count of a shift operation. On machines that have
7405 instructions that act on bit-fields at variable positions, which may
7406 include `bit test' instructions, a nonzero @code{SHIFT_COUNT_TRUNCATED}
7407 also enables deletion of truncations of the values that serve as
7408 arguments to bit-field instructions.
7409
7410 If both types of instructions truncate the count (for shifts) and
7411 position (for bit-field operations), or if no variable-position bit-field
7412 instructions exist, you should define this macro.
7413
7414 However, on some machines, such as the 80386 and the 680x0, truncation
7415 only applies to shift operations and not the (real or pretended)
7416 bit-field operations. Define @code{SHIFT_COUNT_TRUNCATED} to be zero on
7417 such machines. Instead, add patterns to the @file{md} file that include
7418 the implied truncation of the shift instructions.
7419
7420 You need not define this macro if it would always have the value of zero.
7421 @end defmac
7422
7423 @anchor{TARGET_SHIFT_TRUNCATION_MASK}
7424 @hook TARGET_SHIFT_TRUNCATION_MASK
7425
7426 @hook TARGET_TRULY_NOOP_TRUNCATION
7427
7428 @hook TARGET_MODE_REP_EXTENDED
7429
7430 @hook TARGET_SETJMP_PRESERVES_NONVOLATILE_REGS_P
7431
7432 @defmac STORE_FLAG_VALUE
7433 A C expression describing the value returned by a comparison operator
7434 with an integral mode and stored by a store-flag instruction
7435 (@samp{cstore@var{mode}4}) when the condition is true. This description must
7436 apply to @emph{all} the @samp{cstore@var{mode}4} patterns and all the
7437 comparison operators whose results have a @code{MODE_INT} mode.
7438
7439 A value of 1 or @minus{}1 means that the instruction implementing the
7440 comparison operator returns exactly 1 or @minus{}1 when the comparison is true
7441 and 0 when the comparison is false. Otherwise, the value indicates
7442 which bits of the result are guaranteed to be 1 when the comparison is
7443 true. This value is interpreted in the mode of the comparison
7444 operation, which is given by the mode of the first operand in the
7445 @samp{cstore@var{mode}4} pattern. Either the low bit or the sign bit of
7446 @code{STORE_FLAG_VALUE} be on. Presently, only those bits are used by
7447 the compiler.
7448
7449 If @code{STORE_FLAG_VALUE} is neither 1 or @minus{}1, the compiler will
7450 generate code that depends only on the specified bits. It can also
7451 replace comparison operators with equivalent operations if they cause
7452 the required bits to be set, even if the remaining bits are undefined.
7453 For example, on a machine whose comparison operators return an
7454 @code{SImode} value and where @code{STORE_FLAG_VALUE} is defined as
7455 @samp{0x80000000}, saying that just the sign bit is relevant, the
7456 expression
7457
7458 @smallexample
7459 (ne:SI (and:SI @var{x} (const_int @var{power-of-2})) (const_int 0))
7460 @end smallexample
7461
7462 @noindent
7463 can be converted to
7464
7465 @smallexample
7466 (ashift:SI @var{x} (const_int @var{n}))
7467 @end smallexample
7468
7469 @noindent
7470 where @var{n} is the appropriate shift count to move the bit being
7471 tested into the sign bit.
7472
7473 There is no way to describe a machine that always sets the low-order bit
7474 for a true value, but does not guarantee the value of any other bits,
7475 but we do not know of any machine that has such an instruction. If you
7476 are trying to port GCC to such a machine, include an instruction to
7477 perform a logical-and of the result with 1 in the pattern for the
7478 comparison operators and let us know at @email{gcc@@gcc.gnu.org}.
7479
7480 Often, a machine will have multiple instructions that obtain a value
7481 from a comparison (or the condition codes). Here are rules to guide the
7482 choice of value for @code{STORE_FLAG_VALUE}, and hence the instructions
7483 to be used:
7484
7485 @itemize @bullet
7486 @item
7487 Use the shortest sequence that yields a valid definition for
7488 @code{STORE_FLAG_VALUE}. It is more efficient for the compiler to
7489 ``normalize'' the value (convert it to, e.g., 1 or 0) than for the
7490 comparison operators to do so because there may be opportunities to
7491 combine the normalization with other operations.
7492
7493 @item
7494 For equal-length sequences, use a value of 1 or @minus{}1, with @minus{}1 being
7495 slightly preferred on machines with expensive jumps and 1 preferred on
7496 other machines.
7497
7498 @item
7499 As a second choice, choose a value of @samp{0x80000001} if instructions
7500 exist that set both the sign and low-order bits but do not define the
7501 others.
7502
7503 @item
7504 Otherwise, use a value of @samp{0x80000000}.
7505 @end itemize
7506
7507 Many machines can produce both the value chosen for
7508 @code{STORE_FLAG_VALUE} and its negation in the same number of
7509 instructions. On those machines, you should also define a pattern for
7510 those cases, e.g., one matching
7511
7512 @smallexample
7513 (set @var{A} (neg:@var{m} (ne:@var{m} @var{B} @var{C})))
7514 @end smallexample
7515
7516 Some machines can also perform @code{and} or @code{plus} operations on
7517 condition code values with less instructions than the corresponding
7518 @samp{cstore@var{mode}4} insn followed by @code{and} or @code{plus}. On those
7519 machines, define the appropriate patterns. Use the names @code{incscc}
7520 and @code{decscc}, respectively, for the patterns which perform
7521 @code{plus} or @code{minus} operations on condition code values. See
7522 @file{rs6000.md} for some examples. The GNU Superoptimizer can be used to
7523 find such instruction sequences on other machines.
7524
7525 If this macro is not defined, the default value, 1, is used. You need
7526 not define @code{STORE_FLAG_VALUE} if the machine has no store-flag
7527 instructions, or if the value generated by these instructions is 1.
7528 @end defmac
7529
7530 @defmac FLOAT_STORE_FLAG_VALUE (@var{mode})
7531 A C expression that gives a nonzero @code{REAL_VALUE_TYPE} value that is
7532 returned when comparison operators with floating-point results are true.
7533 Define this macro on machines that have comparison operations that return
7534 floating-point values. If there are no such operations, do not define
7535 this macro.
7536 @end defmac
7537
7538 @defmac VECTOR_STORE_FLAG_VALUE (@var{mode})
7539 A C expression that gives an rtx representing the nonzero true element
7540 for vector comparisons. The returned rtx should be valid for the inner
7541 mode of @var{mode} which is guaranteed to be a vector mode. Define
7542 this macro on machines that have vector comparison operations that
7543 return a vector result. If there are no such operations, do not define
7544 this macro. Typically, this macro is defined as @code{const1_rtx} or
7545 @code{constm1_rtx}. This macro may return @code{NULL_RTX} to prevent
7546 the compiler optimizing such vector comparison operations for the
7547 given mode.
7548 @end defmac
7549
7550 @defmac CLZ_DEFINED_VALUE_AT_ZERO (@var{mode}, @var{value})
7551 @defmacx CTZ_DEFINED_VALUE_AT_ZERO (@var{mode}, @var{value})
7552 A C expression that indicates whether the architecture defines a value
7553 for @code{clz} or @code{ctz} with a zero operand.
7554 A result of @code{0} indicates the value is undefined.
7555 If the value is defined for only the RTL expression, the macro should
7556 evaluate to @code{1}; if the value applies also to the corresponding optab
7557 entry (which is normally the case if it expands directly into
7558 the corresponding RTL), then the macro should evaluate to @code{2}.
7559 In the cases where the value is defined, @var{value} should be set to
7560 this value.
7561
7562 If this macro is not defined, the value of @code{clz} or
7563 @code{ctz} at zero is assumed to be undefined.
7564
7565 This macro must be defined if the target's expansion for @code{ffs}
7566 relies on a particular value to get correct results. Otherwise it
7567 is not necessary, though it may be used to optimize some corner cases, and
7568 to provide a default expansion for the @code{ffs} optab.
7569
7570 Note that regardless of this macro the ``definedness'' of @code{clz}
7571 and @code{ctz} at zero do @emph{not} extend to the builtin functions
7572 visible to the user. Thus one may be free to adjust the value at will
7573 to match the target expansion of these operations without fear of
7574 breaking the API@.
7575 @end defmac
7576
7577 @defmac Pmode
7578 An alias for the machine mode for pointers. On most machines, define
7579 this to be the integer mode corresponding to the width of a hardware
7580 pointer; @code{SImode} on 32-bit machine or @code{DImode} on 64-bit machines.
7581 On some machines you must define this to be one of the partial integer
7582 modes, such as @code{PSImode}.
7583
7584 The width of @code{Pmode} must be at least as large as the value of
7585 @code{POINTER_SIZE}. If it is not equal, you must define the macro
7586 @code{POINTERS_EXTEND_UNSIGNED} to specify how pointers are extended
7587 to @code{Pmode}.
7588 @end defmac
7589
7590 @defmac FUNCTION_MODE
7591 An alias for the machine mode used for memory references to functions
7592 being called, in @code{call} RTL expressions. On most CISC machines,
7593 where an instruction can begin at any byte address, this should be
7594 @code{QImode}. On most RISC machines, where all instructions have fixed
7595 size and alignment, this should be a mode with the same size and alignment
7596 as the machine instruction words - typically @code{SImode} or @code{HImode}.
7597 @end defmac
7598
7599 @defmac STDC_0_IN_SYSTEM_HEADERS
7600 In normal operation, the preprocessor expands @code{__STDC__} to the
7601 constant 1, to signify that GCC conforms to ISO Standard C@. On some
7602 hosts, like Solaris, the system compiler uses a different convention,
7603 where @code{__STDC__} is normally 0, but is 1 if the user specifies
7604 strict conformance to the C Standard.
7605
7606 Defining @code{STDC_0_IN_SYSTEM_HEADERS} makes GNU CPP follows the host
7607 convention when processing system header files, but when processing user
7608 files @code{__STDC__} will always expand to 1.
7609 @end defmac
7610
7611 @hook TARGET_C_PREINCLUDE
7612
7613 @hook TARGET_CXX_IMPLICIT_EXTERN_C
7614
7615 @defmac SYSTEM_IMPLICIT_EXTERN_C
7616 Define this macro if the system header files do not support C++@.
7617 This macro handles system header files by pretending that system
7618 header files are enclosed in @samp{extern "C" @{@dots{}@}}.
7619 @end defmac
7620
7621 @findex #pragma
7622 @findex pragma
7623 @defmac REGISTER_TARGET_PRAGMAS ()
7624 Define this macro if you want to implement any target-specific pragmas.
7625 If defined, it is a C expression which makes a series of calls to
7626 @code{c_register_pragma} or @code{c_register_pragma_with_expansion}
7627 for each pragma. The macro may also do any
7628 setup required for the pragmas.
7629
7630 The primary reason to define this macro is to provide compatibility with
7631 other compilers for the same target. In general, we discourage
7632 definition of target-specific pragmas for GCC@.
7633
7634 If the pragma can be implemented by attributes then you should consider
7635 defining the target hook @samp{TARGET_INSERT_ATTRIBUTES} as well.
7636
7637 Preprocessor macros that appear on pragma lines are not expanded. All
7638 @samp{#pragma} directives that do not match any registered pragma are
7639 silently ignored, unless the user specifies @option{-Wunknown-pragmas}.
7640 @end defmac
7641
7642 @deftypefun void c_register_pragma (const char *@var{space}, const char *@var{name}, void (*@var{callback}) (struct cpp_reader *))
7643 @deftypefunx void c_register_pragma_with_expansion (const char *@var{space}, const char *@var{name}, void (*@var{callback}) (struct cpp_reader *))
7644
7645 Each call to @code{c_register_pragma} or
7646 @code{c_register_pragma_with_expansion} establishes one pragma. The
7647 @var{callback} routine will be called when the preprocessor encounters a
7648 pragma of the form
7649
7650 @smallexample
7651 #pragma [@var{space}] @var{name} @dots{}
7652 @end smallexample
7653
7654 @var{space} is the case-sensitive namespace of the pragma, or
7655 @code{NULL} to put the pragma in the global namespace. The callback
7656 routine receives @var{pfile} as its first argument, which can be passed
7657 on to cpplib's functions if necessary. You can lex tokens after the
7658 @var{name} by calling @code{pragma_lex}. Tokens that are not read by the
7659 callback will be silently ignored. The end of the line is indicated by
7660 a token of type @code{CPP_EOF}. Macro expansion occurs on the
7661 arguments of pragmas registered with
7662 @code{c_register_pragma_with_expansion} but not on the arguments of
7663 pragmas registered with @code{c_register_pragma}.
7664
7665 Note that the use of @code{pragma_lex} is specific to the C and C++
7666 compilers. It will not work in the Java or Fortran compilers, or any
7667 other language compilers for that matter. Thus if @code{pragma_lex} is going
7668 to be called from target-specific code, it must only be done so when
7669 building the C and C++ compilers. This can be done by defining the
7670 variables @code{c_target_objs} and @code{cxx_target_objs} in the
7671 target entry in the @file{config.gcc} file. These variables should name
7672 the target-specific, language-specific object file which contains the
7673 code that uses @code{pragma_lex}. Note it will also be necessary to add a
7674 rule to the makefile fragment pointed to by @code{tmake_file} that shows
7675 how to build this object file.
7676 @end deftypefun
7677
7678 @defmac HANDLE_PRAGMA_PACK_WITH_EXPANSION
7679 Define this macro if macros should be expanded in the
7680 arguments of @samp{#pragma pack}.
7681 @end defmac
7682
7683 @defmac TARGET_DEFAULT_PACK_STRUCT
7684 If your target requires a structure packing default other than 0 (meaning
7685 the machine default), define this macro to the necessary value (in bytes).
7686 This must be a value that would also be valid to use with
7687 @samp{#pragma pack()} (that is, a small power of two).
7688 @end defmac
7689
7690 @defmac DOLLARS_IN_IDENTIFIERS
7691 Define this macro to control use of the character @samp{$} in
7692 identifier names for the C family of languages. 0 means @samp{$} is
7693 not allowed by default; 1 means it is allowed. 1 is the default;
7694 there is no need to define this macro in that case.
7695 @end defmac
7696
7697 @defmac INSN_SETS_ARE_DELAYED (@var{insn})
7698 Define this macro as a C expression that is nonzero if it is safe for the
7699 delay slot scheduler to place instructions in the delay slot of @var{insn},
7700 even if they appear to use a resource set or clobbered in @var{insn}.
7701 @var{insn} is always a @code{jump_insn} or an @code{insn}; GCC knows that
7702 every @code{call_insn} has this behavior. On machines where some @code{insn}
7703 or @code{jump_insn} is really a function call and hence has this behavior,
7704 you should define this macro.
7705
7706 You need not define this macro if it would always return zero.
7707 @end defmac
7708
7709 @defmac INSN_REFERENCES_ARE_DELAYED (@var{insn})
7710 Define this macro as a C expression that is nonzero if it is safe for the
7711 delay slot scheduler to place instructions in the delay slot of @var{insn},
7712 even if they appear to set or clobber a resource referenced in @var{insn}.
7713 @var{insn} is always a @code{jump_insn} or an @code{insn}. On machines where
7714 some @code{insn} or @code{jump_insn} is really a function call and its operands
7715 are registers whose use is actually in the subroutine it calls, you should
7716 define this macro. Doing so allows the delay slot scheduler to move
7717 instructions which copy arguments into the argument registers into the delay
7718 slot of @var{insn}.
7719
7720 You need not define this macro if it would always return zero.
7721 @end defmac
7722
7723 @defmac MULTIPLE_SYMBOL_SPACES
7724 Define this macro as a C expression that is nonzero if, in some cases,
7725 global symbols from one translation unit may not be bound to undefined
7726 symbols in another translation unit without user intervention. For
7727 instance, under Microsoft Windows symbols must be explicitly imported
7728 from shared libraries (DLLs).
7729
7730 You need not define this macro if it would always evaluate to zero.
7731 @end defmac
7732
7733 @hook TARGET_MD_ASM_ADJUST
7734
7735 @defmac MATH_LIBRARY
7736 Define this macro as a C string constant for the linker argument to link
7737 in the system math library, minus the initial @samp{"-l"}, or
7738 @samp{""} if the target does not have a
7739 separate math library.
7740
7741 You need only define this macro if the default of @samp{"m"} is wrong.
7742 @end defmac
7743
7744 @defmac LIBRARY_PATH_ENV
7745 Define this macro as a C string constant for the environment variable that
7746 specifies where the linker should look for libraries.
7747
7748 You need only define this macro if the default of @samp{"LIBRARY_PATH"}
7749 is wrong.
7750 @end defmac
7751
7752 @defmac TARGET_POSIX_IO
7753 Define this macro if the target supports the following POSIX@ file
7754 functions, access, mkdir and file locking with fcntl / F_SETLKW@.
7755 Defining @code{TARGET_POSIX_IO} will enable the test coverage code
7756 to use file locking when exiting a program, which avoids race conditions
7757 if the program has forked. It will also create directories at run-time
7758 for cross-profiling.
7759 @end defmac
7760
7761 @defmac MAX_CONDITIONAL_EXECUTE
7762
7763 A C expression for the maximum number of instructions to execute via
7764 conditional execution instructions instead of a branch. A value of
7765 @code{BRANCH_COST}+1 is the default.
7766 @end defmac
7767
7768 @defmac IFCVT_MODIFY_TESTS (@var{ce_info}, @var{true_expr}, @var{false_expr})
7769 Used if the target needs to perform machine-dependent modifications on the
7770 conditionals used for turning basic blocks into conditionally executed code.
7771 @var{ce_info} points to a data structure, @code{struct ce_if_block}, which
7772 contains information about the currently processed blocks. @var{true_expr}
7773 and @var{false_expr} are the tests that are used for converting the
7774 then-block and the else-block, respectively. Set either @var{true_expr} or
7775 @var{false_expr} to a null pointer if the tests cannot be converted.
7776 @end defmac
7777
7778 @defmac IFCVT_MODIFY_MULTIPLE_TESTS (@var{ce_info}, @var{bb}, @var{true_expr}, @var{false_expr})
7779 Like @code{IFCVT_MODIFY_TESTS}, but used when converting more complicated
7780 if-statements into conditions combined by @code{and} and @code{or} operations.
7781 @var{bb} contains the basic block that contains the test that is currently
7782 being processed and about to be turned into a condition.
7783 @end defmac
7784
7785 @defmac IFCVT_MODIFY_INSN (@var{ce_info}, @var{pattern}, @var{insn})
7786 A C expression to modify the @var{PATTERN} of an @var{INSN} that is to
7787 be converted to conditional execution format. @var{ce_info} points to
7788 a data structure, @code{struct ce_if_block}, which contains information
7789 about the currently processed blocks.
7790 @end defmac
7791
7792 @defmac IFCVT_MODIFY_FINAL (@var{ce_info})
7793 A C expression to perform any final machine dependent modifications in
7794 converting code to conditional execution. The involved basic blocks
7795 can be found in the @code{struct ce_if_block} structure that is pointed
7796 to by @var{ce_info}.
7797 @end defmac
7798
7799 @defmac IFCVT_MODIFY_CANCEL (@var{ce_info})
7800 A C expression to cancel any machine dependent modifications in
7801 converting code to conditional execution. The involved basic blocks
7802 can be found in the @code{struct ce_if_block} structure that is pointed
7803 to by @var{ce_info}.
7804 @end defmac
7805
7806 @defmac IFCVT_MACHDEP_INIT (@var{ce_info})
7807 A C expression to initialize any machine specific data for if-conversion
7808 of the if-block in the @code{struct ce_if_block} structure that is pointed
7809 to by @var{ce_info}.
7810 @end defmac
7811
7812 @hook TARGET_USE_LATE_PROLOGUE_EPILOGUE
7813
7814 @hook TARGET_EMIT_EPILOGUE_FOR_SIBCALL
7815
7816 @hook TARGET_MACHINE_DEPENDENT_REORG
7817
7818 @hook TARGET_INIT_BUILTINS
7819
7820 @hook TARGET_BUILTIN_DECL
7821
7822 @hook TARGET_EXPAND_BUILTIN
7823
7824 @hook TARGET_RESOLVE_OVERLOADED_BUILTIN
7825
7826 @hook TARGET_CHECK_BUILTIN_CALL
7827
7828 @hook TARGET_FOLD_BUILTIN
7829
7830 @hook TARGET_GIMPLE_FOLD_BUILTIN
7831
7832 @hook TARGET_COMPARE_VERSION_PRIORITY
7833
7834 @hook TARGET_GET_FUNCTION_VERSIONS_DISPATCHER
7835
7836 @hook TARGET_GENERATE_VERSION_DISPATCHER_BODY
7837
7838 @hook TARGET_PREDICT_DOLOOP_P
7839
7840 @hook TARGET_HAVE_COUNT_REG_DECR_P
7841
7842 @hook TARGET_DOLOOP_COST_FOR_GENERIC
7843
7844 @hook TARGET_DOLOOP_COST_FOR_ADDRESS
7845
7846 @hook TARGET_CAN_USE_DOLOOP_P
7847
7848 @hook TARGET_INVALID_WITHIN_DOLOOP
7849
7850 @hook TARGET_PREFERRED_DOLOOP_MODE
7851
7852 @hook TARGET_LEGITIMATE_COMBINED_INSN
7853
7854 @hook TARGET_CAN_FOLLOW_JUMP
7855
7856 @hook TARGET_COMMUTATIVE_P
7857
7858 @hook TARGET_ALLOCATE_INITIAL_VALUE
7859
7860 @hook TARGET_UNSPEC_MAY_TRAP_P
7861
7862 @hook TARGET_SET_CURRENT_FUNCTION
7863
7864 @defmac TARGET_OBJECT_SUFFIX
7865 Define this macro to be a C string representing the suffix for object
7866 files on your target machine. If you do not define this macro, GCC will
7867 use @samp{.o} as the suffix for object files.
7868 @end defmac
7869
7870 @defmac TARGET_EXECUTABLE_SUFFIX
7871 Define this macro to be a C string representing the suffix to be
7872 automatically added to executable files on your target machine. If you
7873 do not define this macro, GCC will use the null string as the suffix for
7874 executable files.
7875 @end defmac
7876
7877 @defmac COLLECT_EXPORT_LIST
7878 If defined, @code{collect2} will scan the individual object files
7879 specified on its command line and create an export list for the linker.
7880 Define this macro for systems like AIX, where the linker discards
7881 object files that are not referenced from @code{main} and uses export
7882 lists.
7883 @end defmac
7884
7885 @hook TARGET_CANNOT_MODIFY_JUMPS_P
7886
7887 @hook TARGET_HAVE_CONDITIONAL_EXECUTION
7888
7889 @hook TARGET_GEN_CCMP_FIRST
7890
7891 @hook TARGET_GEN_CCMP_NEXT
7892
7893 @hook TARGET_LOOP_UNROLL_ADJUST
7894
7895 @defmac POWI_MAX_MULTS
7896 If defined, this macro is interpreted as a signed integer C expression
7897 that specifies the maximum number of floating point multiplications
7898 that should be emitted when expanding exponentiation by an integer
7899 constant inline. When this value is defined, exponentiation requiring
7900 more than this number of multiplications is implemented by calling the
7901 system library's @code{pow}, @code{powf} or @code{powl} routines.
7902 The default value places no upper bound on the multiplication count.
7903 @end defmac
7904
7905 @deftypefn Macro void TARGET_EXTRA_INCLUDES (const char *@var{sysroot}, const char *@var{iprefix}, int @var{stdinc})
7906 This target hook should register any extra include files for the
7907 target. The parameter @var{stdinc} indicates if normal include files
7908 are present. The parameter @var{sysroot} is the system root directory.
7909 The parameter @var{iprefix} is the prefix for the gcc directory.
7910 @end deftypefn
7911
7912 @deftypefn Macro void TARGET_EXTRA_PRE_INCLUDES (const char *@var{sysroot}, const char *@var{iprefix}, int @var{stdinc})
7913 This target hook should register any extra include files for the
7914 target before any standard headers. The parameter @var{stdinc}
7915 indicates if normal include files are present. The parameter
7916 @var{sysroot} is the system root directory. The parameter
7917 @var{iprefix} is the prefix for the gcc directory.
7918 @end deftypefn
7919
7920 @deftypefn Macro void TARGET_OPTF (char *@var{path})
7921 This target hook should register special include paths for the target.
7922 The parameter @var{path} is the include to register. On Darwin
7923 systems, this is used for Framework includes, which have semantics
7924 that are different from @option{-I}.
7925 @end deftypefn
7926
7927 @defmac bool TARGET_USE_LOCAL_THUNK_ALIAS_P (tree @var{fndecl})
7928 This target macro returns @code{true} if it is safe to use a local alias
7929 for a virtual function @var{fndecl} when constructing thunks,
7930 @code{false} otherwise. By default, the macro returns @code{true} for all
7931 functions, if a target supports aliases (i.e.@: defines
7932 @code{ASM_OUTPUT_DEF}), @code{false} otherwise,
7933 @end defmac
7934
7935 @defmac TARGET_FORMAT_TYPES
7936 If defined, this macro is the name of a global variable containing
7937 target-specific format checking information for the @option{-Wformat}
7938 option. The default is to have no target-specific format checks.
7939 @end defmac
7940
7941 @defmac TARGET_N_FORMAT_TYPES
7942 If defined, this macro is the number of entries in
7943 @code{TARGET_FORMAT_TYPES}.
7944 @end defmac
7945
7946 @defmac TARGET_OVERRIDES_FORMAT_ATTRIBUTES
7947 If defined, this macro is the name of a global variable containing
7948 target-specific format overrides for the @option{-Wformat} option. The
7949 default is to have no target-specific format overrides. If defined,
7950 @code{TARGET_FORMAT_TYPES} and @code{TARGET_OVERRIDES_FORMAT_ATTRIBUTES_COUNT}
7951 must be defined, too.
7952 @end defmac
7953
7954 @defmac TARGET_OVERRIDES_FORMAT_ATTRIBUTES_COUNT
7955 If defined, this macro specifies the number of entries in
7956 @code{TARGET_OVERRIDES_FORMAT_ATTRIBUTES}.
7957 @end defmac
7958
7959 @defmac TARGET_OVERRIDES_FORMAT_INIT
7960 If defined, this macro specifies the optional initialization
7961 routine for target specific customizations of the system printf
7962 and scanf formatter settings.
7963 @end defmac
7964
7965 @hook TARGET_INVALID_ARG_FOR_UNPROTOTYPED_FN
7966
7967 @hook TARGET_INVALID_CONVERSION
7968
7969 @hook TARGET_INVALID_UNARY_OP
7970
7971 @hook TARGET_INVALID_BINARY_OP
7972
7973 @hook TARGET_PROMOTED_TYPE
7974
7975 @hook TARGET_CONVERT_TO_TYPE
7976
7977 @hook TARGET_VERIFY_TYPE_CONTEXT
7978
7979 @defmac OBJC_JBLEN
7980 This macro determines the size of the objective C jump buffer for the
7981 NeXT runtime. By default, OBJC_JBLEN is defined to an innocuous value.
7982 @end defmac
7983
7984 @defmac LIBGCC2_UNWIND_ATTRIBUTE
7985 Define this macro if any target-specific attributes need to be attached
7986 to the functions in @file{libgcc} that provide low-level support for
7987 call stack unwinding. It is used in declarations in @file{unwind-generic.h}
7988 and the associated definitions of those functions.
7989 @end defmac
7990
7991 @hook TARGET_UPDATE_STACK_BOUNDARY
7992
7993 @hook TARGET_GET_DRAP_RTX
7994
7995 @hook TARGET_ZERO_CALL_USED_REGS
7996
7997 @hook TARGET_ALLOCATE_STACK_SLOTS_FOR_ARGS
7998
7999 @hook TARGET_CONST_ANCHOR
8000
8001 @hook TARGET_ASAN_SHADOW_OFFSET
8002
8003 @hook TARGET_MEMMODEL_CHECK
8004
8005 @hook TARGET_ATOMIC_TEST_AND_SET_TRUEVAL
8006
8007 @hook TARGET_HAS_IFUNC_P
8008
8009 @hook TARGET_IFUNC_REF_LOCAL_OK
8010
8011 @hook TARGET_ATOMIC_ALIGN_FOR_MODE
8012
8013 @hook TARGET_ATOMIC_ASSIGN_EXPAND_FENV
8014
8015 @hook TARGET_RECORD_OFFLOAD_SYMBOL
8016
8017 @hook TARGET_OFFLOAD_OPTIONS
8018
8019 @defmac TARGET_SUPPORTS_WIDE_INT
8020
8021 On older ports, large integers are stored in @code{CONST_DOUBLE} rtl
8022 objects. Newer ports define @code{TARGET_SUPPORTS_WIDE_INT} to be nonzero
8023 to indicate that large integers are stored in
8024 @code{CONST_WIDE_INT} rtl objects. The @code{CONST_WIDE_INT} allows
8025 very large integer constants to be represented. @code{CONST_DOUBLE}
8026 is limited to twice the size of the host's @code{HOST_WIDE_INT}
8027 representation.
8028
8029 Converting a port mostly requires looking for the places where
8030 @code{CONST_DOUBLE}s are used with @code{VOIDmode} and replacing that
8031 code with code that accesses @code{CONST_WIDE_INT}s. @samp{"grep -i
8032 const_double"} at the port level gets you to 95% of the changes that
8033 need to be made. There are a few places that require a deeper look.
8034
8035 @itemize @bullet
8036 @item
8037 There is no equivalent to @code{hval} and @code{lval} for
8038 @code{CONST_WIDE_INT}s. This would be difficult to express in the md
8039 language since there are a variable number of elements.
8040
8041 Most ports only check that @code{hval} is either 0 or -1 to see if the
8042 value is small. As mentioned above, this will no longer be necessary
8043 since small constants are always @code{CONST_INT}. Of course there
8044 are still a few exceptions, the alpha's constraint used by the zap
8045 instruction certainly requires careful examination by C code.
8046 However, all the current code does is pass the hval and lval to C
8047 code, so evolving the c code to look at the @code{CONST_WIDE_INT} is
8048 not really a large change.
8049
8050 @item
8051 Because there is no standard template that ports use to materialize
8052 constants, there is likely to be some futzing that is unique to each
8053 port in this code.
8054
8055 @item
8056 The rtx costs may have to be adjusted to properly account for larger
8057 constants that are represented as @code{CONST_WIDE_INT}.
8058 @end itemize
8059
8060 All and all it does not take long to convert ports that the
8061 maintainer is familiar with.
8062
8063 @end defmac
8064
8065 @hook TARGET_HAVE_SPECULATION_SAFE_VALUE
8066
8067 @hook TARGET_SPECULATION_SAFE_VALUE
8068
8069 @hook TARGET_RUN_TARGET_SELFTESTS
8070
8071 @hook TARGET_MEMTAG_CAN_TAG_ADDRESSES
8072
8073 @hook TARGET_MEMTAG_TAG_SIZE
8074
8075 @hook TARGET_MEMTAG_GRANULE_SIZE
8076
8077 @hook TARGET_MEMTAG_INSERT_RANDOM_TAG
8078
8079 @hook TARGET_MEMTAG_ADD_TAG
8080
8081 @hook TARGET_MEMTAG_SET_TAG
8082
8083 @hook TARGET_MEMTAG_EXTRACT_TAG
8084
8085 @hook TARGET_MEMTAG_UNTAGGED_POINTER
8086
8087 @hook TARGET_HAVE_SHADOW_CALL_STACK
8088
8089 @hook TARGET_HAVE_LIBATOMIC